This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
!>.'
^^^
§j |j jCs^ i^
r
M
'^"^-^
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
or THE
PEABODY MUSEUM
GIFT OF
ROLAND BURRAGE DIXON
OF HARVARD, MASSACHUSETTS
RcociTed May 7i »93^
t^lTf
1...
?-r£Mr7
?^|;>^
l^^^^*^
^S^^Ssfe^v^^^^
^
1
^
f
^J^KSTi^JS''
?s
yj
wur^rl
^
[|
J
^
i§A5^
'^^i
^g
«J
?* jcTivYjr^.?^
i^S
^
[-^
i:^^
^»1
^^^^
s^T''^^
/S
^^^^^^
^^^^^^
^^
MSĔ^M®^
^L!j^:a7S^^
Digitized by
Google
GRAMMAR
OF THE
MJLLAYUJV LAJVGUAGE,
WITH
AN INTRODUCTION AND PRAXIS-
By WILLIAM ^ARSDEN, F.R.S.
AVTBOJt OF TBB MALAYJN DICTIONARY^ AND OF THS HISTORY OF SUMATRA.
i.oni>on:
Printed for the AUTHOR by Cox and Batlxs, 75, Great Qaeen-Stitet, Lincoln VInn-FieUi |
and sold by Lovomav, Hurst, Rees, Orme, and Browv, Paternoster-Row;
' and BlacKi Pamit^ and Co. Booksellers to the Honoorable East-India
Company, Leadenhall^trect.
1812.
3 / 7f^
c/h(l
Digitized by
Google
As. fy\ ^^^2^
Reed hxc^^l.nsip
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION-
The Malayan, or, according to the pronunciation of the
natives, the Malayu language (of which a Dictionary was
lately, and a Grammar is now offered to the puhlic) prevails
throughout a very extensive portion of what is vaguely termed
the East-Indies, including the southern part of the peninsula
heyond the Ganges, now bearing the name of the Malayan
peninsula, together with the islands of Sumatra, java, borneo,
CELEBES, and innumerable others, as far to the eastward as the
MOLUCCAS, emphatically termed the Spice-islands, to the south-
ward, as the island of timor, and to the northward, as the
PHILIPPINES; forming collectively the Malayan archipelago.
This great insular region may also not inaptly receive the ap-
pellation of the Hither Polynesia, as distinguished from the
Further Polynesia or vast expanse of South-sea islands, be-
tween which, NEW guinea may be considered as the common
boundary. The name of Polynesia, as applied to this tract,
was first used by m. be brosses, and afterwards adopted by the
late Mr. A. BALRYMPLE.
It must at the same time be understood that the islands of this
archipelago, for the most part, especially those of the larger
class, and the peninsula itself, have also their own peculiar lan-
guages, (whether radically differing or not, will be hereafter exa-
mined) spoken by the inhabitants of the inland country, whilst the
a Malavan
Digitized by
Google
ii INTRODUCTION.
Malayan is generally employed in the districts bordering on the
sea-coasts and the mouths and banks of navigable rivers. It is
Consequently the medium of commercial and foreign intercourse,
and every person, of whatever nation, who frequents a port of
trade must negociate his business in this tongue, either speaking
it himself or employing an interpreter. From hence it is that,
by comparison with a similar prevalence of a dialect of ItaUan or
Cataloniaii along the shores of the Mediterranean, it has com-
monly received the appellation of the lingua franca of the East.
On the continent of India however it has not obtained any foot-
ing, or is known only to those merchants and seamen who are
engaged in what is denominated the Eastern trade.
That the Malayan language has obtained this extensive cur*
rency is attributable in the first place to the enterprising and
commercial character of the people, who either by force of arms
or in the spirit of mercantile speculation, have established them-
selves in every part of the archipelago convenient for their pur-
suits y and perhaps in an equal degree, to the qualities of the
language itself, being remarkably soft and easy of pronunciation,
simple in the grammatical relation of its words, and in the
construction of its sentences, plain and natural. The attention
indeed to smoothness of utterance is so great that not only, in
the formation of derivatives, letters are systematically changed
in order to please the ear, but also in words borrowed from the
continental tongues, the Malays are accustomed to polish down
the rougher consonants to the standard of their own organs.
As a written language the Malayan has been cultivated with
no inconsiderable degree of care, and however the dialects as
spoken may vary from each other in the sound of certain vowels
(as will be noticed particularly in the grammar}, or by the
adoption
Digitized by
Google
i
INTRODUCTION. Hi
adoption of local and barbarous terms from the inland people or
from Europeans^ there is a striking consistency in the style of
writing, not only of books in prose and verse, but also of epis-
tolary correspondence, and my own experience has proved to me
that no greater diflSculty attends the translation of letters from
the princes of the Molucca islands, than from those of Kedah or
Trangganu in the peninsula, or of Menangkabau in Sumatra,
Nor is this uniformity surprising when we consider that none of
the compositions in their present form can be presumed more
ancient than tlie introduction of the Mahometan religion in the
fourteenth or, at soonest, the thirteenth century, at which period
the Arabic mode of writing must likewise have been adopted ;
for although it cannot be doubted that the Malays, as well as the
other natives of these countries, made use of a written character
previously to that great innovation, yet the general style of com-
position must have received a strong tincture from its new dress,
and this Arabian garb being similar throughout the different
islands, we are naturally led to expect a more marked resem-
blance in the language so clothed than in the original nakedness
of the oral dialects.
The antiquity of these dialects we are entirely without the
means of ascertaining, so modem is the acquaintance of Euro*
peans with that part of the East. The earliest specimen we
possess is that furnished by the circumnavigator pigapetta, the
companion of Magellhan, who visited the island of TedorJ in the
year 1521, and whose vocabulary, in spite of the unavoidable
errors of transcription and printing, accords as exactly with the
Malayan of the present day as those formed by any of our
modern travellers, and proves that no material alteration in the
tongue has taken place in the course of three centuries. In the
vocabulary
* I
Digitized by
Google
iv INTRODUCTION.
vocabulary collected by the Dutch navigators at Ternati, in 1599
Q^ servant de promptuaire h ceux qui y desirent naviguer, car la
langue Malayte s'use par toutes les Indes Orientales, principale-
ment ez Molucques '') we equally find an enth^e identity with the
modem dialect.
Having described the language as confined in general to the sea-
coasts of those countries where it is spoken^ and consequently as
that of settlers or traders, we are naturally led to inquire in what
particular country it is indigenous, and from whence it has ex-
tended itself throughout the archipelago. Many difficulties will
be found to attend the solution of this question, partly occasioned
by the bias of received opinions, grounded on the plausible asser-
tions of those who have written on the subject, and partly from
the want of discriminating between the country from whence
the language may be presumed to have originally proceeded, and
that country from whence, at a subsequent period, numerous
colonies and commercial adventurers issuing, widely diffused it
amongst the islands whose rich produce in spices, gold, and
other articles attracted their cupidity. From the peninsula espe-
cially, where trade is known to have flourished for several cen-
turies with extraordinary vigour and to have occasioned a corres-
pondent population, these migrations took place, and it was
natural for those travellers who in early times visited Malacca^
Johor^ and other populous towns in that quarter, to bestow on
it the appellation of the Malayan, peninsula, or (with much less
propriety) the peninsula of Malacca^ and to consider it as the
mother country of the Malays, which in fact it is with respect
to the colonies it has so abundantly sent forth. But subsequent
investigation has taught us that in the peninsula itself the ma-
lays were only settlers, and that the interior districts, like those
of
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION.
of the islands in general^ are inhabited by distinct races of men.
Among these ^re the orang henua or aborigines noticed by Mr»
RAFFi^ES in his valuable paper on the Malikfu nation^ printed in
the Asiat. Res. . vol. xii. ^^ The Malays (says this gentleman^
whose recent appointment to a situation of as great trust and
importance as a nation can confide to an individual^ justifies the
opinion that in a former vrork I had an opportunity of expressing
with regard to his talents) seem here to have occupied a country
previously unappropriated ; for if we except an inconsiderable
race of CaffrieSj who are occasionally found near the mountains,
and a few tribes of the oTaiag benua^ there does not exist a ves«
tige of a nation anterior to the Malays, in the whole peninsula.
As the population of the Malay peninmla has excited much
interest, my attention has been particularly directed to the
various tribes stated to be scattered over the country. Those on
the hills are usually termed Samangy and are woolly headed ;
those on the plain^ orang benHa^ or people belonging to the
country ; the word benua being applied by the Malays to any
extensive country, as benua Ckinay benua KeUng : but it appears
to be only a sort of Malay plural to the Arabic word ben or beni^
signifying a tribe. The early adventurers from Arabia fre^
quently make mention in their writings of the diflferent tribes
they met with to the eastward, and from them most probably the
Malays have adopted the term orarhg benua/* From the paucity
of their numbers as here described we are led to remark that
they must have been reduced in an extraordinary degree, either
by wars or by proselytism (which tends to confound them with
the Malays) since the days of the Portuguese government. I must
further take the liberty of observing with respect to the word
^ beniiay (as being of importance in the present investigation)
b that
Digitized by
Google
ti INTRODUCTION.
that it is entirely unconnected with the Arabic ^ hem ^^ sons or
tribe/' from which it cannot be derired by any rule or analogy
whatever; but is^ on the contrary, a genuine Malayan term,
signifying " country, region, land,'' or one of those radical
wcMrds which the Malayan has in common with the other East- <
insular or Polynesian languages, being found not only in the
JBisaya. and other dialects of the Philippines, but also in the
South-sea languages under the form (differing, more in appear-
ance than reality) of ^* whennua " and ^^fenuaJ^ To render it '
applicable to ^^ persons," the word orang must be prefixed, and
orang benua signifies Kterally and strictly *^ the people of the
land," as distinguished from foreign settlers or invaders ; and
this phrase alone affords no weak proof (if others were wanting)
that the Malays do not regard themselves as the original inha-
bitants, but as the occupiers only, of the country.
In the neighbouring island of Sumatra, on the contrary,
the kingdom which occupies the central part and claims a para-
mount jurisdiction over the whole ; which in ancient times was
of great celebrity, and even in its ruins is the object of super-
stitious veneration with all descriptions of inhabitants; this
kingdom of Menarigkabau is entirely peopled with Malays, the
language there spoken is Malayan only, and no tradition exists
of the country having ever been inhabited by any other race.
So strong indeed is the notion of their own originality, that they
commence their national history with an account of Noah's
flood, and of the disembarkation of certain persons from the
Ark, at a place between the mouths of Palemhang and Jamhi
rivers, who were their lineal ancestors ; which belief, however
futile, serves to shew that they consider themselves as the orang
benuQ or people of the soil, indigence non advence.^
From
/
Digitized by
Google
FNTRODirCTION. Vxi
From sucb a Malayan country rather than from any maritime
establishments, which always bear the stamp of colonization^ we
might be justified in presuming the Malays of other parts to
have proceeded in the first instance; but it happens that we are
not obliged to rest our opinion upon this reasoning from proba-
Inlities^ for we hare in support of it the authority of the native
historians of the peninsula, the moist distinguished of whom
assert in positive terms that the earliest Malayan settlers there^
by whom the city of Singa^pura was founded at ujang tanah or
*^ the extremity of the land,^' in the twelfth century, migrated
in the spirit of adventure from Sumatra, where they had pre-
viously inhabited a district on the banks of the river Malayu^
said, in the style of mythology, to have its source in the moun-
tain of Maha-meru. For some details respecting this emigra-
tion, the transactions that succeeded, the expulsion of the
Malays from Singa-puray in the reign of their fifth lung, Sri
Iskander Shah, by the forces of the king of Majapahity at that
time the principal monarch of java, their founding the city of
Malacca in 1253, and also respecting the connexion still under-
stood to subsist between Manangkahau as the parent state, and
that of Membau, a district situated inland of Malacca, ^^ the
nifa of which, as well>as his oflScers receive their authority and
appointments from the Sumatran sovereign,'^ I must take the
liberty of referring the reader to the History of Sumatra (ed ,
3. p. 325 to 345}, in which he will find the authorities for what
is here advanced, collected and discussed. It is not however tc
be confidently expected that an opinion so much at variance witU
those hitherto prevailing on the subject, will be adopted without
farther and strict investigation. To the advocates for the supe-
riority of the Malays of the peninsula and t>f their language
over
Digitized by
GoogI(
vui INTRODUCTION,
over what they term provincial dialects, I have only to say tliat
k is by no means my intention to contest that superiority^ how*
ever ideal, which may have been acquired by a more extensive
intercourse with other nations, but only to state the grounds for
a beJief that the generic name of MuldyUy now so widely disse*
minated, did not in its origin belong to that country, but to
the interior of the opposite island, where, in the neighbom*hood
of the mountain of Sur^ei-pagUy so celebrated for its gold mines^
and from whence rivers are said to flow towards either coast, it
is found as a common appellative at this day, and particularly
belongs to the great tribe of Sungei-pagu MalayUy of whom an
account i$ given in the work of vai^bntyn, v decl, " Beschry-
vinge van Sunfatra,^' p. 13, 14.
In discussing this subject it becomes necessary for iue to ob«
serve upon some passages in a paper ^^ on the Languages and
Litejcature of the Indo-Chinese nations '^ printed in vol x. of the
Asiat. Researches. The untimely and unfortunate loss of its
ingenious author, under circumstances the most favourable for
the prosecution of his inquiries, I deeply r^ret, and the more
{)ointedly as I feel myself called upon, in defence of my own, to
question the correctness of several of his opinions that appear
to have been too hastily adopted, and which I wished him to
have brought to the test of local knowledge. " The Menamg^
kdbow race (he states) who seem at an early period to have ruled
the whole island of Sumatra^ whose chief assumes the title of
Maha Maja of RcgaSy and derives his origin from Lankcqmra^
speak a dialect of Malayu which differs considerably from that
of the peninsula; but which seems, as far as I can judge, to
coincide in many respects with the Jawa or Javanese language.
The race have probably derived their origin from Langkapura
in
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. ix
in Jufcay In support of Dr. IiByden's favourite system^ the
object of which is to derive the language and literature of the
Malays from java, the dialect of Menangkabau is here asserted
to have much more affinity to the Javanese than to the Malayan
of the peninsula ; but all who are acqu^nted with these coun-
tries must know that the Javanese^ although a radical affinity
exists and many words are common to both, is a distinct lan-
guage from the Malayan» not reciprocally understood by the
natives (the Javans usually acquiring the. lafcter for the purposes
of intercourse), and written in a diflferent character ^ whilst, on
the contrary, the dialect of Malayan spoken in Sumatra diflfers
from that of the peninsula in pronunciation merely or the mcMre
or less broad terminating vowels, as remarked by Mr. rafi'i.es.
It must further be remarked that in the same page whwe Pr«
I.SYDEN read that the Maharaja derived his origin from Langka^
pura (Hist, of Sum. p. 340) he must have likewise seen that it
is situated (according to the pompous edict, and whether imagi-
nary or not is of little importance) between Palembang and
Jambi, on the eastern coast of Sumatra, and by no means on
Jiava, where no such name is to be found.
It is not a little remarkable that in the correspondence of the
Malays, and I allude especially to the chiefs of the various dis*"
tricts of the peninsula, whose letters I possess in great numbers^
the term ^^ malayUy' as applied to themselves or other eastern
people, very rarely occurs, and that instead of it they familiarly
employ the phrase of orcmg de^bawak angiriy signifying the " lee-
ward people,'^ or literally, ^* the people beneath the wind," in
contradistinction to the orang de^atas arfgin^ " windward people,''
or those " above the wind."' Froip whence this meteorological
rather than geographical distinction haa arisen» or upon what
o principle
Digitized by
Google
X INTRODUCTION.
pfinciple of trade widd or monsoon it is to be justified^ I am una-
blie to determine ; nor is the Consideration of equal moment with
that of ascertaining the regidn to which the distinction is applied.
The earliest notice of it is to be found in the asia of de ba&-
Ros, sixth Bo6k 6f the second Decade^ where we are toM that
^^ previously to the founding of the city of Malacca, that of
Sir^a-^um was reslorted to by the nav^ators of the western seas
of India^ as well as by those of countries lying to the eastward
of it^ such as Statti» China, Chiampa, Cambqja, and the many
thousand islands scattered over the eastern ocean. On these two
regions of the^obe the natives (of tibe eastern part) bestow ihe
appdlation of de^hawdh a9%in and atas angin, signifying bdow
the wind and above the wind^ or Western and Eastern. For as
the principal navigation in tibese seas is either from the Bay df
B^gal^ on the one side^ or ^m the great golf .which extends
itself towards the coasts of China and far to the northward^ on
the other^ they ivith reason oonaidered that quarter in which the
sun rises^ the upper^ and that in whicSi he sets the nether side
with respect to the situation of Singa-pnra.'^ Unfortunately
however for this plausible solution it happens that the Portu*
guese historian^ who was not locally acquainted with the coun-
try, has misconceived the relative drcumriances^ which are
exactly the reverse of what lie has stated^ the leeward people
being situated^ not towards the ^setting but the rising sun. By
VAi^ENTYN^ the elaborate Dutch oriental historian^ who com-
posed his great work on the spot^ we are informed (v. deel,
Beschryvinge ybjI' Malakka, p. 310) that *^ the Malays are
commonly nsimed vrang de^bawah ar^in, leeward people or
easterlings^ and the inhabitants of the western countries^ espe-
cially the Arabians^ orafig atas atigin, windward people or wes-
terlings ;'*
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. . xi
terlings;'^ bat he does not attempt to ex[^ii the meaniDg of the
terms^ or to assign any grounds for the distinction. These two
authorities being thus obviously at yariance with regard to the
specific application^ it becomes necessary to have recourse to
that €f the natives themselves^ by whom the terms are so fre«
gently employed. In a book containing a digest of their cere-^
moniai law^ focmded on the precepts of the karan, the following
passage presents itself: *^ Pada segala negri tang de^hamah at^n
orang meng-korban-kan karbau itu ter^a/zal deri^pada lemhu in
all the countries beneath the wind the people sacrifice die buflyo
in preference to the ox." Now as it is well known^ and will be
admitted, that the karbau or buffalo is the animsd usually killed
both for food and sacrifice in the ^rther East, and that, on the
other hand, it is not a native of Arabia, it follows that the negi'i
de-bawah angin must apply to the former, and cannot to the
latter or western country.
To my readers in general, who have not formed any previous
opinion, I should deem it unnecessary to adduce further proofis,
but as some of my friends abroad, to whom I proposed a ques*
tion on the subject of these relative terms, furnished me with
explanations not very consistent with each other, one of thcan
(whose practical knowledge of the language as well as the man-
ners of the natives has seldom been equalled) assuring me that
they referred to the superior and inferior ranks of people in so-
ciety, I shall transcribe a passage or two from the correspon-
dence of the Malayan princes of the peninsula, which may
perhaps be thought decisive. *^ Govrandor pulau ptnang taiig
memegang parentah kompant dan tang meriolong raja-raja cfe-
bawah angin tni dan mashur-lah warta-^nia de-hawak angin dan
de^atas aiigin the governor of Piilo Ptnang who exercises the
authority
Digitized by
Google
xii INTRODUCTION.
authority of the Company j who gives assistance to the chiefs
of ^Ae^e leeward countries^ and whose fame. is celebrated both
beneath the wind and above the wind/' And again : ^^ Ada
shekh ttga tang andak pulang ka drahi maka cmdak^lah anak
kJta tolong tumpang-kan ka-pcula kapal tang andak pergi ka^
sablak atas angin sdna there are three sheiks who wish to return
to Arabia. Will my son have the goodness to assist them with
a passage by a ship proceeding towards those windward (western)
parts ?'' Here at least there can be no ambiguity with respect
to the geographical appropriation of the term.
On the western coast of Sumatra the name of drang atas
ar^in is commonly applied to the inhabitants of a maritime dis-
trict in the neighbourhood of the country from whence the prin-
cipal quantity of gold is procured^ and has been generally un«
derstood to have a reference to the direction of the westerly
monsoon^ supposed to vary several points above and below In-
dra-pura. Suspecting however that this might have been an
opinion gratuitously adopted, or an accommodation of the fact
to the etymology, I requested Mr. charles hollow ay, an in-
telligent gentleman, then chief of Padangy to let me know the
acceptation of the phrase amongst the inhabitants of that place,
situated as it is within the district of which we are speaking.
To this he replied, that ^^ the atas angin people were not consi-
dered as drang darat or ^^ natives of the land,'' like those of
Menangkahau^ but generally as adventurers, being a mixture of
all nations, residing at the mouths of the rivers and along the
sea-shore, from Ayef Aji as far to the northward as JSarus,
where the Achinese territory commences; and that a Menarigka^
hau man would feel very indignant at being confounded with
people of this description :'' from whence it is evident that they
have
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xiii
have no claim to be excepted from the foregoing definition of
western foreigners, or settlers from Arabia, Persia, and the
coasts of the peninsula of India, attracted by the richness of the
trade, and intermixed with the natives of the country by mar^
riages, or rather, perhaps, in these days; the progeny of such
mixtiire.
Upon the subject of these terms m»*. raffles has judiciously
observed to me that in their collective sense they are equivalent
to the Arabic expression (^\j>j^ drabu q/eniy denoting all man-
kind, as Greeks and Barbarians, Jews and Gentiles ; which is
perfectly true as to the universality, but the Malays do not, in
imitation of those arrogant phrases, assume to themselves a su-
periority over the rest of the world ; for however, as Maho-
metans, believing in one God, they might be inclined to rank
themselves above all polytheists, this sentiment cannot apply to
other Mahometans of the continent of India, much less to their
religious instructors the Arabians. Their expression must be
considered as a mere local designation, serving to draw a line
between the countries and people situated to the eastward of
^cAm-head or entrance of the straits of Malacca, who are the
orang de-bawah atigin, and those situated to the westward of
that meridian, who are the orang de-atas ar^in. Precision, at
the same time, is not to be looked for in matters of this nature,
and I am unable to det^mine whether pegu, siam, camboja,
COCHIN-CHINA, and CHINA itself are in fact understood to be
comprehended in the former division, or whether it is re-
stricted (as seems from their writings the more probable} to the
Malayan and east-insular countries only.
The appellation of i^a^yu is given in common both to the'
people and the langiuige, but there are other terms applicable
d only
Digitized by
Google
xiV JNTRODUCTIOJjT.
only to the latter^ of which that of Jdwi or bhasa jawi is th<i
most deservmg of notice^ heing employed in writings to denote
the yernacular language of the Malays^ especially that of books^
as distinguished from all foreign languages. In this sense it is
that the author of the ^jll ^jc or ^^ Mirrour of the Faithfur*
^as quoted by werndly) informs us that he composed his book
(in the year 1009 — 1601) in the bhamjawly with the design of
facilitating the knowledge of the Almighty \p all searchers of
divine truths who might not understand the Arabic or the Per^
sian;^^ .and in this sense, likewise, one of the princes of the
peninsula requests the chief of Piilo Piwxng to translate into the
vernacular dialect a letter from the Governor General of Ben*
gal, there not being any one in his dominions who could read
Persian. Of the acceptaticMi, therefore, of the morA jawi there
should appear no room for doubt, although much diversity of
opinion has existed with respect to its specific meaning and ety-»
mology.
Some have contended for its being a derivative from the name
of JAVA ; but nothing is more evident, from the whole tenour of
the Malayan writings, than that the term of ^^ ^l^ hlmsa
jawiy notwithstanding the affinity of sound, is entirely distinct
from that of jU .^^^l^j bhasa jatva or language of java. I have
e^ven met with them contrasted in the same sentence, where a
, thing was said to be called by one name in the jaivJ or Malayan,
smd by such another in the jdwa or Javanese. It may likewise
be observed, that although in Sanskrit and Persian it is common
to form adjectives by annexing i to the substantive^ and to say
Bengali, Hindustani^ Konkani, as applied, (no matter how
vulgarly) to the languages of bengal, Hindustan, or the
KONKAN, nosuch formation takes place in the Malayan, nor
could
Digitized by
Google
INTRODCCrTION; xr
covldJaw7 by any rule of graminar be a deritatife from jSmL.
Indeed it is sufficient for shewiQg how little stress should be laid
upon the affinity of sound in this instance^ to mention that the word
jawi is likewise the common term for ** cattle/^ ^^djam-jawiioi
the ^^Jicus rdcemosa^^* neither of which are presuaied to have been
introduced from java. web^bly confesses himself much at a
loss with respect to its derivation^ and after discussing several-
conjectural etymologies, gives it as his opinion, that if it has a
connexion with the name oijataa or java, it must have arisen
from the circumstance of that name having in ancient times
been applied to suj^iatba, ajs we learn from mabco polo, andr
which he thinks is^ corroborated by the Arabic term for gum
benzoin or bei^jouin, being ^^^U ^U luban jawi ; whereas it is
well known that the article is not produced in java^ but abun-
dantly in the northern parts of sumatba. According to Mr.
KAJTLBS ^^ the word jahxoi is the Malay term for any thing
mixed or crossed ; as when the language of cme country is writ-
ten in the character of another, it is termed Vh&sajakwi or
mixed language ; or when a child is born of a KiUng father
and Malay mother, it is called anakjahwiy a child of mixed
race. Thus the MaUyu language being written in the Arabic
character is termed VhAsajahwV^
The appellations hitherto mentioned, whatever their shades of
difference may be, are employed to distinguish this language
frt>m those which are foreign to it, but there are also term»
which serve to distinguish the various styles (rather than dia«
lects) -of the language itself, as spoken by different ranks or
classes of people in the same country* These are, the bkasa
dalam, hkasa hat^sawan^ bhasadagangy zndbkasa kachuk^an.
The bhasa dalam or courtly style takes its name from the
word
Digitized by
Google
xW INTRODUCTION.
word Jb dalanty signifying ^^ a royal palace or court/* and not,
as has been supposed by the author of the dissertation ^^ on the
language and literature of the Indo-Chinese nations/' from the
preposition dalam ^^ in/' From this mislconception of the word
he was led to consider it as the ^^ language of the inferior/' and
to frame, as its correlative, the term hhasa luar, to denote an
^^ exterior " or vulgar language of the coasts, which, although
the -words are intelligible, I can venture to say, does not exist
as a phrase. (See Asiat. Res. vol. x. p. 189.) The style of
courts is by no means uncommon in books, because the princi-
pal characters, both male and female, introduced in romances
and heroic poems, are always of royal, if not of divine lineage,
and the language they speak, as well as that in which they are
addressed l)y their compeers and their attendants, must be suita-
ble to the condition of such personages.
The bhasa hangsawan or style of the politer classes of society,
does not in its general tenour differ materially from that of the
court, but is at the same time distinguished from it by some
expressions in the former applicable only to royalty, such as
«u? titah or ju^ sabda for c^\^ kata to say, im^ santap for J^
makan to eat, y^j ber^ddH for jju; tidor to sleep, u^^ mangkat
or jJ-jb tlang for c^U mati deceased, defunct.
The bhasa ddgangy as the term implies, is that of merdiants
who trade from port to port, whose language is simple in its
construction, and perspicuous, as their dealings require, but less
elegant and less grammatical than the preceding. It necessa-
rily admits the use of many foreign names for articles of mer-
chandise, such as \ydL belduwa for veludo velvet, iz/iL^ sakelat
scarlet cloth, Jjj real a Spanish dollar. The language spoken
by European gentlemen may be considered as belonging to this
division ;
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xvii
xlmsum; but, respected as they are in their political capacity,
when their manners accord with the dignity of their situations,
ihey ought to adopt the style of the bhasa bangsawany which
would be fnuch facilitated by the habitual perusal of good
writings»
The basest and most corrupt style is termed bhasa kachuk-dn,
from j>>(^ kachiJc to jumble together, as being the mixed jargon
i)f the bazai^s of great sea-port towns, where an assemblage of
|)eople of all nations render themselves intelligible to each other
by a sort of language of convention, of which Malayan is the
ba^is. Into this low dialect a number of European words and
phrases found admittance during the time of the Portuguese
domination in India, a list of which is subjoined to the Dutch
and Malayan vocabulary of Justus heubnius, originally pub-
lished in 1650; and even the superior styles are not entirely
exempt from them, as the words ^^tempoy' ^^senhory* ^^ masque^*
and a few others occur in the correspondence of persons of rank.
Several Dutch terms have been in like manner adopted; but,
from the more confined limits of our establishments, the English
innovactiqns have hitherto been very inconsiderable. Books are
in general free from the influence of these barbarisms.
Having thus described the exterior circumstances of the lan-
guage, as they respect the country where it was spoken at the
period of the earliest Malayan emigration on record, and those
extensive regions where it prevails at the present day ; as well
as the appellations by which it is distinguished from other orien*
tal tongues, both by foreigners and by the natives themselves ;
it now remains to examine its component parts, and to point out
those more original languages from whence we may presume it
e to
Digitized by
Google
xviii INTRODUCTION.
to be derimi, or which ha^e contributed to its inprorement
and to that degree of copioumess of which it may finirlj boast.
A paper which the Asiatic Society of bengai^ did me the
honour of printing in the fourth volume of their bsseabcrxs^
contained the ideas I had formed on this subject^ and which I
have not since found reason to vary from in any material point ;
but as some of thera have been controverted and partly misim»
derstoody I shall here endeavour to restate more explicitly the
grounds of my opinion^ and to obviate such objectioiis as have
been urged to my analysis of the language.
That the words of which it consists may be divided into three
classes^ and that two of these are hindu and arabic, has been
generally admitted. The doubts that have arisen respect only
the thirds or that original and essential part which^ to the ma*
1.ATAN9 stands in the same relation as the saxon to the English,
and which I have asserted to foe one of the numerous dialects of
the widely extended luiguage found to prevail^ with strong fea*
tnres of similarity^ throughout the archipelago <m the hither
side of jf^ew Guinea^ and, with a less marked resemblanoe,
amongst the islands of the Pacific Ocean *or South Sea. This
language, which, in its utmost range, embraces Madagasomr
also to the westward, may be conveniently termed the polyne-
siAN, and distinguished, as already suggested, into the HUher
(frequently termed also the East insular language) and the Fkir^
ther Polynesian. To shew the general identity or radicid cmh
nexion of its dialects, and at the same time their individuid dif-
ferences, I beg leave to refer the reader to the taUes annexed
to a paper on the subject which I presented so long ago as the
year 17^0 to the Society of Antiquaries^ and is printed in vol. vi.
of
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xix
of the Archttologia; also to a table of comparative numerals ia
the appendix to vol. iii. of Capt Cook's last voyage ; and like*
wise to the chart of ten numerals in two hundred languages^ by
the Rev. R. Patrick^ recently published in valpy'$ Classical^
Biblical^ and Oriental Journal. These^ however, should be
considered rather as illustrations dian proofs of what has been
stated, the subject requiring a more detailed exuninatien of
their respective Tocabularies.
It may be asked, with what propriety the Malayan, which
has been described as a language of die coasts, and contrasted
with the Polynesian prevailing in die interior of the islands, can
at the same time be ranked as ate tii its dialects; especially
when upon comparison «t wiH be found to vary much more froni
them than they do from each odier. This cannot be better ex-
plained than by porsuii^ farther the analogies <^ our own
tongue. The Englifidi was in its erigin a dialect of Teutonip
spoken in Lower Saxony, which, at subsequent periods, has
been enriched by a gr^at accession o£ Norman^ Greek, and
other terms, and in consequence of the polidcal prosperity of
the nation, and its intercourse with foreigners, has been so
dbanged from its primitive rude state, as to be no longer under-
stood by the inhabitants of that country which gave it birth.
Let us now suppose large estaUishments of English merchants
Betding at Embden, Bremen, Hamburgh, and Lubeck, and
there becoming of so much commercial importance as to render
their own the general language of communication vnth traders
from aH other parts. Under such circumstances the English
would be to the natives of Lower Grermany (assuming that these
have remained staticmary) what the Malays are to the ancient
population of the islands; children of the same stock, but
estranged
Digitized by
Google
XX INTRODUCTION.
estranged from their brethren by the acquisition of foreign ha-
bits, and again frequenting them under the advantages of their
new condition.
In one respect^ however, the analogy fails ; for whibt we
possess some historical account of the expeditions which contri-
buted^to people Great Britain with its present race, we are en-
tirely without record or tradition of the course of population
amongst these islands, prior to the comparatively modem pas-
sage of the Malays from sumatba to the opposite shores of the
peninsula, at a period when their language had already received
those accessions which distinguish it from the generality of the
insular dialects. Whether, in times much earlier, tribes of JSa^-
t<iSy RejangSy or Lampongs migrated to Jiwa^ Sonieo^ and the
Moluccas^ or whether the current ran in a contrary direction
and conveyed inhabitants to Sumatra from the more eastern
islands, must remain to be decided upon grounds of general
probability alone, although some of the superstitious tales of the
natives of the Philippines point to the former as the birth-place
of the parents of the human race. (Hist, of Sumatra, ed. 3.
p. 302.) But whatever pretensions any particular spot may
have to precedence in this respect, the so wide dissemination of
a language common to all, bespeaks a high degree of antiquity,
and gives a claim to originality as far as we can venture to apply
that term, which signifies no more than the state beyond which
we have not the means, either historically or by fair inference,
of tracing the origin. In this restricted sense it is that we are
justified in considering the main portion of the Malayan as ori-
ginal or indigenous ; its affinity to any con tiuentar tongue not
having yet beea shewn ; and least of all can we suppose it con-
nected
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xxi
nected with the monosyllabic or Indo-Chinese^ with which it
has been classed
What has been said will I trust be thought sufficient for de*
fining the language to which this radical portion belongs. I
have been the more anxious to make myself clearly understood,
because on a former occasion I appear not to have satisfied the
mind of the ingenious author of the paper on the languages and
literature of the Indo-Chinese nations, who introduces the fol-
lowing, remark: ^^ In another paper published in the Archseo-
logia, vol. vi. this author has successfully exhibited a variety of
instances of coincidence, both in sound and signification, be-
tween the Malay and several of the eastern dialects. By at-
tempting to prove too much, however, I apprehend that he has
failed essentially. He has pointed out a few coincidences, but
has left the mass of the language totally unaccounted for ; and
as the few coinciding words may all have been derived from a
common source, it is perhaps a more natural inference to con-
clude that they have all been modified by some general language,
than, with sir wm. jonss, to determine that the parent of them
all has been the Sanserif I confess that this passage does not
<5onvey to my apprehension any very precise idea of the writer's
meaning, nor do I see, as I much wish, in what the force of
the objection consists. Can he have 'deemed it necessary for the
support of my conclusions that every coinciding word in these
dialects of the Polynesian should be enumerated ? That indeed
would have been attempting too much. . The dictionaries of
Tagala, BkayOy Pampangay and other Philippine languages
are voluminous, and a considerable proportion of the number of
words they contain is ^imilair to those spoken in Sumatra. To
have introduced them in a paper read to a learned society would
f have
Digitized by
Google
»ii INTRODUCTION.
have led nie bejond all reasopaUebdiuids} and ytk in mbkiaf
to do it^ ^^ I have left the mass of the langaage totally waaai
coun<^ for/' That tlmf ^^i&ay all have heea derived from a
Common source -' can dcarcely admit of a question ; but what
ground is thence afforded for oosntrovertuig mjTposttion tbiit tJkĕ
MalaTaOi in its origindi unmixed state^ vastmeof its stmansi
That comxwn snuroche has nbt {loug^d ont^ and an» invesitiga*
tiob of the complement parts of the language as we now find it^
dfm not demand it frbmnye; ^ who in asbertaining tlir iety«
QK^gy of our x>K^n tongue is reqiured to ^coVer the. ori^ of
the Teutonijc dialects?
. It is nefoerauy to absenre^ with regard to t)ie Polyaflsiaii jot
geikeral Eastrinfular language^ 4hat it 'does not include t^iose
$p(}ken bjr ^he description of > peo)ple <)ermed JPapua awl Saman^
by^he MaJays and Negritoi by^jie Spaniards of Manilla^ whose
crifiip or friiKsl^ (rather than woolij) hair and dark skins/ pomfc
them out as a race totdly distinct Gcom ihp yellow comptexiooedi^
longhaired natti^st)fw^)itt^t^^ speaking. ' T^iAsĕ^ as wcffl
as the Homf^as and other jsavage tribes iionmd in several partis
of tire Ar^^bipel^d^ present a sobject of research as curious as
it is obacinrci/ bnt not bdng immediate^ connected wi^ the
Malays orUieir language, they 4o not come wkhin the 9cbpe of
this^ disctissfeou;
'We shall now direct oar .attention to those accessoiy tongues
li!om whence £he Malayanr acquired such a degree of improve^
laent, as iemas^ it from thee gen^rsd level of the other cognate
dialects, and gave it a decided f^redominqiince in that part of the
Sast. Of these the earliest as well as tb« most important ap^
pears to hav^been, eitfier directly of mediately, that great parent
of Indian languages, the veneraUe sai^skbit^ whose influence
is
\ Digitized by
Google
IJJcTllOBUCTIOrf. «iii
IB itHiiid ta^h«$ |^r;?94^d ttear)f the wIio^q q{ tbe ^m*^^ (4nd
tperiiftp» rfiw of th^ We^terij) jwjri^ a«<| reg^e^erii^pg
even, where it did not iQi)«9l)e. Thdt theiotereoiirse, 'whatever itf»
jdrcnmstatM^es itifiy have been, which prodnci^d jthis «^yaiitageoiis
dfebt oil tike MUayan^ must Imve taken, piaoe at an early period^
iaia berinferred not only fhom the deep obscujiity in which it is
involved, but also from the nature of the tertois borrowed, being
inch aj5 the pnogress of civiKs&tioo most soon have Tendered
iiecessai^, e^qfireasiiig the ieelings of the mind, the most obvious
inoral ideas^ ^ amplest U^g^idbi of the understanding, jsCJod those
ordinary^ aqdes of thought which result from the social hdbita of
aiankiiMl;- whilst i[tt 'the same dme it is not to he .understood, te
some have presumed to he the case^ thaut tibe affinjity between
these laognage^ is 'radical orthatihela2ateris iiwlebited to any
»iN]>iir diidect for i£s names for the oomiKion dbgiescts^^ of smsĕ^
It is proper alsato:^renmrk, that in.soflde&stai^ees the iwsond^ s6^
borrowed do not pteiierre ihe exaet signifioation they hear in the
xniginaly Imt acquire lome mone specific;' as ^^ saAr/i which im
Sanderii dfinotes ^f pcMver/' is Testrictbd in Malayan to ^^ super--
natural pbwer/V and Sjsi patra signifying f^ a too/'' is ^t|^lied
Ottiyjto Ihe '^ son of a royal personage/'
Wh^ in a {mper written^in ihe yeai* 17^3 I pointed out ^^ the
traces of the Hiki>u language and literature .extant amongst the
HALAYS,'''^ I presumed the discaVeiy to be onginal, but soon
^ftied that I had b^^n^ anticipated in my observation by the
revered president aqd founder of d[ie Asiatic Society, who in his
eighth Annivensary Discourse had alre^ made the remark
that " without any reccHirse to etymological conjecture, we dis^
cover that multitudes of pure sanskbit words occur in the
principal
Digitized by
Google
xxtv INTRODUCTION.
principal dialects of the Sumatrans.^* Justice however to our
predecessors in the study 'of oriental languages requires me to
state, that in the preface to the Vocabulary of heurnius, it is
distinctly mentioned that beside several words adopted from the
neighbouring dialect of java, the Malayan is largely indebted
to those of HINDUSTAN, and especially to the Sanskrit or sa-
cred language of the Brahmans.
An investigation of the period when, and the means by which
so copious and useful a class of words was incorporated with
some of the rude East-insular dialects, is a subject worthy of
the talents of those able scholars whose inquiries, directed to
the attainment of genuine historical ai|d philological truth,
adorn the pages of the Asiatic researches. From the Ma-
lays themselves, or their writings, it is to be apprehended that
little information respecting facts of so ancient a date can now
be procured, and if the books of the Hindus are equally silent,
we must be content to extract our knowledge from the sober
examination of intrinsic evidence. With this in view I must
hei^ take the liberty of observing that much fallacious inference
appears to have been drawn from the resemblance of the San-
skrit term Malaya to the name of the people of whom we are
«peaking, which has induced some persons, whose authority
carries with it great weight, to consider the Malaya dtvipa as
denoting the Malayan peninsula. But with all due deference^
on a point where my opinion must rest upon a comparison of
those passages in the researches or other published works, in
which the term occurs, I think it will be found to belong ex-
clusively to the mountainous region in the southern part of the
peninsula of India^ known in the provincial dialect of the
country
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xrr
country by tlie tiame o( Malayhlam^ as is the language by that
of Maledima ; all being derivatives from the word ma/^^ signi*-
fying ^^ a mountain/'
Hie most obvious mode in which we might presume the lan^
guage of a more civilised to have been communicated to a ruder
people^ whose soil abounds with valuable productions^ is that
of commercial intercourse, and we find accordingly, that when
Europeans first visited the Malayan ports, they describe them as
being crowded with vessels from the coasts of guzebat^ ma^
I.ABAR, and ooROMANDBi., and with merchants from thence^
as well as from all other parts of the east^ established on shore^
and occupying their respective kampangs ot quarters in the b(i^
zars. From such habitual residence aiid the familiarity it must
oc(^on, there is no doubt but that many words convenient for
the purposes of trade may have been^ introduced, as^ in later
days from the connexion with Europeans themsdves; and it
would not he fair to deivy that many others (^ a more general
nature might in the same maj^ner have found their way; but
widen we pay attention to the terms which acttaally constitute
this portion of the Malayan, and which in the Dictionary are
distinguished by their proper character, we shall perceive that,
jEbr the most part, they not only belong to a class of ideas snpe«
lior to whfct the transactions of a bazar, would require, but also,
m respect to their form and pronunciation,, are stamped with
the mark of the purest days of the Sanskrit^ undebasai by the
corruptions of its provincial dialects; as may be instanced in
the conversion of the letter y intoyjn the language of Bengal^
yug being there pronounced jUgy and yujana, (a geographical
tenn adopted by the Malays) pronounced jwfan. For its ppst-
sessing this.latter quality I.have (and trust I may long have)
g the
Digitized by
Google
xxvi INTROnUCTION-
the living aalhority of Mr. wilkiks^ as well as that of the
WlitiogS of Sia WILLIAM JONES. lEl^Cn Bn LEYDEK^ though
rather an unwilling witness^ admits that ^^ the Sanscrit TOCa«-
hle^ adopted in Malayu and Guzer'dti^ are genetally preserved
{Hirer in the former than in the latter ;'' and again^ fhat ^^ in
many instances ^6 Maka^u forin approaches nearer the pm^
^Sanscrit Ihan even the BaH itself/'
' This JBhUy or PdU^ the $acred langdage of A.VA and siASl,
hai^ h^ s6aie> beeh supposed, front its geographical pranmity»
the most likely channel through which the hini>u ^imns (being
itsielf a dialect 6f Samkrif) might have flowed into the Malayaa
countries; but independiuitly of the preceding ofagection^ we
inay ask whether it is probable that^ from the drcnmstance of
Vieinage^ the occult add inystĕriotts language of one . coitiitry
^^hduld'becbme populdir iil* another^' whilst the 6rdinary language
spokeii by the bulk of tjie people should not have made any
similar progresid. But infaict we haie stmug gi^oohds ibr be-
li^vitig that the Malayan tdngue: had already received its aocesf*
%ibn of Sanskrit termSy before tb^ ^prfeading. of its populatum
tiE^wardsthe Nol'th brought it into ^eoniact with the southern
dominiohs of >Sitam ) and siilce that period the two nations * have
almost ever -been at variance. From these condidecatioi» I
should* strongly incline td coincide in opinion with bt. levdbk^
who had studied the langusige^ that ^^the greater part of the
words of Sanseiit origin found 'in> \^ulayUj do ni^ appear to
have been lAtrdduced through the medium of the jRaf/iV' Yet
as the ^iiscovery erf truth and not the support of any ^system is
my object^ I shall produce a document lately come ^o my hands
which will be thought of much importance in the future dis-
cussion of this question^ and add materially to the argument of
those
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION, sami
tboae wbo AtJi contend fiia^t the BaU or PaU has had a priii«
dpdl share m cootrib^ng to th6 disseminatioii of the Hindu
lai^^ul^ and iliythcdogy throughout the eastera islands. Hiis
doeument is a letter from m. a. coupbe0s>^ a swvant of the'
late
♦ « My dear Sib, Cakidta, 95th Oct. 1810.
I Imve the pleasure to send you a copy of two of iny Jaoa
flmwings, taken ffotn two sioned found, with more than an hundred of tiie same
Und^ in the teterior partiof tbe isbmd. The numerous inscriptions seen on the
iNlck of tnany of these stones, as also on the back of several metal idols found at
the same place, but of a much smaller size, are in a language of which the cha-
racters are no longer known; tiie language appearing to be entirely lost. A spe-
cimen of these diaracters, taken with the utmost possible exactness A-om two
«tones, Ifbrwilrdddowiththis. They differ in all resqpects from the Javanese
and oilier diaraeters in use iLmoi]|[8t the natives of the neighbouring countries.
There i^ no hope that we shall get any information from these natives -upon sub-
jects of antiquiiy, as they have no proper records, nor have they preserved any
branbh of leamhi^, Wliich ihey, or those inhabitants who in old times worshipped
ih^ld^ls, undoiiVtefflyp^siessQd. I have t>roofi that they had even a knoiVledge
of astrpnontf ; bnt the present inhabitant! -are' in respect of arts and sctences,
most i^^rant and superficial beings. I had hopes that some learned gentleman
or Bramin here in Bengal would have been found able to ascertain the language
of ti^e^Inscri{>ti6ns, but it appears that the characters are also unknown in Ben«
1^^ whieh I ci^i^ as a grdM loss to letters, as the inscriptions are so very
numeh>us and almost all perfectly visible: and I have no doubt that some inte-
resting historical events would be discovered. Amongst the idols found in Java
€SĕreBreminy^6rBrdhmay Ft>iiti, and olher inferior deities of the Hindds; so
th^ all: the beife^ hisn>ryJkS3 g«ined by this diMov;^ is, ttot it- pfdves beyond
donbtAAttheinhiibitaills':af'Jaa8,/in.yei7 reai0le tiroes, were idolaters of the
fihybndcM^, A native ii^fthe^ Ldmpmg eountiy <in Smalm} seeing, some of
tb^e dgKUi^at-my lMto«( in Batavta, Inforntad m^ that many similar stones and
figures are to be aeon in.the interior part of Lanipung, The sainfe infivBiation I
got from an inhabitant of the Jlfii^f country (inland of Palembang) who had tra-
velled through the Lampung district, and had see» mmikr monunmits ttere.
.. ..J Very
Digitized by
Google
Mviii INTRODUCTION.
late Dutch East-India Company, and a distinguished member
of the Batavian philosophical society, addressed to my friend
MT. CHARLES HOLLOW AY of JBencooleu (from wluHn I reoeired
it), accompanied with two wdl executed drawings made from
stone images of Siva or Mahadeva^ and JBhavaniy under the
appellations of JBhairava , SLnd^JSatu-JB&ariw^, and also witli
copies of long inscriptions carved upon the back of these^ or si--
milar images. The characters and language of the inscriptions
are stated to be equally unknown to the natives of the interior
oiJava (where they were found) and to ihe Brahmana of ben-
gal to whom he had shewn them. But upon examination the
characters prove to be no other than the square Po/t, consi-
dered as sacred in the Birma or jdva country, and in Siam^
Of this my late worthy and ingenious friend col. jo. symes, m
his account of an embassy to Ava, gives a specimen, taken
from a beautiful manuscript containing an accoimt of the cere-
mony used in the consecration of rhahaans or priests; which
Pali manuscript he ajlerwards presented to eabl spsnceb, and
is now in the magnificent library of that nobleman. Being my*
self so fortunate as to possess an original alphabet and other
materials for ascertaining the language of the inscriptions, X
hope (with the aid of iir, wuukxnjs) to succeed in translating
thc8%
y eiy probable it is that the iidudbitantB ot both lalandB, Java and Sumatra^ be«
fore th^had embraced the Mahometan ftkh, w»e of die religion of AidbMu
Will you let me have for a moment again the letter from Mr. Marsden^ in ordain
to peruse the requests of tiiat learned gentleman^ and should I be aUe to liifiMsIf
Urn with MijE ii^brmatipD, I shall be happjr to emlnrace the opportunify.
To Chark^ UoSauH^y Esf. JL. GoVMBJlt^ ^
Qdcutta.
Digitized by
Google
IWTRODUCTIOH^ Aix
UMbf K&A althdvgh not so sangtiiDe as m. covpsRtB in thft eX'
peiBffitikui of discDterfbg iaqpotiavt Instoiicml documents, to be
mmbltd ht letust to dctietmine whether the JPaU waty in ancient
^imcei, «mplo^ ok tke «acred or learned |angaagĕ of Jhwt alsa
Images of Hoe sadie kind, brovght ftom Saimithuttng, at ihi
foothcra eittremity of the ialwbd, and opposite to that of BaU,
I remember to have seen in sud^atsa; but. tliese were Without
inseriptioKiS) And did dot at the time excite any particular atten-^
iioni I h^re latdy been informed that the officers commanding
our troops in Java bare ireqilentiy recognised in their marches^
figttves (especiidlf of Chaitmi) to which dwy had been familiarly
iiocnstbmdd ota the continent of India ; and that no opportuniti^
hat^ boen lost of making drawings of these as wcdl a&fixb ninUl»
«f amosntcbarMtiuv» whcrgtsr «iidy ha^e btfeu discovered.
1 ^< It is HooAbhi (days A«r. tlixxniN) to addactt further instances "
(of tb« ooDDUioti of Malayan with \Bet^iy fky>m which, ift
tmdi, it is mont rennpte Aan firom toy other Sanskrit derivatite)
f' aatiie MalAy fasitory «ad thft language itself» «xhibit trae^s
Mffioiently tknr^ to ditect ns to th« region with which the Ma>-
kys bod die most froqmtit ifit^6<ku-iie, at a» «ariy period, and
irmk ftkMk thdr langtiag» leeriAS to bare received the MOit
oi>nsid*abt« iaodifi«atiflgm) and that ii the anĕieiit kingdom <9f
KBUfiiga. Her» I Mb agtiin titider the nedeMity of diAsetitiiHg
iroitt MAUsi»»'» ofiniob i he says^ ^* it ig w\6xm that firofia
the Telinga or the Tamult the if6hlfm \iM iMt reedted Atty
poftiM of iu ImprdveiAeiM." I Apprehend that the e«preiis re-
-i^eme of this optnlM is e«i<letit( for the Mal»^, M thirt tery
petlad, knb^ the Gdromtttide) coftat by no other niuiie tfaafi
dhma Kĕling, the laiid of iiekng&t KAling&i a fmtttitttde of
«Mn{k>#Hto»8 euf»eb« syttdtig thea» pM€Ms to be tttuisktldtts frofti
i , • ^— h the
Digitized by
Google
xix INTRODUCTION-
the Bwa^Keling or Kalinga language ; and the Mida^ las-'
guage contains a great namber of words that are Tamul^ Ma*
faydlam and lelinga; though neither Sanscrit^ JEfinduvi, nor
Guzerati; and a variety that are only to be found in Telinga,
the vernacular language of the KalingdDesaJ* Had i>r. i^eydbn
fsivoured us with a list, however short, of these words borrowed
from the Telinga or the Tamuly which have no relation to the
Sanskrit, it would have given considerable weight to his asser-
tion. As it is, I can only say that such have very rarely occurred
in my limited examination of those languages. The word kappal
^^ a ship,^' which I find in a TofHul vocabulary, is dbviously the
Jfif of the Malays. Lavangum, the Telinga word for "cloves/*
cftti be no other than ^^ Idwang or bur^a Hwang i but sur^iu
this instance it must be with the cultivator and not the consumer
that the word originated. I should almojs^t venture to say the
same of padaua or padavu " a boat,'* which has a manifest af-
finity to jjy pfau or pdrau; for how can we suppose that these
islanders should borrow the lAost common term for their small
sailing vessels from the people of a distant continent ? The words
^\j ragdm modes- in music, Jy logam imi^inary divisions of the
universe, J/ kuiam a pond, XU manikam a precious stcme, have
evident marks Of tbdr inlportatibn from th^ Kalinga IKsa or
negri kUngy but they are at the same time a barbarous formof
Sanskrit y and their number, I think, could not be doubled in
the pages of the Malayan IMctioniary.
The extensive commercial intercourse hjKlmg (TeUngaot
Coromandel) vessels, between the ports of the continent of India
and those of Achin^ Malacca, add others in the Straits, is matter
of notoriety, and it is likewise admitted that many translations
of ^tndu stories have been made through the medium of the
languages
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xxxi
langtla^^ of the peninsula; but it does not necessarily follow
that the Malayan ^^ received its most considerable modifications''
from that cfuarter. -It must be observed that the Tamu/^ Te^
Hhgtiy and Abntin (all essentially one tongue) are radically dif-
ferent from the Sanskrit^ although from the abundant infusion
of religioui^ and poetical terms^ they have not uncommonly beai
mistaken for its derivatives ; and if it were to the traders of the
Ck>romandel (nr Malabar coasts that it was indebted- for its im-*
provement^ the words so communicated would obviously have
{belonged inr greater numbers to the radical or vulgar portion of
the language, than to the leaitied; and even the /Safi^Art^ terms
that might have found their way along with these, would have
been aifected by thie peculiarities of orthography and pronun-
ciation which distinguish the Telinga from other corruptions,
and which, in fact, are observable in a fei^ inistahces. But
Dr. I.EYDBN himself bears testimony to the superior purity of
those adopted^ by the Malays ; and with respect to their number,
he says' (somewhat grataitausly)'^that a list of about fifteen ex-
amples given by roe as a specimen, ^' might, * with very little
labour, have been extended to fifteen hundred, or perhaps five
thousand/' Upon asselrtions of this nature the columns of the
Dictionary form the best comment
The strongest ' argument hc^ever against the probability of
commerce having exerted so poweHul an influence and produced
an effect so extennve, is to be drawn from the nature of the
words themseWes, which are not confined to the names of things,
but more usually express moral feelings, intellectual qualities, or
ideas crmnected with mythdbgy. Can it be supposed that mer-
cantile visitors shmdd have taught these peoplef to denote ** joy''
and ^^sorrowf' by the terms ^nAssa-cAi/a and ^liiArb-ciit^a, ^f lind^-
* standing'^
Digitized by
Google
jmrii INTRODUCTION.
dersfiuidiiig'' by bndi, '' prudence'' by b^'ak$and, ^^ loyaky'' b^
saiiwany ^* kindred" by kulmwurgaj ^^ time" by haia^ ^^ Oamae"
by kama^ or ^^ penance" by tapa? Much lest cmi we peraoade
eurselves that the Sanskrit mimes of dttet^ diatriotfi» and moun^
tains in the interior of the country (paliiculatly ofJmm) aibouM
hare been imposed by strangers of this desedptioni InnoTfttiotu
of such magnitude^ we shall tenture to sny^ could ih4 havt bem
prodaeed otherwise than by the entire dominJUion and possessid*
of these idands by some ancirait JUmdn pcmer, and by the oon»
tinuance of its sway during several a^« Of the period whe*
this state of things existed we at fMresent knotr nothing, and
jiid^ng of their principles of action by whal we witikesi in tbede
days, we are at a loss to oonceiTe under what circumstances tbe^
pould haine exerted an infloeiice in distaieit countries of the nature
here described. The spirit of foreign conqvtest does not appear
to have dii^ingiiished their character, and iseal for the conrer»
sion of others to thdr own ifdigious fiuth, seeols to btf inconlf
patible with their tenets. We aiay, however, be deceived bf
forming our opinion from the contempkdion of modam India^
and sfaouki reoollact that previously to the Mahometan irru|ptioni
into the upper produces, which first took place ^bout the yedr
1000, and until the progressive subjugation of the country by
Persians mtA Moghals, there existed steveralpow^rfaland opulent
Hindu states, of whose maritime relations we are entirely igu9^
rant txt present, and cian only cherts^ the hope of futiire disco»
veries, from the laudable spirit of research that pervadet and
does so mudi honour to our Indian establisbaents.
That tlie remains of snp^rstitioiw and other trades of HiaAi%
occupancy sfiould y^ow be lests Arequfently <fisceriiibie in Swmatra
thanf in Jcevu isnA Bali (wlle»e iktt practice of t}ie tfofi^s bufding
: on
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTIOK xxxiii
on tbe pile of her husband^ and other peculiar customs still sub-»
sist}^ may be the consequence of the earlier and more general
prevalence of the Mahometan religion in the former island; or,
it may be fair to conclude, ^ as well from the number of idols
found in the latter, as from the Sanskrit terms abounding in the
court-language of Java^ that it, rather than Sumatra^ may have
been the principal seat of these Hindu colonial possessions. To
this supposition a strong colour is given by the ancient, though
fabulous history, of which we find a translation in the Transac-^
tions of the Batavian Society. The genealogy of the sovereigns
oiJcfva is there deduced from Bqtara Wimu (Avatara Vishnu)
who was their first king of the race of dewas, as distinguished
from the kings of men. That by the former of these we should
understand the Hindu rulers of the island, who may have been-
brahmaniy and by the latter, the native princes of the country,-
will not be thought an improbable conjecture; and may serve
to explain a distinction not otherwise reconcileable to common*
sense. We may further observe, that this mixture of mythology*
with history being highly favourable to the composition of ro-»'
mances, not only the Javans but the Malays also, notwithstand--
ing their Mahometan prejudices, have been fonder of laying the^
scenes of their adventures amongst the dewas and rcikshasas, than
amongst the maleikat axid Jin (angels and demons) of their more
recent superstition. . .
Having now considered the Malayan as having been, in its
primitive state, a dialect of the Polynesian^ and subsequently,-
butJat a very remote and an unknown period, enriched by an ac-
cession of Sanskrit words, we shall find it destined, in. times
comip^utitively. modem, to experience a further change incon^-
sequence 6f\ a ^reat religious innovs^tion which afl^ted more or
' i less
Digitized by
Google
»xir INTllODUCTION;
less a vast portiou of the kiiown wcrid. This was the spreading
of the doctrine of the Aroron; nojt indeed mpidly, as in the ^rest^
by the aid of the sword> but with a gradual. progress» the.eiSfecf
^ persuasion rather thao of fbroe.. Traders from the Arabian
coasts had probably in all ages frequented ^e eastern seas, al*
thcK^ no r^ord of their Toyagea of. an earlier date tlian the
ninth <^ntury has been presqrved; yet thene is not reason to
fondude that this casual intercourse had any ii^uence upon the
languages oftthe islands* In the twelfUi century however» the
new rdligion may he presumedzta have gained considerable ground
«mongstthe inhabitants» aait appears that in the beginning, of
liie tfairteaith» it «as^ embraced. and .openly professed by some
^ jthe j^rinces, and even that those who preached it found the
meaos^ m several instances» of raising themselvas to the rank of
eo^ereigns. li^ the Annals of * Achin we are .distinctly told that
ip the year 601 of the i^^&» answering to 1204, sultan Juban
J^kak arrived from the western country, estiddished islamism in
that capital» and marrying a native princess^ transmitted the
crown to his- son* From die Annals, of Malaeca we leam Ihat
th9:Qonv)ersion took place there dining, the reign of Aluhammed
Skahy who ascended the liirone ia 12/6 ; and the t7at;aii«(8e re-
cords inform us that the religion was first |ireached in their island,
SQ lately as 1406^ by Sheikh Ihn MtdoMLy who had. previously
visited Achin and Pcisem Sumatra» and «7oAor. dn the. peninsula,
r The efiects produced by the introduction of this religion
amongst the Malays, w^re similar to those which took place in
Persia and many othar countries where it. has prevailed .The
use of the Arabic character superseded that (^ the ancient mode
of writing» and the language became exposed to an inundation
of new terms^ for the most part theologic^, metaphysical, l^al,
and
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION- xxxt
9nd ceremonial^ the knowledge of which is indispensable to those
who study the karan and its commentaries. These terms their
writers^.insome species of composition» aflect to, introduce^ as a
proof of their religious as well as their literary attainments ; htit
few of them^ comparatively^ have been incorporated with orcoti-
lititute a part of the language. On a former occftsidn I b^
added that they are rarely ^nployed in conveimtion ; an ai^iser*
tion that niay have been too general^ as pedants are to be fott&d
in all countries. In the preambles of letters diere is bd limita-
fion to Ihe use of Arabic epithets ; but in the body dr businesis
part .th^ are much more sparingly employed; dbd in Ikx^s of
narration^ such as the version of the Banu^dna, as Well ai^ pOelic
^oirks in general (with £he exception of those upon rĕligwus
gubjects)^ they are by no means frequent. Aboixt the number of
twenty or thirty words may be pointed put as having a cl^iU,
from their familiar recurrence^ to be considered as Malaj^an by
adoption,' (such as /li ftkir or Jjptkir to think, IjU ^dof ctts-
toio, Ja6 hkal ingenuity, Oj dumfd and JU alam the world, Jjo,
&lam a flag and \lnm science, Li^^ arifwise, C^ sak douht, ^
f(^ the dawB, Sji kuwai vigour, Jdj kadar valiie, rate, jjJ, kuhSr
a grave, «3^ sejud prostration^ iL^^ sehab cauise, ijy^ siirat ^fiit-
ing) ; whilst those others, of which it has been justly said-hy
]>r; i^BVBEN, that ^^ it is difficult to assign any bounds to thkir
introduction but the pleasure of the writer,'^ must be ri^arded as
iGc^re^n words ostentatiously displayed; lilke the French and
Latin with which the works of old Grerman and Dutch author^
are chequered so profusely. The learner therefore is not to be
surprised at failing to trace in the Dictionary many Arabic words
which he will fibd in manuscripts.. Those occurring most fre«
quently have been inserted, but to have carried this to the full
extent
Digitized by
Google
xxxfi INTRODUCTION.
extent would have' been to incorporate the bulk^ of the language,
and to encroach on the province of an Arabic lencon. The
nun^ber of Malayan words, on the contrary, that have been trans-
ferred into other tongues, is very limited; yet the following have
obtained an extensive currency^ not only in India, but in many^
parts of Europe : j^b ddmai^ dammar, a species of resin ; ^l^
padi^ paddi, rice in the husk ; cj\^ ^^g^> «ago ; ^ bambu, the
cane; ^Jui kampang an enclosure, vulgarly compoimd; ej^ go»
. dqng^ a warehouse, factory, vulgarly godown ; ^^^ kris or creese^
a weapon; ^y^ ^^^ 5ra^ i?/an a species of ape; jul amuk and
j;^liU meng-amuky to rub a«mttck, to murder indiscriminately, to
engage furiously in battle.
That the Malays before the introduction of Arabic writing
possessed an alphabetic character of their own, can scarcely be
doubted, although we are ndw ignorant what that character
was; for whilst so many tribes similarly circumistanced, in Su^
matra, Java^ jOelehe^y and other islands, have retained even to
this day their proper alphabets (all exhibiting traces of a Nagrt
origio), it is not probable that this race alone should hbve been
entirely unlettered ; and we should rather conclude that, ftbm
the period of their conversion, be\ng taught to regard with con*
tempt, not cmly their habits of idolatry, but their ancient lite-
rature also, the Malays suffered the ihemorials of it to «ink
into oblivion. If what was thus neglected is to be searched
for amongst the existing alphabets, the Batta sĕema to hav/s^
the fairest pretensions (from vicinity) to be considered * as that
which gave place to the less convenient character imported from
Arabia.
, Respecting the general style «of the language; Which' will be
best understood from the exarmples to be given in the praxis, we
may
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xxxvii
inay here briefly remark, that it is much more chaste and natm^al
than the phraseology of Asiatic languages in general, being free
^excepting only in the quaint and obscure pantuns or proverbial
sonnets) from forced conceits, and particularly such as depend
upon the ambiguous meaning of words, so prevalent and ofiensive
to good taste in Persian compositions. It may be said indeed,
that the Malayan style is never metaphorical, the imagery em-
ployed in poetic comparison being kept distinct from the subject,
in the manner of simile, and not figuratively interwoven with the
texture of the sentence. At the same time it must be allowed to
partake of many of the disadvantages incident to rude languages;
to be defective in precision,^ as well as in neatness of arrange-
ment, and to indulge in superfluous repetitions ; faults not incon-
sistent with that simplicity of construction which, with smooth-
ness and sweetness of tone, form its distinguished characteristics.
But farther observations of this nature would be an anticipation
of what belongs to the department of Syntax and IVosody,- and
in the sequel I shall confine myself to what concerns the progress
made by Europeans in fixing smd communicating their know-
ledge of the tongue.
That the Malayan has not hitherto been cultivated in England
with the attention it deserves, must be attributed in a great degree
to the insufficiency of the means provided for the instruction of
those who might wish to make it an object of study. The
l)utch, whose establishments in these parts preceded ours in
point of time, and, unlil the |>resent extraordinary period, ac-
quired much greater importance, employed considerable pains in ^
perfecting their acquaintance with it, as well with a religious as
a political view, and published some works which shew the high
jproficiency to which they attained. Of these the principal is a
k translation
Digitized by
Google
KXYiii INTRODUCTION.
translation, of the whole Bible/ :executed with singular skill and
accuracy by the progressive labours of several learned men, and
finally^ under the superiutendance of c^. h. WEEKDiiY, printed ia
the Roman character at Amst^dam in 1731-3^ 4to. 2 vol.^ and
afterwards with the prefer Malayan types^ at Batavia in 17^8^
8vo. y vol. The same wibkndly was likewise the author of an
excellent Grammar^ of which further mention will be made in
the sequel. With such advantages it is matter of no little sur-
prise that they should not also have furnished a work so essential
and iwlispensable to the study of this or any other language, as
a good Dictionary, formed £rom the genuine writings of the na-
tives, and expressed either ia the proper character, or in such
consistent European orthography as might prove an adequate
substitute. What has hitherto been effected by them and by
ourselves in Malayan philology, will best appear from the follow-
ing enumeration of printed works, in the order of their publica-
tion ; nearly the whole of which are in my possession.
Subsequently to the appearance of s<wie vocabularies found in
the works of the early voyagers, the first regular work in form
of a Dictionary, bears the title of " Spraeck ende woord-boeck,
in de Maleysche ende Mitdagdskarsehe Talen^^ by Frederick
HOUTM^N van Gouda, published at Amsterdam in 1604, 4^^«
oblongo ; republished in 1673, B^o. under the title of " Dictiona*
rium, ofte TVoord ^nde Spraeck-boeck, in de Duytsche ende
Maleysche Tale ;'' and again at Batavia in 1707, 4io. The ori-
ginal edition contains, at the end of an address to the reader,
the autograph of houtman himself, who acquired his knowledge
of the language whilst a prisoner at Achin; and also that of
GOTARDUS ARTHUs, to whom the book belonged, and who re-
published the Dialogues it contains at Cologne, 1608, 8vo. which
likewise
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION* xxxlx
likewise appeared in English in 1614, 4^* under the title of
^^ Dialogues in the English and Malaiane languages : or certain
common formes of speech, first written m Latin, Malaian, and
Madagascar tongues, by the diligence and painfull endeavour of
Master gotarbus arthusius, a Dantisker, and now faithfully
translated into the English tongue by augustike sPAi.i>iNa
Merchant/'
The next original publication is that entitled ^^ Vocabularium^
qfte Woort-hoecky naer ordre van den Alphabet int 7 IhiytschM
Maleysch ende Maleysch-Duytsch. Als mede eewghe Gramma-^
iicale ohservatieni^ first composed by caspar wlltbns, and
afterwards improved and published by Sebastian banckaerts.
's Gravenhaghe 1623, 4to. Batavia 1/06, 4^o. . This vocabulary^
which, though not extensive, has considerable merit, was after-
wards translated into Latin, and published at Rome by the title
of ^^ Dictionarium Malaico^Latinum et Latino-Malaicum, com
aliis quamplurimis. Opera et studio davidis haex,'^ 1631, 4<Oi
The credit of an original composition being here improperly as-»
sumed (although explained in the dedication}, it becomes neces^
sary to correct a mistake into which d^ leyden has been led^
who says (p. 184), ** The first attempt to form a grammar or
dictionary of it, as far as I know, was made by david haex,
who published in Malmju and Dutch, a vocabulary with some
grammatical observations. At the request of Cardinal fiarberini
the Dutch was rendered into Latin/' To this latter operation
only were the study and labour of haex directed, and the trans-»
lation is evidently the performance of a person unacquainted with
the Malayan language.
*^ Vocabularium ; ofte TVoorden-haecky in't Duytsch en Ma*
leys. Eertydts gecomponeerd et nyt-gegeveh door casparuu
WILTENS
Digitized by
Google
xl INTRODUCTION.
WILTEN5 ende sebastiakum danckaerts. JSnde nu (met meet
dan drie duysent so tvoorden als manieren van spreken) vermeer-^
dert vyt de schriflen van jan van hasei^ ende albert rutI/^
&c..door jusTUM heurnium/' Amst. 1650, 4^0- Batavia I7O8,
4to. This, though modestly professing to be only an improved
edition of the preceding, has in fact a claim to be considered as
an original and muph superior work. It was reprinted at Batavia
in 1 677 J 4*^- with improvements by frederik gueynier, atad
again, at the same place, in 1708, with still further improve-
ments, by PETRUS van der worm; in which state it is the best
Dutch and Malayan dictionary that has appeared.
. *^ Grondt ofte kort Bericht van de Maleisehe Ttnal, door
JOHANNES ROMAN.'' Amst. 1655, F^-
^^ Grammatica Malaica, tradens praecepta brevia idiomatis
linguee in India Orien tali celeberrim®, ab indigenis dieted Malajoy
succincte delineata labore jorannis christoph. lorberi/' Vi-
narice (Weimar) 1688, 8vo. This, we are told by werndly, is
a bad translation of the work of j. roman (which I have not
seen), with some extracts from that of p. de houtman, by one
who was quite a stranger to the language of the Malays.
^^ A Dictionary English and MalayOy Malayo and English.
To which is added some short Grammar Rules and Directions
for the better observation of the propriety and elegancy of this
language. By thomas bowrey.*' London I7OI, 4^0- This,
although the work of an illiterate person, possesses considerable
merit, and derived, as is evident, no advantage whatever from the
preceding publications, of the existence of which the author was
probably ignorant. His extensive knowledge of the language of
the people whose ports he frequented as a trader, he laudably
rradered permanent and usdiil to bis countrymeaby committing
to
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. xli
to paper all the words with which his memory furnished him ;^
but he appears to hare been entirely ignorant of the written
language^ as even the short specimen of words in the original
' chdiracter^
* Thus he speaks of himself. ^^ By nineteen years continuance in East-India,
wholly spent in navigation, and trading in most places of those countries, and
much of that time in the Malaya countries, Sumatra^ Borneo^ Bantam^ Baiavioy
and other parts of JavOy by my conviorsation and trading with the inhabitants of
whidi places, I did furnish myself with so much of the Malaya language as did
enable me to negociate my affairs, and converse with those people without the
assistance of a prevaricating interpreter, as they commonly are. In the year
1688 I embarked at Fort St. Qeorge for England, which proving a long voyage,
and I being put of imployment, did atmyjeisure time set down all that came
into my memoiy of the Jlfo^o- language; which together with some helps that I
have attained since, has furnished me with so much of that language as I think may
be of great use to trade and conversation in the Malaya country . • • .and I finding
so very few Englishmen that have attained any toUerable knowledge in the Malaya
tongue, so abscdutely nece^ary to trade in those seas, and that there is no book
of this kind published in English, to help the attaining that language ; these con-
siderations, I say, has imboldened me to puUish the insuing Dictionary, whith I
am sensible has m^ny imperfections, I having had veiy little help to assist me, and
not having bad the opportunity of conversation with any Malaya since I begun
Hub work, nor in several years before."
. A copy of this Dictionary full of manuscript corrections, made at an early
period, as «appears by the writing and the orthography, accidentally came into
my possession. At the end of the first or English and Malaya part, the following
extraordinary memorandum occurs. ^< Soe fer Corrected by hexbt smith. My
Dictionary which y** foregoing should have bin onely the Coppy ofi^, is so strangely
Perverted thro' Ignorance of the genuine Elegancy and Meaning of the Wordes
in tbitf language, that it would have puzled a learned Malayer to have pickt out
the meaning of the short sentences, for they are very concise in there discourse
useing noe circumlocutions or tautalogie." The hand-writing of the memoran-
dum is the same with that of the corrections, which are fi»r the most part judicious,
and the name is written in the style of a signature. Nothing further respecting
this HENRT SMITH has cvcT como to my knowledge.
1
Digitized by
Google
xlii INTRODUCTION;
charabt^r/ printed at the end 6f his book/ he acknowledges to
have been prepared for him at Oxfocd: hy that learned and inde-
fatigable orientalist^ THOMAS hVde^ Owing to his want of suf»
fieiency in this and some other respects/ he has unavoidably fallen
into numerous errors^ and the sentences he has employed to ex-
emplify the words^ being of his own composition^ and not quota-
tions^ are for the most part incorrect or vulgar^ and uncouth io
their phraseology*
^^ MalĕU^ Wbard^boek Sameling. Collectanea Malaica
Vocabularia. Hoc est Congeries omniunl Dictionariorum Ma-
laicorum hactenus editorum. Non tantum vulgariorum Belgico-
Malaicorum, verum etianof rarissimorum hucusqueincognitorum/'
AKBRJSAS XrAMBERTUd i>oi>£SuSy Typogr. Ba,taviae 1 707-8, -^*
ii partes. This useful collection contains the republication of
nearly all the Vocabularies that had then appeared, and of which
many had become extremely scarce.
^^ Maleische Spraakkunst^ uit de eige Schriften der Maleiers
opgemaakt ; mjt eene Voorreden, behelzende eene inleiding tot
dit werk, en een Aanhangsel van twee Boekzalen van boeken in
deze tale zo van Europeers, als van Maleiers geschreven. Door
GEORGE HENRiK werndly/* Amst. 1736, 8^- Of this Gram-*
mar I cannot speak in terms too favourable. It is the perform-
ance of a person who, united to a perfect acquaintance with the
Malayan, a knowledge of the principles of general grammar^
and who ventured, in framing one for that language, to disen-
gage himself from the trammels of European regimen, and to
draw his rules from the language itself. The fault of the work,
a very pardonable one, is redundance. To the instruction it
affi)rds I confess myself materially indebted. The plan of my
own Grammar had been sketched, and the parts filled up, before
I became
Digitized by
Google
itstroduction: xiiu
I b^ame aequainN:^ vnAhi wjsbvbly's^ or tould JQcad the. Ian*
guag€( ioi^^idiit id oompoBed; ibbtl afterwards compared the
v^hqle of . what 1 had written^ with his ohaervatioos^ ntrĕDgthen*^
iog ihy opimbns byrihk Banctioir^ .aod. where, we diflGbred> availiDg
mysdf of his Jadgmoit when it appeared sounder than my own»
ia making this avowal* I am not by any means afraid of being
i^nsiddred as his copyist by persons whoslmll take the trouble
of examining the two grammars with this yiew.
' ^^ Nietfwe fFoardeMchat in Nederdnitsch^ Maleidsch en Por»
iugecR9ch:'^ Bata?ia 17^r'8^9- This work^ mentioned by Thunr-
bcfrg/ J i»tre not^ sbeoti:^ ^
-'^^ Besa^HJSuropai Afnea^ Asia, fSrrmfted ifrdn dr I77O til
1770' Af«Aaii^»»rEBi?Hi7KBjmGj'^. Upsak 1789-93, 8vo. iv
YOL VoL 31. 1». 2QP-90. A Vocabulary and IKalogues^ Swedish
bnd Malayan^ The list of wcxirds collected by this ingenidns na^
tursdist is ratlin moi^e accurate than what we find in the genera^
iity Of llkMd@»^«f travels^ -
^^ A short Vocabfilary^ English xndMalayOy with Grammar
RtdesfortHe' attainment of the Matayo language/' Calcutta
3^79^ Of the nierita of this work I have not had an opportunity
of judjgittg. ■ '
^^ A Grammar of the Malay tongue/ as spoken in the Pe-
iiinsola oi Malacca, the islands of Sumatra, Java^ Bwneo, PtUo
P4nmig, Sec compiled from bowkey's Dictionary^ and other au-
-l&entic doj^unieikts, n^nuscript and printed/' London 1800, 4to.
' *^ A Dictionary of the Malay tongue, as spoken, &c. In two
parts> English and Malay,, and Malay and English. To which
is prefixed, a Grammar of that, language. By john howison,
M. B.*^ London, printed by S. Rousseau, I8OI, 4to- It is not
easj to speak in terms sufiiciently measured of this publication,
but
Digitized by
Google
x\W INTRODUCTION.
but the iaterests of literature and of oriental education require
that its real character should be explained. The long period
that had elapsed since the appearance of bowuey's work^ its
Consequent scarcity^ and the want of any better to supply its
place^ rendered the reprinting it^ notwithstanding its imperfec-
tions^ an expedient measure^ and it was accordingly undertaken
or encouraged by a late worthy^ but not learned booksellen It
was suggested to him that the original might be imiproyed by
annexing the Malayan characters to the words as they stood in
the Roman orthography ; and this^ if properly executed, would
have been highly judicious. But, unfortunately, those persons
who were employed for the purpose being ignorant of the lan-
guage, instead of giving the w<nrds in the mode of spelling used
by the natives and to be found in their writings, composed them
of such Persian characters as best liuited their idea of the sounds ;
and consequently when right, it is only by chance. For the
most part, instead of words known to the language, they are
merely capricious combinations of letters, some of whieh (such
as the Persian l^ j>, employed throughout for 4J) have no Con-
nexion with the Malayan alphabet, whilst all those peculiarly
belonging to it, and not to be met with in Arabic founts, are
•entirely omitted. Although it is difficidt to omvey to those who
are not conversant with the language an adequate notion of the
grossness of this proceeding, the Arabian or Persian scholar will
b€L sensible of it when he perceives that such words as Jie wis-
dom, and j^ life, are here written JS\ andjj^^; whilst the com-
mon Malayan words i^fl what, j1 the verb substantive, and cy>/
a fort or castle, are written ^W, «ixc, and i3^. The injury done
by a work of this description, to the literary reputation of the
country amongst forieign oriental scholars need not be insisted
upon;
Digitized by
Google
INTRODUCTION. r.xU
upon; but that which may he sustamed by the servants of thtf
East-India Company and others/! into whose^^ hands it :may have
. been put for instruction^ is a consideration of much more im-
portance. MT. HowisoN having borne a respectable character,
and being designated in the Advertisement prefixed^ aa a learned
and ingenious gentleman whose ^^Jriendfy assistance*^ enabled
the real Editor to lay his specimen before the public^ there is
. reason to believe that he was not a principal in the transactiop,
, $dthongh hewas induced to let it go into the world with the
. sanction of his name.
^^ A rough Sketch of part of an intended Essay towards as-
. certaining, deducing, elucidating, and correctly establishing the
Rudiments of the JuhyWee or Jdkdoee language, vulgarly called .
the MALAY language/' By J. s. (shaw). Prince of Wales
Island, I8O79 8^^' If the reader does not anticipate the merits
of this singular work from the foreg(»ng title, his judgment may
be assisted by the following short extracts. ** It.has b^enge-
! nerally asserted, says this author, that thie JV^ays have received
! their alphabetical characters from the Arabians :. I think that, I
. have many strong reascms to shew the contrary ; and am, there-
. fore, induced to believe, that the Arabians and. Persians have
borrowed their present characters from the Malays/' v" It has
occurred to me, he adds, from the evident ant^uity of the
Juh^viee language, in which are to be found the roots of old
; Persian and Sanscrit derivatives; &c.. that the Malays might,
probably, be from the primeval stock oiJcsomiy one of the spns
of Jofphethy who was the third son of Noah.'* His opinion of
the work last noticed will appear not to differ materially from
. pay own (for we can all see the mote in our brother's eye) when
; m he
Digitized by
Google
xlfi INTRODUCTION*
he speaks df & Wdrd^ ^< marked as a proncmn by Mr. fioWftSY]»
attd by hife copyet, the plagiarist^ under the name of howison /'
It Is not, howerer, in the copying, but the perrerting his origi*
nal, that the demerit consists, x^. shaw's claim to originality
is certainly undispnted.
** A comparative Vocabulary of the BamMy MuUyu and T*AA*
languages/^ (By 3. c. letdek, m. d.) Serampore, 1810, B^o.
The object of this work, as the learned author informs us, ^as
to facilitate the compilation of 'a series of Comparative Vocabu-*
laries of the languages of the Indo-Chinese naf ions, and of the
tribes which inhabit the eastern islands ; for which purpose it
was deemed advisable to print and circulate thdse of the Bir^
man and Malay languages in their proper character, together
with the Siamese or jPWi, of which no types have hitherto been
cut, in the Roman. The plan reflects credit on those who formed
it, and the e%ecuti<m of that part which fell in the lot of Dr.
us^fPBiff, is a proof of his talents as a philologist, and inS his in^
deftitigable industry. It may at the same time be faurly doubted
wbe^r vocabularies of this elaborate nature, where the original
text cmly is given, do not serve rather to display the acquire^
ments o9 the editor, than to attain, in the best manner, the end
proposed, of collecting information bj means of persons whose
pursuits may lead them into those countries. They seem to pre-^
sume, on the part of the traveilar, a perfect acquaintance with
the vmtten character, which is not to be expected, or even if
hei^ould possess it, a more simple vocabulary, in any familiar
tongue, would equally answer his purpose; whilst onr the other
hand, if unskilled in the literature of the country he visits, as must
generally be the case, the book will present to him no other than
adead
Digitized by
Google
INTHODUCTlOi^ xirti
a deild aiid tt^dĕss letter. Practically speakiiig alsb^ there is an
obvious advantage in furnishing hinl with such a Tocabdlary as
will facilitate his operations bj enabling him tb wirite down the
w^rds he acquires dd the same pdge with the original terms : an
attention of which I experienced the benefit, in printed vocabu*
lariĕs^ with blank kpHcei, circtdated, many yeahs since^ in all
accessible parts of the world, for the same useful purpose. These
I accompanied also ririth a short list cbntaitlihg about* fifty of the
most obvious words, to be filled up by those Who, frdm want of
time or energy, might be deterred £roiM the labtfur of a m[ore
extensive task. With regard to the Malayab part, the terms are
in general judiciously chosen, and were, I have reason to be-
lieve, communicated to him by Ut baj^fles, with whom ho
resided at Pule^ Pinemgy duHng the few months of his viiiit to
the eastward, for the recovery of hu health ; a pieriod unremit*
tingly employed by him in cultivating the languages spoken there, *
which, to a less aciite scholar, would have sufficed only for ac-
quiring the cdloquial phrases of the current dialect The or«
thography in the Malayan diaracter (with which jthat gentleman
bad no concern) is, on the other hand, much t6 be censured (
although an attempt is made to justify thid departure from the
best stuidard of writing, in the fbliowing passage : ^^ In the
Bama and Maldyu series, the jnost usual native onlM)graphy
has been generally adopted. In several instances, however, in
which it appeared to foe very likely to lead to mistakes, a less
common orthography has been .used> which in general is more
aimcular than the other, but which^ with few exceptions, may
be found in some mamiscrtpts.'^ But who^. it nmy be asked^
evdA in the most familiar epistle, mttch less in what; is to b^ .
committed
Digitized by
Google
^viii JNTKODUCT-ION.
t^mmitted to the press and to serve for the instractiod of otliets^
would think of defending incorrect spelling, by reference to the
authority of ^ome; illiterate or careless scribes ?. The professed
i^eason is to render the pronunciation more plain^ by the insar«
tion of letters not used in the genuine orthography. To what
description of persons is this to prove convenient ? To the Eu-
ropean p^cient and to the learned native it must appear trifling
at the least. Those who are altogether unacquainted with the
character are of course out of the question ; and there remain
only such as are beginning to study the written language, to
whom it can be in any way applicable, and who are thus to *Jbe
taught a mode of spelling, which it will afterwards require still
greater pains to unlearn. It is clearly admitted that the Ma-
layan orthography is by. no means so fixed- as not to warrant
some latitude in this respect, but the least experienced juro-tuUs
would not venture to write tfU for c:^U the eye, UU for Aj name,
Ub for uJli father, L^y^ for ^U mankind, *;b jJ^ (a vulgar
equivoque) fior ^b jj\ ia virgin, ^^ for ^j^ froth, ^y^^ for ^
dew, ^JLU for ^U a palace. On the first and most important
word in the vocabidary, likewise, I thjnk it incumbent on me
to romai^k, that the name of God is improperly rendered by the
word ^y tuhan. It is well known that these people, who fpr-
merly worshipped the ^^^ dewata deities or den^i-gods, -w^ere
indebted to the Arabs for their belief in One supreme Being,
and that M aliah or (more usually with the Malays) JW iH
allak thala God the most High, and ^ hiia (from the Hebrew)
are the genuine Mahometan terms for God or Jehovah. The
word ^y tuhan^ it is trtie, is ofted figuratively (by metonymy)
employed for €iod, but is precisely equivalent in its use to 'our
expression
Digitized by
Google
INTHOOyeTION, xlix
eiq^eMum. of_^^,33ie .Lordj vPfMiiQUBr' bs M tl^ phrase of
.^ er!^ f:^f t^^han eokafi^m^ a^M .^^ TheXor<j( of al} worlds/' or
19 tb0 iOomp^HM^ ^yWi W«»A5-/^*«» " Tha img^ty Lord/' and
«hcKM i)Qt;)i«Yfl beeD'isubatitutedy in a vocabulary, for the esseo-
tial name Of Ihe D^t;^«
Of my own qualifications for this aiteiQ^pt to ^rn^h. a Malayan
Grammar and Dictionary, less imperfect than what have been,
in most instances, produced by those who have gone before me
in the same career, I shall speak as briefly as possible. During
the period of my residence in Sumatra^ at a very early time of
life, I devoted somewhat more than the common attention ne-
cessary for all strangers, to the attainment of the language of
the country, under the guidance of an elder brother (long since
lost to me and to the world*), who had himself made^ an ex*
traordinary proficiency, although not in the habit of committing
his acquirements to writing. With this advantage I acquired a
competent fiacility in communicating with the natives, and was.
master of their epistolary correspondence ; but it was not until
my return to England in the latter end of 177^9 ^^^^ I applied
myself to the study of their literature, or laid any regular grounds
for the composition of the present works. These, amidst a va-
riety of pursuits and serious occupations, by which their pro-
gress has been too long retarded, have gradually profited by
my advancement of knowledge in the superior parts of the
language, and from simple beginnings, have increased in bulk
and improved in matter and form, to the state (very far indeed
n from
« Mr. JOHN MAB8DEN died in London on ihe ISth April 1786, having then
nearly completed his fortieth year.
Digitized by
Google
1 INTRODUCTION.
from a perfect ofie) in which they are now offered to the notice
of the pubUc^ and more especially of those persons whose duty
calls them to the Eastern limits of the British empire^ who are
best qualified to appreciate the utility of my labours^ and to
supply their deficiencies. To such^ individuaUy^ I shall say^ in
the apposite address of Horace^
■ Si quid novisti rectiiis istis^
Candidus imperii; si noD> his utere mecum.
CONTENTS.
Digitized by
Google
CONTENTS.
The Mdlajfan Alphabet -•.. 3
(>f Consonants and Vowels - •--••. 14
Orthographical Marhs -----•.•.-..•. 20
Division of fTords -----••-..-••-. 26
Parts of J^^eech ^
Nouns jg
A^ectives --------•...-..,.. 3^^
Comparison of Adjectives -..• 33
Numerals -------- •-•.^..^.. 30
Pronouns -------.-••-...•.. ^^
■ 0/* /A^ /?rrf Person --.. 43
" ■ cjf the Second Person .•... 4Q
of the Third Person 48
Demonstrative or Definitive -- »... 50
Ferbs -•---•--.-......... 52
Ferbs Substantive ---•-. .-. 59
Distinctions and Relations of the Verb $0
Inflexions of the Transitive Verb --.•..^...•. jtq
' Intransitive Verb .-.-..-..- 7g
Adverb*
Digitized by
Google
CONTENTS.
Pagt
Adverbs or Modak - • "" ®7
of Time- 88
of Place *•
Mscellaneous -- '*•
J^reposUiom or Directives ..------ 91
Qftywactives .----.-• - ^
Jnterjections or Exclamations ------------ 91
Particles^ -.-.---, • - - * *•
•— -r-— prefixed ---- -98
■> ■ II annexed --------------- 99
itf S^ax -.----.--.-.------.---* *®1
Of Dialects ' ^*'
Of Prosody - - -^ *^
, — QMtadity - *•
. ... — , — Verification ------------- 13o
^ Rhyme ----- 134
Praxis ' '^^
A GRAMMAR
Digitized by
Google
GRAMMAR
OF THB
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
T)REVIOUSLY to treating of words, which are the proper subject of
Grammar, it is necessary to describe the characters or letters, in
respect to their form and sound, by which the words are expressed in
writing. The Malays have for this purpose adopted the alphabet of the
Arabians, whose literature bas in all countries accompam'ed the intro*
duction of the Mahometan religion ; byt many of its peculiar sounds,
and espclcially the gutturals, bemg little suited to the soft pronunciation
of the East-insular languages, they are never to be found in the ortho*
graphy of indigenous Malayan words, and even to those Arabic terms
which the Malays have borrowed from their instructors they give a
smoothness of utterance that nearly prevent^ their being recognised by an
Arabian ear. On the other hand there exists in these langus^es several
nasal and other sounds, for which the alphabet, in its origimd state, had
no corresponding letters^ and to remedy this defect they were under the
necessity of making ;idditions to it ; not indeed by the inveption of new
B fcnrms,
Digitized by
Google
t
,J
2 A GRAMMAR OF THE
forms, but by a slight and obvious modificatioiLof those characters whose
sounds approached the nearest to their own, and beloi^ed to the same
organs of speech ; a Ub^y in which they were justified by the example
of the Persians, who had not, however, occasicm to carry their alterations
to the same extent
The course of the Malayan writing, conformably to the known prac*
tice of the Hebrews, Syrians, and Arabians, is from the right* hand to-
wards the left, in opposition to that of most of the people of India, and
particularly of the unconverted natives of the interior of Sumatra and
Java, whose alphabets, grounded on the principles of the Sanskrit (X
Deva-nagri^ proceed, like the European, from left to right.
The letters of the Arabian alphabet, twenty^eight in number, are the
following,
and to these the Malays have added six, viz. ^ cl^ uJ %3 ^, which the
learner will perceive to be judiciously formed from the cognate letters
^ C/i^ ^3 ^, by the simple expedient of increasing the number of
diacritical points* The several names and powers of all these letters,
according to the Malayan manner of pronouncing them, will be exhilMted
in the following scheme, in the arrangement of which it has been judged
more practically useful to place each of the modified characters imme-
diately after its respective original, than to reserve them, as the Malay
scribes are accustomed to do, for the conclusion of the series ; and this
order of the letters, (warranted as it is by the example of the Persians^
who place their l^ next to w, their . next to ^ , and so of the rest) is
almost indispensable to the construction and use of a Dictionary^ where
the middle as well as the initial letters mUist follow alphabetically ; for
it
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
it is obvious that much embahrassment would be experienced by those
who consult it, if letters so nearly connected in their use ^s ^ and ^ ,
(^ and 4^, u/and c/, and which the Malays, by a negligent marking
of the points, are perpetually confounding, were, instead of adjoiningi
to belong to opposite extremities of the alphabet.
THE MALAYAN ALPHABET.
Figure.
Power,
Name.
Forms accordii^ to
place and junction.
t
5, a
iJ\ alif
tj \; U U \i\
M
b
i ba
m' v*«y Vh-t?
1
t
I; ta
C^ UU» ^^JC ^ UM^
C^
*■
Z sa
o J ci^ Ji «.Ui
' Z.
J
' *
&ay^^^
Z
ch
l». cha ^^
z^4*f^-^
c
h, hh
^
z;l^^€^
c
kk
\i. kha ^
Jb dat ^
ee^'^if^
li
d
0; dJk J». J Jj J
•
z, rfz
JC>- lal
it jl^ JA Oj^J
4
U da
J
r
\j ra
w»^ (uJ^j^JJjU
J
z
]j ^^ M,Z»
])Jj*^JO
u-
s
^ ,j^ «»> sitn
fjtki imj ^j^ j^ y«««,
A
sh
*-A ^ jAin, jAim
*A cAt uii ji? tAlA
Digitized by
Google
A GRAMMAR OF THE
Kgwre.
Power,
Name.
Forms according to
place and junction.
w*
J, «
c^C oU
5a(f, ja<
U^3U^U^J^ U^^
•
<f/
dlU, mty lit
J>]^j^y^J>\^
\>
t
i
ta
^ k>. L Jl^ LLL
k
a
1^
Ha, la
l^tlaSy 4>jl^l^
t
a, *, i, 0, u
cr?^
ain
; Jft^t^l^t»^
i
gKghr
gkaitif ghnin
^ &^ &^7^ tr^
I
»S
l^
«/a
4 A * 4 14 A AA
wi
f
1i
/5
uJt bJ t.^ y y Wii»
4
P
u
Pi
hJ;y) uiS ^<* cJu
J
k,kk
.^15
kaf
jj jj jj u:^ j*i
C/
k
'^^^
kaf
C^/^lfeJ^d^
^
ghxtd
If
§AB- .
/2:£^^uJ:d^
J
I
il
lam
jin^^^ju
r
m .
f
mm
r-* f* r> */• ^ r^
b>
n
uy
nun *
wj ^^ t/ t£V. cr^
J
u,o,w
h
win
*,yj»yj)^
« A »
A soft
u
hi
d|> J3 >1 Xyj A^ *A id» Af»
»1^.
h ty y
ta,ya
•
^sJJ^y^k^
6
nia
•
nia
o'kji'idfi
T«
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 5
To the foregoing, the Malays, in imitation of the Arabians, are ac*
eustomed superfluously to add the compound character /i lam^alif-
hamzah.
Beside the varieties of form and combination above exhibited, th^re
are many others in practice, which those who are acquainted with the
regular alphabet will easily learn by the inspection of Malayan writings*
Some of them are produced merely from the haste^ and others from the
capricious licence of the pen ; such as the use of an unindented slanting
stroke for the ^, of a curved stroke or small semi-circle over and under
the letters instead of two points, or the slight inversion of the extremity
of the J, in place of the final 4 or ir, which latter is likewise, Ju several
shapes, made to connect with the j, the j j, and the j, hut irregularly^
the general rule being, that all the letters of the alphabet are in them*
•elves susceptible of connexion with those which precede them in the
same word, but that seven of them, viu j j j *S J j 1, are incapable of
forming a junction with any following letter. It remains now to ex-
plain aind exempUfy more fully the powers of the several letters of the
alphabet
t a when it occurs at the end of a syli|ble, or in the body of a word,
is always long, and has then, as in 4^b bapa father, cuU mhti dead, c^
kata to speak, the open sound of a in the Italian and most other lan-
guages of the continent of Europe, hit not generally quite so broad»
and corresponding perhaps tnwe nearly with its sound in our words
*' brand, pant, hann, malice." Before ng however, it assumes one
somewhat broader, and in ^\i hangun arise, ^U tangan the hand, ^U
mangu dismay, is equivalent to that in our ** want, warm, ball.'' At
the commencement of words it is short, unless when marked with the
C orthographical
Digitized by
Google
6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
orthographical character I meddah^ denoting extension, by which the
length of the vowel-sound is doubled. In its short state (or that of
hamzahy as it is termed) it assumes generally, but with much qualifica-
tiqp, the sound of a (which occasionally becomes e) in our words " at,
^' act, and, after;'' in which case it is marked, or understood to be
marked with the vowel fai'hah (^) ; and in like manner, ivhcn marked
with kesrah (.), or dammah (''), it assumes the sound of / in ** imp,
" inch, in," or of» and o in ** up, utter, only, obey," but not in " off,
** on, order," which an Arabian would represent by fat'hah. But all
these apparent intricacies of pronunciation owe their difficulty to the
rules by which grammarians attempt to. define them, and vanish with
practice in the language» The whole system, indeed, of orthographic
notation, the refinement of which is the subject of boast with the Ara*
bians, seems to be defective in simplicity, consistency, and even ingenious
contrivance. It may be proper to observe here, that although in describ-
ing short vowels with our characters, as distinguished from long ones, the
prosodial mark is added to the acta and jf, it has not been thought
necessary throughout the Grammar an(} Dictionary to apply a discri-*
minating mark to any other fhan the^long vowels,, its absence being
BufiBcient to denote such as are intended to be short.
L^ b^ in the words ^ Inbir lip, lJ^ babi hog, c-^S laba gain, has the
ordinary sound of that letter in the words " bib, rub, babble*"
ci; /, in «Jy iolong assist, i^j tilah command, u:^ iakut afraid, h
sounded as in " tent, tart; tetter."
cjx. The proper sound of this letter in the Arabic alphabet is nearly
that of the English th in the words " this, then," or the Greek iheia^
but by the Malays as well as the Persianft it is pronounced as 5, in the
Arabic
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 7
Arabic words ^^ seneian Monday, e^lU salasa Tuesday, and a few
others which they have adopted : nor will this change be thought extra-
ordinary by those who have noticed the pronunciation by foreigners of
our word " Bath/*
— J, in the words J^jadi become, ^\j raja king, ^js^janjt promise,
and wherever it occurs, is to be sounded precisely and uniformly as in
" jury, judge, joy, major ;'* the English being perhaps the only Euro-
pean language that can represent it by a single equivalent character. It
must be remarked, however, that we' employ the g before certain vowels,
and also dg, to express the same sound, as in the words " gentry, giant^
^^ badge." Gare must be taken to avoid a common error of confound-
ing the English y with that of the Germans and Dutch, which answers
to our y, whilst for the - the former have recourse to a most unccwth
combination of the letters dsch^ and thus in a modern publication upon
Arabian coins, we may observe the laborious orthography oi-Hadschadsck
for ^l^ Hajaj^ a proper name.
-. cA, as in *' chance, church, torch," being the tsch of the Germans,
and the c before i and e of the Italians, does not belong to the Arabic
alphabet, but is a mcxlification of their ^, by the Persians as well as the
Malays. The sound is one perfectly familiar to the organs of these
people, as in v^^ churl to steal, ^ kacha glass, CS^ chichak a lizard^
i-^c^W chackat to puncture.
_ A hard or A A, expresses an aspirate, proceeding immediately from
the lungs, and consequently stronger than can be denoUfd by any roman
ktter. It occurs only in such words as the Malays have borrowed from
tlie Arabic, as ^<f-U- hafi a pilgrim to Mecca, Jl>. hal state, J^ haram
foi bidden, j;>. AaA right ; but they do not affect to give it the forcible
utterance
Digitized by
Google
8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
uttetance of the Arabians or Persians, and it is consequently here ex-
pressed simply by the letter A, as in our words ^* hope, heart, heavy."
^ i^A is a hard gutturalp like the ch of the Germans, and of which
likewise no direct example can be given in the pronunciation of English
wc^ds, aldiough common in our Celtic dialects. The character is found
only in words borrowed from the Arabic, as^ kbabarne^s^ «-r^s^
khaiib preacher, ^^^.^ khams Thursday.
6 d has the common sound of that letter in our words ^^ did, dead,
<< a4ded,'' and in all pther European languages ; as ob dada breast, ^^J^J
dun thorn, i^yo muda young.
4> z hard, or ife, as in " adze,*' is found only in Arabic words, as c^
xat essence, j^i zakar memory*
id is always found in the alphabets written by the Malays for element-
ary instruction, but rarely, tf ever, occurs in their books ; and appearing
superfluous to the Dutch grammarisms who have published Malayan
alphabets, it has been by them omitted.
J r has the same sound as in ^< run, bar, parent," in all Malayan
words, as uJjj rupa appearance, ^^jil lari to run, a^b dhrah blood.
J % soft, as in '^ zeal, blaze, crazy," is found only in Arabic and Persian
words, as ^U^ zeman time, j^j zabur psalms, 4>j^ zamrud an emerald.
Instead of modifying the 3, as the Malays (though uselessly) have done,
the Persians have added points to the j, and formed their^, which has
the soft sound of the French 7.
^ ^, in the words ilU ja/aA wrong, ji^^U masak ripe, ^\ etas above, is
sounded as in '< son» sister, past," not as in ^^ was, has, lose," where the s
partakes of z. The Arabic names of this and the following letter ^^ sin
and ^ shtn^ are by the Malays of the southern part of Sumatra pro-
nounced stm and shim. jit sh
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 9
^ jf/k, as to ^^ shine, bush, fashion/' is the ch of the French, sch of
the Gennans, and x of the Poitnguese, and is so pronounced in «U skak
lung, ^^.aJ^ shims sun, and some others borrowed from the Arabic, Per-
sian, and Sanskrit ; but more frequently it is softened to a simple ^, as
in JLJU sitan satan, ijli^ sahadat testimony, ^^Jj^ saksi a witness, ^jjj^
siksa punishment.
^s or ss^ occurs only in Arabic words, as j^ sabar patient, ^ sah
proved, «.J^ sarfu grammar, and has then a sound somewhat l»rder than
our ss in << pass, tassel, kissing/*
Jk dl also occurs only in words borrowed from the Arabic, and the
giammars of that language are not uniform with respect to its true
pronunciation, some expressing it by if, others by d%^ whilst the Persians
give it the Mund of a pure %. By the Malays, in most places, it is
pronounced as <f/ in the words U^ ridla will, inclination, i-a^ti dUif
weak,^U. KadUr (by the Persians Kazir) present, ready. In some parts,
however, the Malays ^e it a sound approaching nearer to the d than ta
the dl in our words *< faddle, meddle/*
t f, both in the Malayan and the Arabic pronunciation, dEfiers Uttlĕ,
if at all, from that of the 4&>, or our common /, as in the words Ji^ tufan
a storm, %^^ faKb a physician, jlt Ulak divorce* It is not ustd in
any words properly Malayan, although not confined to such as are purely
Arabic ; for it may be observed, that when the Arabians adopt Greek
or other foreign terms, they represent the sound of t by this letter in
pr^rence to the cu, as in ^jSf^ kartas paper^ j^ ^jjt^ tambur a
drum, (^jb|^ tirabulus Tripoli, Jjio iulk talc;
)i tt occurs only in Arabic words, as^ibO^ manifest, which the Malaya
pronounce tlahir^ as in our words << battle, settle,*' the Arabians dahir
D (acccH'ding
Digitized by
Google
lo" A GRAMMAR OF THE
(accordu^ to the^gramoiarlsms) and the Persians ;^ahir. In fome p^rts
the Malayan sound approaches nearly to the L
e din. This vague letter, which has been the siA^t erf* xniich dis«
cussion amongst Hebrew scholars, is pronounced by the Arabians with
a peculiar hollow utterance from the interiour of the throat or fauces ;
but in this they are not imitated by the Malays, who pronounce the
words Jm dtal cunnii^, jrjU adat custom, ijl^ %barat explanation, jJt^
hhk loye, Uj doa prayer, j^ hmur life, without any effort, and as if
they were written with hanixah and the ordinary vowdk Indeed» it
may be said that the guttural part only of the sound is represented by
the e, the vocal part beii^ determined by the marks respectively applied
to it: as will be more clearly understood when the nature of these sup-
plementary vowels has been explained. It is her6 only necessary
further to observe, that not having amy aj^opriate European character
iox designating this mutaUe letter, it has been judged convenient to.nuMrk
the several vowels which stand for it with a pave accent ^
^ gh^ ghVf is a rough guttural pro n ou nc ed as in the Irish wcn^
^ lovg^*' a lake, or with the Northumbrian articuhtian, and is peculiar
to Anriioc and Perrian words, as ip^U gfmb hid^, c^ ghaUb vio*
toriousi (^m^ji' gkerib foreign.
^n/, sounded when medial or final as in << ki!^, longing, bringing^*^
is a stronger nasal than the final n of the French language, and prevails
much in original Malayan words, as ij^ agung principal, Li^ In^ng
lialf-witted, y^ ttilong to assist, ^ arigin wind» ^i ngmiga to gpipe^
1^ rigaran displeasure. At the bcguoning of a word the pronunciation
can only he acquired 1^ use, althoi;^h in fact the same as tbs medial.
Where it occurs, in a situation that might give rise to doubt as to the
division
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. n
divtsioh of the syllahle, the two letters iTg are marked with a connecting
circumflex, which is omitted (to avoid distinguishing signs not absohitdly
necessary) where no such uncertainty can Ikij^u. It will not escape
the notice of the philologht, that this is one of the sounds attributed to
the 9 am of the Hebrews, of which the e_CNr ^ through the medium of
the Arabic, is a modifioation.
(^ /, as in ^^ fife, fifty, skiff/' htiaagi only to words adopted from the
Arabic, as^/iXir-to thh&k, ^j^fihak eid&j liii fitnah slander; but
the Malays, who are not accustomed to pronounce the/ (any mdre than
the Arabians the p) commonly change it to p, and proorance thesQ
words piiir^ pihak^ pitnah. The grounds of the convertibility of theso
two letten^ not articulated by the same cngans^ is by no means obvious ;
but it may be remarked, that the inhabitants of a small . island {Pula
Ntas) near the coast of Sumatra, pronounce all Malayan words in which
the sound of p occurs.as/, saying f^an for ^pan a board, fukul for
piikul to strike, fiiluh for puluh ten.
jk^p is pronounced as in ^^ pen, papal, step," in the Malayan words
i^jS puput to blow, ^JJ pipt the cheek, ij^ tartgkap to catch« In
tpistolary and other conunon writmg, it is by np means unusual to mark
this letter with only que instead of three pcwts, thereby conCbundii^ it
with the preceding.
J it, as an Arabic letter, has a harder sound than that of cc or ck in the
wocds '< accost, kick, dock, mocker," and may be better exemplified by the
ititmHabakkuk, When found at the begpoingcxr in the mkldle, itshews
the word to be (whh few exceptions) of Arabic ^rigm, as JjJ kabul
acceptable, j jj kadar value, jM faBr a religious mendicant ; but the
Malays employ it likewise for expressipg a hard sound at the end of
their
Digitized by
Google
ii A GRAMMAR OF THE
their own words, as j^U masak ripe, jHi balik to turn, jk^ kaldk pre*
sently ; which however is generally omitted in discourse, seems to form
no integral pait of the word, and may be considered as an excrescence*
C/ k is pronounced as in << king, make, token," in the wcHnds ^ kgi
base, JU^ kapala head, Jt^ kala time, ^ pakei to wear, c^ jnuka face;
cS'g hard, as in << gsig, get, gig, agog, gut,'' a letter miknown to the
Arabic, but common in the Persian ae well as the Malayan Ismguagp,
and a modification of the preceding c^ is uniformly so {uronounced, as
in Jfl? pagar paling, J^ gUa fool, ^j^ gunong mountam, Jl agama
religion. The soft g in our words ^^ gentle, regibn, age," is represented
by the letter^.
J / has the sound we give to the letter in " lily, lolling, camel," in
the words 4^ luluh mud, JJ Rlin wax, J) Ulu to pass, Juj bajital
pillow.
A 77i is pronounced as in <^ mama, man, am, maim," in die wordi
^U rmlu ashamed, csJj^ muhU mouth, ^ mmum to drink.
^ n, as in ^^ nun, nonage, nation,*' in the words cmJ nanii to wait,
i}j; bunoh to kill, ^U mana where, Jy iulan companion.
jUj Of w, has in the Malayan words ^y^ sum milk, c:Jj^ H/i^ skin,
c^j^ S"^^^^ ^^ ^^ l^ ^'^iong to help, the sound of the Italian u and d
in ^^ duo, punto," of the German in ^* gut, bruder, todt," of the Dutch
ocm ^^ hoek, toen, stoel," and of the English oo in << loom, tool," or
of in ** dont, moping, notice.** When instead of the j the sh<Mt
vowel dammah is applied to the consonant, as in ^^jj budi understanding,
(«9juft tdup alive, it is intended to express a vowel sound no more thaii
half the length of the fonneir. As a consonant the j is repre^hted by
tt^, and sounded as in «< want^ wool, dower,*' in the words ^ tvarna
colour,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 13
colovr, ^^ wanfi f^t^eaoA^ ^ji kaamn tamtpmakn^ j^ mSumr tie mstf.
Thit letter does not oAea occwr at Am hepimin[^ of Malvjran ironk «i a
Towd sounci, the a, 10 that ntntion, bemg cxp i w c d bf jt or ^j^, af ift
K£^jiubat physic, ^jjb ^nt^ unsheathed..
. « 4 being a: sofiber aaptrato Iban idrmur words ^ bmaUer ko&t^ he»vy,'*
aaia cJ^bb Aimy^ to trust, ^U Aimm^ except», JdU maAtfi dear, 4^ A^Aift
cati» and fin: the most part a» impetcepliye at in << honoiir, h6iflr,
^ hoimt,'' «uch vj^oids as ^U JMf expendbd^ jSyi al^ the inceriour
oraatiy, ^l^ Uang lort, are aceotdinglf wnlten withoat the h. A«
all fcmknce of the pnpdetijr of lhiS|. iiafiur asths tmn eonoemed, n
WKf he ohscrved that all IraveUara hasw agwod in iqfieUkig the woNi
iUan (in the famflfair name of mrmig^iUn^ without an aspirate, alchwgh
written ^j» kUtaru Wheft the final i is nBurfced wkh two points, it i»
by the Arabs pronounced at t^ and with them geneiallf^ddioles a gran^
mafiical distkiction ; but «he Btfedays frequenttyfall into the impn^riety
of subfititntii^ this at the end qf their cadici^ woids^ fer tliepMpev <::> t.
^^ J, y, has in the words ^ UUtmg tell^ ^ itang-aL^ms^ ^jU^mdmfX
todreanii the sound of the luliaa i, in ^ tl^dekif' ^ Gtitnaii in >^ Jtbir,
«' wir,*' and the Engjiish eem'' bee» ietai» agiee;' Foe (he short ij a»
in ^ bineki to hate» ia.x^ iftttttft to ask fior^ the TOmi iami^ is either
wppliod or understood. As a costsonant the |^;is hut rqpsesented by
y^ sounded as in ^^ young» yes» bowyer» ' in the words j»ltf k5^ wood^
^U bayang a shade, ci>j$U y^cliit a prackm itone^ Few M ahyan
words, however, begin with this letter, the long vowel sound, in that
situation, being expressed by ^^1 or ^ as in JA tpir son-in-law, ^jua
tdoHg the nose. At the end of wwdiy when preceded hy/M-^skr it
takes the diphthongal sound m our words '^ eye, buy, my, high,"* whkh
E it
Digitized by
Google
14 A GRAMMAR OF THE
it has been judged most ansilogoas and consistent to express by ei^ as in
^\) baki a town-hall, ^\i bagei sort. Where the ^ is preceded by t,
and the sound is consequently more jMrotracted, it is expressed by ai\ as
in ^ lain other, ^U main to play,
, ^ nuz, a soft nasal, as in our words ^^ maniac, lenient, union,'' which
the Mabyan has in common with the Sanskrit alphabet, but is unknown
to the Arabic, occurs in the words JU niala blaze, ^jj niadar soundly
sleeping, umU anyut adrift, j\i banyir a squall, ^U hania except, and
most frequently in the common forms of the possessive, as ^b^ mata-ma
^ ^^9 ^^j rupa^nia its appearance. It is to be obsenred, that although
in the names of thk and other consonants, the Towela is annexed to gire
them litterance, ihfiy are all equally susceptible of other vocal sounds^
and where the ^ nia takes f or r» it ia aoore ceavenient to empldy y in
the nasal part, and to write hamfir rather than baniir^
4 la^ or the letters J and I, with the orthographical mark x hamzaki
have already been sufficiently noticed, no reason appearii^ for assigning
to them conjointly a place in the alphabet* . ,
From the fongom^ examination of the letters it appears, that of tho
thirty-four which compose the alphabet, thirteen are peculiarly and al-
most exclunvely Arabic, six may be considered as peculiarly Malayan,
and fifteen are common to both luigaages ; and, • consequently, that the
proper Malayan wcmxIs are all expressed by twenty, or, if we reject the S
(which never occurs)^ by nineteen characters.
Of Consonants and Vo^fels.
The cojnman ^vision of this and other alphabets into lingual, dental^,
labial» and guttural letters^ seems to be more ingenious than useliil, and
that
Digitized by ;
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 15
that into radicals and serviles, though essential to Arabic and Hebrew
etymology, has no relation to the structure or derivation of words in this
language. It will, however, be necessary to explain with some minute-
ness what relates to the distinction of consonants and vowels, and the
nature of those orthographical marks which affect their pronunciation.
The Arabians name the letters of the alphabet cJ^ hurufj and
consider them all as consonatits, defining them to be susceptible of motion
or utterance (mobiles) by means of the vowels, but not of ihemselve»
possessing that power/ nor capable (^ forming syllables. These letters
or consonants (^or there is no separate term) they distinguish into strong
and weak, comprehending in the former class all excepting \ a^ jU^ and
^^ ?, which three form the latter class or weak letters, and are no other
than those which we consider exclusively as vowels; the two latter
assuming occasionally, with them as with ns, the functions of consonants.
From this arrangement proceeds (as will hereafter appear) much of the
perplexity of Arabian orthography*
* By vowels they understand certain supplementary characters placed
above and beneath the letters, serving to note the particular vocal sound
with which they are to be uttered. These are often by us termed vowel-
points, but injudiciously, as it is of importance to distinguish them from
those actual points which permanently accompany and ' constitute an
integral part of many of the characters, being equally necessary to their
complete formation with the point over our letter 1, or the stroke across
our /. It must at the same time be observed, that neither the supple-
mentary vowels, nor the diacritical points, nor certain other orthogra-,
phical marks (to be described in the sequel) were known to the ancient
Arabic or Gufic style of writing, but have been subsequently introduced
to
Digitized by
Google
i6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
ta supply the pianifesit dei^cts of ^ origtp^ r^de sysbent : yet it may be
Igurly dau))^, whether the iave^ioi^ U iKd: a vf ry imperfect expedieot,^
ioferioi: to ^ Sausl^rit ai^d £th«^^ ^f temSi where the «Sect of the
VQ^el is ei(pressed by 9. modificatioa of the oon^oiiiat, asudl certwily to^
the Qsptk w4 Rom^ where (he vowa|# asittiM their ii»d^;mwl^ plsbo^
in the serial of letter«#
Thes^i vowels» by th« Arabians VMMd (4iri(;f»' harakat i^ the plural,
firoin gu^ huraiat signifyiog motim, as givins^ motion q( utteranoe* U>
the confooaqts, are by the Malays named ^^V fwrk% which implies lines
or strokes ps^faUel to eac^L o^hi^, qif w\it»ry eiray» ^oA 4ao op^u skgata
or w^appiw, from their t^^uil^^ofi^ a^^mAy bep rtwiro e rti to hmces borne
in ta^k and ^^ Th^y are by pp mean^ ip 4pmnum we with them^
but chieSy employed in quot^^ns from the hran and th# writbga of
its commentators, and also in expre^iofi &ame% of places, persons, or
things not familiar, s^ weU as to mark the distinction between ordinary
words composed of the same letters but difiertnlly pronouqcedi which
i^gh^ o^rwise be confpunded with each Qtlief.. They sn-e three in
immherQ ai)d. h^ve t^e Arabic pames of i^fat-hah^ ^ ke^ah, aod
4W dfim^^i which thfl Malays pronounce dlammahf
i^/ahhah (/) named also ^^V^ ^^V f^^i^ de-ilmot the strode above,
has the SQund of a generally and sometimes of eahort, in our Winds ^^bad»
<« banish, bet, bevy/* and being placedover any of the strcmg letters, w con-
sonants as we should t^rm them, enables them to take that vocal sounds
which in themselves they are not understood to possess^ as in the woids
J^ hoM ignoranti \,s^J^ tampat place^ ^ b€si iron, ^^ dwdmn desire*
The effect of iu s^plicatkm to any of three weals; letters (our Vowel$) wiil
be notice4 when we come to speak of them s^e particularly»
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 17
. ^ kesrah (,) named also mj^j ^_^U bar is dc-bawah or the stroke
beneath, has a sound not diflering much /rom that of our short i iq ^^ bit,
^Vbidden, trip," (especially as pronounced in North Britain) but more
nearly resembling' the short i of the Italians, as in the Malayan words Js^j
bintil a blister, cjj j dinding a wall, ^Ijo tinggl high.
iA^ dammah or dlammah [' ) named also ^Ijjbo ^^b ^^^^^ de-addp^n
the stroke before or in front, has nearly the sound of u as pronounced
in ^^ pudding, cushion, puss,*' (the u in " bud, turn, upper," being a
diflferent articulation), of 00 in ^^ wood, stood, foot," (which is shorter
than in ^V brood, cool, foc4,") and of in ^^ bolster, police, foment,**
differii^ from that in " blot, hot, forgot," which would be more aptly
represented by alif^caA faUhah. The figure of dammah is that of a
small J, and its position above the consonant, but somewhat to the left,
or forward, as its Malayan name imports. . Examples of its applicaticm
appear in ^^c3 tuntut to demand, ^s^ bunting pregnant, c;^ tompat
to choke up, jsjj bontar or buntar (the distinction of sound between
and u being often imperceptible) round, jcj bonda or bunda mother ;
and in the word ^z^jg^ ckechintong a lock of haur, the three vowels have
their respective consonants.
Being applied to the several letters of the alphabet, they form syllables
that are considered as either pure or mixed. A pure syllable consists
of a consonant accompanied or followed (but nevef preceded in the same
syllable) by a vowel, or by what is termed a quiescent letter, or by both,
-* / ^ ^
as . cluij o <i, ^ nu, U mJ, ^ bau. A mixed syllable consists of two
consonants, of which the latter is mdte, with an intermediate vowel, or
with a vowel and a quiescent letter also intermediate, as ^ban^^pengf
^ji bin^ tj:jj tvatj ^U ban^ ^yjbaun. Some mixed syllables are found to
F close
Digitized by
Google
i8 A GRAMMAR OF THS
close with a liquid aiid a mutei as L^ ^arf or skart a copditioD, but thu^
occurs only in Arabic words.
From the foregoing it will appear that the manner of appl3ring the
vowels to what are termed the strong letters (our consonants) is sufficiently
simple, but it is otherwise with regard to the three weak letters \ a^ ji^
and ^^ J, owing to their ambiguous properties, beix^ sometimes moveable
and sometimes quiescent* By nKyveable is imddrstood that, like other
consonants, they are capable of beii^ put in motion by the applicictiott
of vowels, and thereby forming syllables, asj wa, \^y(i* By quiescent
is meant the state in which: they cease to be consonants in feet, are in-
capable K& the application of the supplementary vowels (though they
may be affected by those belonginjg to the precedBng consonant), vA
perform the function of long vowels, in our acceptation of the terms, as
U nicLf (^ bu JU tan, jj rati. In this quiescent state it must be obvious,
in spite of definitions, that they £ffer in nothing essential (ml lei^^ of
pronunciation, from the three vowels denominated (for the sake of dis«
tinction only) supfdementary ; fat-hah being the representative of \ S^
iesrah of 4^ u ^^ dammah of ^ u^ which, with some change of shape
and size, are placed above and below the other characters, instead oT
assorting with them, as in the orthographical system of most other
classes of language..
When die supplementary or short vowels applied to the weak letters
in their moveable state, cht to the stroi^ letters immediately preceding
them in their quiescent state, are respectively, fiUhah X.o\ kesrah to 4«^
and dammah to j, they ace said to be homogeneous; and, on the con^
trary, when they are dissimibrly or interchai^eaUy employed, they are
said to be htterogeneousu Fat^hak being applied to t moveable (in
that
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 19
that CMe denotakiated hamzuh)^ produces no sensible change in the
sound of that letter, which» however it may be classed by grammariaiUi
can never perform the office of a conscmant in our acceptation of the
term^ and it continues to be pronounced like n, as in j^t abad an age, Jul.)
(gal fate. When, on the other hand, kesrah or dammah is applied to
1, the proper sound of the lietter is extinguished, and it takes that of the
supplementary vowel so applied, as ^czJ^ istri wife, ^\ ibn son, J\
utama excellent, aUI upama like. When any of the three are applied
to. J or 4^. which must in that case be moveable (or consonants), regular
syllables are fopned in the manner of other letters, as in uj;^ waktu
thne^ JUj rcisal meeting, attainment, ^ yogia it behoveth. In some
instances of the application of fat'hahf particularly to the 4^ final, the
proper sound of the letter gives place to that of the Superscribed vowel,
as in ^Ui tdiala most high.
When one of the three weak letters in its quiescent state is preceded,
in the same syllable, by a homogeneous supplementary vowel (belonging
to the adjoining consonant) they coalesce, and the effect produced is that
of lengthening the sound common to both, asy tiij ^ si, U ma : but
when the quiescent letter is prece^d by a heterogeneous vowel, the
mixture of their sounds prodnces a diphthbi^i as^ haUfr \J pei. In
Malayan words however the long vowel sounds occurring much more ,
frequently than they do ia Arabic, the di{&th6ngs are more usually
formed by the association of two of the quiescent letters, than by one of
them with a supplementary vowel, as in Jb bdu smell, ^\j tmk ascend,
^U mam to play, ^\^ serai a palace. It must at the same time be
observed that at the beginning of words, the long vo>Yel3 jt and ^^t, in*
stead of forming diphthongs, produce the simple long sounds of J, ^,
and
Digitized by
Google
to A GRAMMAR OF THE
suid I, as in the words ^J^ orang mani d^ usah mindful, uLtt tsap td
tuck ; and also that ^ iprectdtd' by fat-'hah, instead of the diphthong ei,
sometimes takes the sound of the long e of the Italian and other lan^
guages of the continent, as in Xj^ merah red, j^ ber sufifer, j^ ter the
castle at chess, iJb balerang sulphur*
Where the vowel character appears doubled over or under the last
letter of a word, the Arabian grammarians mean to denote that it is to be
pronounced as if the syllable were terminated by the letter ^ nun, from
whence this form has obtained the name of ^yj or nunnaUon,.as 4^^ tan,
^ sin, ^ jon ; but no instances of this occur in any pure Malayan
word.
Of Orthographical Marks.
The orthographical marks which now remsun to be explained are those
called My^jesntf ^jiJLS teshdidj «^ hamzah, 1^ wesla, «jm meddah, and
cJ^aHgka.
My^jemi or My^jaxam (as pronounced by the Malays) signifies ampu-
tation, and is also termed c:jU ^^\j harts mad or the dead mark. Its
form is i^ or **), and being placed over any letter of a word, it denotes
that such letter is mute, dead, or deprived of the vowel «ound that
might otherwise be supposed to give it motion ^r utterance, and only
serves to close the syllable produced by the antecedent letter and its
supplementary vowel, forming what has been already described as a
mixed syllable, as «xi bad, ^ tin, ^JU^ sampei arrive, jjcJ taridok horn»
CO ^
lj:jj hinting a rampart. It may be applied to all letters capable other-
wise of receiving a vowel (of which this is the neg^iUon) but b never by
the Malays applied to the three weak letters, nor is the occasion for it in
their
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. mi
their language so frequent as ia Arabic, the genius of the foimer being
unfrieqdly to the recurrence of consonants without the intenrention <^ a
vowel sou^d.
jy(jJL> teskdJd (nuned also jy& shaddu) signifies corrdboration, and being
placed over a letter in the form of ( ;*), has the effect of doubling it ; in
which case the former of the two sounds coalesces with the preceding
syllable, and the latter, with itcf proper vowel, forms the subsequent oi^e,
as in the woixls cu%c tammat finished, iz^jennat paradise, «^^ vheri^
to separate. It may be applied to any of the strong letters excepting ^
chi %^g9 s^ ii) tii^t which letters, not being themselves of a simple
nature, could not be doubled without a harshness of sound ; and also tb
the two weak letters j and «^, although not to I When placed over
the J or 4^, tlie former half of the letter thereby doubled remains quiescent,
and the latter, half becomes moveable, as in ^^j buwang or buang to throw
out, ^ iiyang or iumg a pillar, c:jy muwat or miiat to load, ^y tuwei
to reap : but double letters being in general so little necessary for ex-
pressing the liquid or fluid sound of the words, it would be uselessly
employing the learner's attention to enter further into the rules by which
the teshdid might be applied ; for we should bear in mind that these
refined orthographical distinctions were invented for a class of languages
with which the Malayan has no radical connexion, nor scarcely any pro-
perty in common : yet are they elaborately taught by the natives to every
youth who commences the study of his own with some tincture of the
Arabic language; gnd a copious syllabarium, where all the shgata are
exhibited, is prepared for lus exercise. Exafnples of this may be seen in
the Alpbdbetum Arabicum, printed at Rome in 1592 (with beautiful types)^
and in Gladwin's Persian Moonshee, printed at Calcutta in 1795*
G Havixah
Digitized by
Google
t2 A GRAMMAR OP THE
Hanitah {*)f the niost used by the Mabys of all the oythographicat
marks, is either an appoodage of the moveable t, usually accompanyiiig
its supplementary vowel, and consequmtly placed either above or bekm
that letter, or else it is the representative of or substitute for it, and in
its absenceis placed in front of the preceding letter. So intimate indeed
18 the connexion, in the opinion of grammarians, between the moveable
\ and this mark, that the former, being present, is made to assume the
name of hamMh, leses its proper efficiency, and, like a mere aspirate,
adapts its sound to that of the vowel with which the mark is accompanied»
as i^\ ab, i^\ ibj i^Vub or ob. This adapticm, it is true, might take
. place although the ham%ah were omitted, and its use, when so applied»
seems to be no other Uian that of d^ioting the quality of this letter» I9
this lai^uage, however, where the vowels are »psuli^ly employed, the
chief use of the hanizah is to express (like our comma or apostrophe) the
ciision of the \ moveable at the commencement of a syllable followii^
one of the three weak letters, 1, j, or ^ quiescent ; and also, but not
uniformly, following a consonant rendered mute by^^m; which two
circumstances occur most commonly in derivative words formed by an*
nexing particles (to be hereafter explained), as ^J\jju^ ka^semporna-an
perfection, ^^'U/j pe-^karjor^n performance, ^^ 'y^s^ ia-tatUu-an certainty^
\piJ ka-jianti'dn expectation, Jt\xj& peng^ad^han presence, ^j^JiJ/^en^,
ibur comforter, CJi^yJU meng^usik to tease. It alsa supplies the elision^
#f \ before J or 4^ at the commencement of a word to which the particlq.
ya sa (a contraction of cA- salu one) is prefixed, as gjj— s'orang a man»
for %jjC sa-orang ; as well as in the instances of >>jJU. mak'ujar for
j^ CS^ maka ujar and he said, and (^Jj j ^ martkltu for u-^t C^j^
marika tlu those people ; and, generally, wherever such elisions occur*
Sometimes
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 23
Sometinies the hamxah instead of being a sob^tituto for t» represents
the jr or ib| which soft as}>irate has nearly a similar sound, as^^^^JU mmg*
ambur to scatter, from j^ ambur or hambur ; ^j^y^ meng-unus to
unsheath, from ^^ unus or kunus ; and thus also when the primiiive
begins with U Aa, the \ being then qiiiescait or vowel, preserres its place
in the derivative, and the jb ooly is represented by hamxah^ as in ^UU
meng-dbis to consume, from ^U^^ii^ or habis\ jUio meng-dlau to drive
out, from j\tb dlau. or hdlau. It will not escape remark that hamzah^
accordii^ to the foregoing account of it, partakes much of the nature of
the Greek (') or spiritus lenis, and that in respect to form it is the
Arabic s.. am diminished in siae.
J-^ xjoesl ("*), by the Malays written and pronounced aI^ weslah^ sig-
nifies. ^^ union,'" and is applied only to the initial !, which then becomes
entirely mute, and a junction takes place between the sound of the last .
vowel of the jHreceding word and the next following ccmsonant, whereby
the two words are made to coalesce. Its u6e is confined to Arabic
phrases, and chiefly, if not entirely (excepting in quotations), to the \ of the
definitive particle J\ a/, which under certain circumstances is modified in
pronunciation, as ^t c^ kitdbi *lnabi the book of the prophet, ^\ ^
bismi *llahi in the name of God. For the rules by which the applica*
ttcm of this mark is governed, and particularly for those affecting the
letter J also, of the particle, accordii^ to which it is extinguished and
its place supplied by doubling what is termed the sdar letter which
follows it, as m the sequel of the phrase last quoted, f*t^^ cf^^J'
Urahmani Urafumi the merciful and compassionate, the Arabic grammar
must be consulted. To the Malayan they may be considered as extras
neous.
«w
Digitized by
Google
24 A GRAMMAR OF THE
jw« medd or 2fiX« meddah (^) signiBes extemiooi and is in like manner
applicable to \ whose sound i$ thereby lengthened. Its use may be
thus considered ; that the pronunciation of the syllaUe requiring two
alifsj one of them moveable or consonant, and the other quiescent, but
the rules of orthography not admitting of such a repetition of the letter,
this mark is placed over the one 1, to denote at the same time the elision
and the extension of sound, as in y\ oyer water, cJl afi fire, ^ akhir
last. But in Malayan words the long sound of \ formii^ a syllable at
the beginning, is commonly expressed by U Aa, with the soft or imper-
ceptible aspirate to support the supplementary vowel, as in ^U habis or
abis to finish, ^^jU hart or art day, ^U liayam or J\ ayam a fowl.
In some writings, however, we may find a second and smaller \ placed
beside the greater, which the grammarians affect to omsider as another
foitn of meddf and name it u3t «v« medd *aHf^ Thk smaller \ is also
employed by itself, and placed above the other characters, whose junc-
tion frequently excludes it from occupying that place which the greater
\ would hold in the line, as in ^Jj^^j for J^j^j rahman merciful ; but
this seems to be nothing more than a fancy of the penman, and to have
no influence on the pronunciation. When placed over 4^ final, it implies
that the letter, in Arabic words, is to be sounded like 1, as in^uf
tdSla most high ; but the Malays, on the contrary, sometimes introduce
this ksser t instead of applying faUhah to the jMreceding consonant, in
order to produce the diphthongal sound of ai or ei, as in ^ pakei to
wear, A)^ gulei a curry. Finally, the meddah is employed iii idJire*
viation» of a sacred or mysterious nature, where one, two, or mosct words
are represented by their initisd, medial, arid final letters, u ma for AJt ^U
Mldhi *ss€lam peace be upon him.
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. «5
' CJ1\ arTgka (r) or the Arabian cipher 2, when used as an orthogra*
phical mark, denotes that the word to which it is applied, although
written but once^ must be doubled or repeated in the pronunciation.
This expedient proceeds from the frequency of these reduplications in
forming certain indefinite plurals, superlatives, and adverbs, and in ex-
pressing the continuance or repetition of. action in verbs, as tUj^rumah--
rumah houses, fcJ^ kata-kdta words, r^y putih'piitih verjr white,
r^lto tinggt'tinggi very high, r J^ mula-^mula in the first place, r Ju
mdna-mana wherever^ X J^ jalan-jalan to walk about, T^U matn^main
to play or be at play. It must be observed at the same time with regard
to the verb, that where reciprocity of action is to be denoted by repetition,
a difference of form or inflexion takes place (as will be hereafter more
particularly explained), and instead of applying the cipher, the words
are written at length, as ^y^ '^y tolong^menolong to assist mutually.
When the cipher is applied to a derivative wcH'd, the primitive part
only, and not the particle prefixed, is repeated, as X^Jlcj} ber^makanr
mdkan to eat much or frequendy, Xf!L» se-lama-lama so long as, for
ever, Xf^jyJ per^tMmMurut a train of followers, retinue. Where the
particle is annexed, the cipher may be equally applied and the repeti-
tion take place, as ^XlJLJ ka^sukorsuka-an hilarity, ^t^y^J per-
bunoh'bunoh'On repeated murders ; but not with strict accuracy, because
a prosodial variation takes place, and the words should be, and more
frequently are written ^,'ICJL^ ka-suka-sukd^n and ^y^^ ka-^mnoh-^
hunoh-^n^ without the aid of the cipher. When the particles m tneng.
and ^ peng are prefixed to words marked with the cipher, in which
the particles are followed by a vowel-sound, it is common to retain the
nasal ng in the repetition, and for fi^Ui an inquisidve person/ to write
H and
Digitized by
Google
26 A CRAMMAR OF THE
and pronocince iJU «-JUJ per^apa-rTgapa^ for XjJu to cogitate, jJ^jJU
mengira-ngira^ and for fjJlto to contmue flowing, to write JU^U* mcng-^
alir-ngalir.
Thus much it has been thought necessary to say on the subject of the
elements of which words are composed, and of the characters and signs
by which they are expressed in writing. The words themselves, their
distinctimis, qualities, and uses in servii^ to convey, either by themselves
or by th^ir combination, intelligible and correct meanings (the proper
object of Grammar) must now be considered.
Division of TVonns.
The most obvious and general division of the lai^age is into primitive
and derivative words. By primitive or simple words are to be under-
stood all words, of whatever part of speech, in their original and unmo-
dified state, whether indigenous or adopted from other languages, as c^^t
drang man, ii\i tamh earth, 4^jj budi understanding, ^ besdr great,
\A^ takut afraid, cil aku I, J^jalan to walk, jjj liiar out, ^ akan
unto, ^ weh alas ! By much the greater proportion of primitive Malayan
words are dissyllables, pronounced with a slight stress or accent on the
former of the two, as ^J\^ niakan to eat, Jf^^S piikul to strike, ^U pa-
dang a plain, ^;J pinang betel-nut ; whilst monosyllables, as i^jj brat
heavy, ^j^jauh far, 2f\^ gah renown ; and trisyllables and polysyllables
(not composed), as ^b benatang a beast, ^ bettna female, ^^]^ seraya
at once, j<^ kalariggdra inquisitive, are very rare»
Derivative words are formed from the primitives, by prefixing or
annexing certain inseparable and otherwise non-significant particles,
which will be enumerated and explained in their proper place, it being
sufficient
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 27
sufficient to notice here, that prosodial and other changes ia the ortho*
graphy of the primitives frequently attend their application, as Ji^
ka^add^n existence, from jt ada to be, ^U!^ ka-lapdr^n famine, from
^i lapar hungry, ^^j turun-kan to lower, from ^^y turun to descend,
^USu, mengampong to collect, from ^^JU^ kampong an inclosure, J^^
memukul to beat, from J(^ pukul strike.
What are properly named compound words, formed by the junction
of two or more significant terms, are not frequent in this language, and
the few that occur consist either of such as convey nearly a repetition of
the same idea (often .borrowed from different languages), as (,£..^0^ suka^
chita joy, ^^ jj JJLe akal'4)udt understanding, ^jb! ^ lelah-leteh languid ;
or else of words which have become connected in their signification by
familiar use, and made to coalesce in sound by the elision of a vowel, as
4^jtf «3 din 'art break of day, l::^^^ marik ^itu those persoivs they ; to
which may be added u^'b iya-itu that is to say, uJL^ barang'-stdpa
whosoever, ^l7 J^ sapu^tdngan a handkerchief. There are also a lew'
words of three as well as of two syllables, which occasionally drop the
first, especially in conversation, as y^^j rJmau for ^4^^ arimau a tiger,
^^ ttmun for ^^%:>» antimun a species of cucumis, jr^U mdrah for j^U
amdrah angry, Jbj ringan for ^Joj^ aririgan light in weight, ^jj punia
for ^^\ ampunia own, ^j^ mas for ^j^\ amas gold, ^ nam for Jt
anam six.
PjiRTs of Speech.
The usual division of speech, in the oriental languages, is into three
parts only, viz* the noun, the verb, and the particle ; the first including
the adjective, and the last all other words ; but this seems much too
general
Digitized by
Google
a8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
general for the purposes of useful distinction, and although the division
into eight parts, which was found applicable to the Greek and Latin,
and from them has been adopted into the modem languages of Europe,
is not perfectly suited either to these or to the Malayan, I am induced
from a consideration of the advantage that attends the «mployment of
known and current terms, to conform in ^eat measure to the principles
of this division, instead of attempting a classification entirely new.
Some difficulty arises from a numerous description of words presenting
themselves, which in their primitive or crude state are not confined to
one particular part of speech, but are common to two or more, as JU
jUan to walk and jalan a road, 4SL» saUth wrong and sdlah a fault, jjjr
tidor to sleep and tidor asleep. This, however, is no more than occurs
in English, where the words '^ love, dark, dry, wish," and innumerable
others, are at the same time noun ahd verb, substantive and adjective,
adjective and verb, and may be employed in the one or the other ca-
pacity as the construction requires ; and as in their derivative form the
parts of speech to which Malayan words of this description belong, are
determined in general by the particles (prevalent in proportion as the
style is correct and grammatical), it will not be necessary to consider
them as a distinct class, but as belonging to the several parts of speech
to which they may he eventually referable, either from their place in the
sentence or the changes they undergo.
The following are the parts of speech into which, without departing
too much from accustomed distinctions, the language may be divided.
Nouns or the names of things, the objects of sense and thought.
Adjectives or the qualitives of nouns.
Numerals or terms of number.
Pronouns
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 2^
Pronouns perscmal and demonstraliye, including the Article.
Verbs or affirmatives of beingi acting, or suffering.
AEtVBRBS or modals.
Prspositions or directive.
Conjunctions or connectives.
iNtBRjĔCTlONS or exclamations,
IksbpAr,arle Particles or fortnatives.
Of Nouns.
Nouns in this language cannot properly be said to possess the distinc-
tionb ekher of gender, number, oi* case. The absurdity of attributing
dtSerence of sex to thingSi or to the names of things not organised by na«
tiire to reproduce their kind, <£d net suggest itself to the framers or
methcidisers of the Malayan tongue. The real difference existing in
amniate beiiig^ as well sli ttiat pret»umed to exist in vegetables, is denoted
by appropriate i?4rords expressive of the sex, as cf^ ldki4akimzn^ male,
^f^} perampuah woman, female, ja^». janian the male, and ^ betlna
the female of animals in general, as c/X^ %jji ordng laki-ldki a man
^itfiingniAli^ from a woman), ^jt«p %)^ drang perompuan a woman
(diBtin^i&hed ttcM U man), ju>. ch^ kUdd jonton^ stallion, ^ jjf^
kiida betlna a mare, ^j^ ^\ dyam jantan a cock, ^ Ji ay am betina
a hen, cSiSi J^ gonja taki'laki the male hemp-plant Should it be
maintained that kiida betina a mare is effectively the feminine of the
noun huda jantan a horse, that daughter is the feminme of son, and
queen of Img, we may answer, without denying the propositions, that
such a distinctioii of terms does not belong to grammar, but like other
names of ihings, they are best sought for in a dictionaryr
I Number
Digitized by
Google
30 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Number is not denoted by any variety of tennination or change in the
form of the noun, but by separate words expressive of plurality or sin-
gularity, such as jA> baniak many, cjli batang some, or by specific
numerals. An indefinite plural, however, of a peculiar kind is some-
times employed, which consists in a duplication of the noun, and has
already been noticed ^in speaking of the cipher used to signify it, aa
f c^U batu-batu stones, t^j rdja-rdja princes, TcJi kata-kata words.
The opinion may indeed be hazarded, that in this language the noun in
its simple state, without any accompanying term to limit or extend its
signification, is more properly to be considered as plural than singular ;
or, that in order to the determining its number, the application of a term
expressing singularity is more cconmonly necessary than one of indefinite
plurality. Thus, for exsynple, in the phrase jjlj ^jt o\ nda orang d^
luar there are persons without, the word orang requires no plural sign ;
but^ on the contrary, in the phrase jj) j \jy-^ ^ odu $*drmig de4uar there
is a person without, the article or numeral of unity is indispedsable ; and
so also in the phrases ^^ J^i j de-balik gunong beyond die mountab%
J\ ^Ju4^ mem^bili dyam to purchase fowls, the words gunong and dyatii
are at once understood to be in the plural number» And fmm hence,
perhaps, has arisen the practice of denoting the individuality of all sisnsi^
ble objects by specific terms accoilipanying the numeral; which are in
many instances descriptive of some obvious quality of the thing, although
in others quite arbitrary; but the nature of these idioms will be besfc
understood from a single example in our own language, where, in speakr»
ing of cattle, we say two, three or more <' head;** whilst the Malay»
(and somewhat more appropriately) enumerate cattle, birds, and animals^
in general, by the «^ tail," as ^1 ^^ jj^ kiida Rtm ikuT five horses (or
tail
Digitized by
Google
WALAYAN LANGUAGE. 31
lair of horses), Jj\ JL-^ yj karbau sambtlan ikur nine buffaloesi mA
Jj\ ^,sJU\ %yL» dyam sabong ampat tkur four game-cocks. In counting
the human species the generic term Sj^ oimig is repeated, as c.j^ cjji
Zrang s'drang <me person, ^jl^ tlTXfl laki-l&ki dm orang tno men,
%jj\ d^ ii>y^ perampuan ttga orang three women. To inanimate
substarces various terms are in like manner applied, as ^ ^ \ J^ pisang
Uma buah five plantains, jy^ i^^j rumah sa-Buah one house, «^ ^p^
mgn sorbOah one or a city, ,^ cl^U m^a sa-biji one eye, ,-jw» p idur
sa-bgi dne e^, >j y c^ batu dua biji two stones, ^JlL ^^b tf/Sf^n m4ei
pot leaf, ^iLi uu^ ranibut sa-lei one hair, ^l>jj ^y pi^An dm batang
two trees, ^L^ j;»\^ ^^r^ sa^batang a piece of timber, yU^ ^JJ:' gigt so*
batu one tooth, iLj cl^ JApapan tiga bilah three plank, ^fj y ^
pedang dm bilah or ^ y dOa keping two swords, ^iC ^^J kartas
sa-kepmg or JlI» M-/ei a sheet or leaf of paper, jy iiyL Si lada sa-puluh
btttir %^n ^(^kis of pepper^ J^j^ \^ g^^ sa^Ochuk one elephant's
tooth, (jjf^y:> {^l^ snajHtng dua puchuk two musquets, j>-^ ^r'
sural sapfiichuk a note, ^^1^ u:^ piikat sa-^rawan one fishing net, cl^I^
4:f\L» ^ato sa-pitah one word ; with several more of these idiomatic ap-
.pendages to the numerals, whose proper application can only be learned
by much practice in the langus^e.
In npuns borrowed from the Arabic the plural is generally formed as
in Malayan wordbi without attention to the mode followed in the lan-
guage to which they belong; but on the other hand, the Arabic word
ZJU malaikat ac^^, is indifferently uaedin singular or plural, or moce
commonly in the former.
Oases being understood to signify those changes in the termination of
nouns by which they decline from the nominative or casus rectus, and
become
Digitized by
Google
at A GRAMMAR OF THIS
become dblique, do not apply to the Malayan, in whick no aqch declen-
sion takes place. In this language^ as in Ei^lish, die modificationff of
the sense are effected by means of prepositions or (as they do not neces-
sarily pf^oede) direcUV€#, the noon itself continuing unchained, as 4X
Myj ka-padd rumah to a houte, <^jj ^ j deri-pada rumdii from a hdUse,
i^^j J de rumah at a hoi^ise, ^j^j^ ^ de-luar rumah out of a hoose, fjJ^o
i^jj de-atas rumah on tpp of a house, u^ i^U j de^awdh rumdh beneath
A house ; so also ^ akan^ d^ Imgh. or iiUt jJK ka^pada 4dlak unto God,
S-^^ Jj^ jj;j deri-pada mudal wnba from ihy capital, jJj ^^ 4j) lUUi
karufiiya baginda by his majesty's iavour, ^ ^j? ^<5 darigaJi tibng
naln with the aid of the prophet, ^^Ib ^^ id£ p&dd siang art at day-
break or by day-light ; none of which phrases can, without an abuse of
speech, be denominated the cases of those nouns*
In the situation of a subjective or accusative ease, or where thi lioiui
is the subject of the action, no directive is required, as U^ wult pMmg
^ light the foe, ^ ^jS poiong kayu cut the wood, c>f JJ)^ m€4an^
kan kida to gallop a horse. Yet ^ aklan is sometimes superfiuttody
introduced, as uu»1 ^^ J^ J^jS piikul akan anjing tiu beat thai dog.
The possessive sense, or what is termed the genitive case of a noun, ii
expressed by its position, the word denoting the rabject of possession
always precedii% that which deidotes the possessor, as ^|^ jcJ kenda raja
the kmg's treasure, i^jt^ ^^j^^ chaya mata-^ri briglrtness of the sun,
or the sun's brightness, y^ ^^^^Jld korth^gt-an gunong the l^fat of the
mountains, \ji ^^J kurus^an aufd leanness of the body ; or otherwise
by the use of a pronoun in the possessive form, as ct^ ^ u^vUi amba
punia wang my money, ti\j \i)yU\ d/t aku ampunia tBndh my land, ^jt
c:^ ^y ^j^ orang chSna punia arta goods of or belonging to a Chinese.
It
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 35
It may be remarked, that this htter mode k chiefly (though not exekb-
shrely) employed where real possession or property in the subject is
imderstood, whereas the mode by position is more conunonly used to
imply attribution only, as in the former examples.
The only qhai^es to which the form of nom» is subject are those
which they undergo as deriratives, and upon the correct empbyment of
these modtficati<ms depend the propriety and delicacy of lai^uagt, or
those qualities which, atf much as the choice of temis^ distinguish a polite
fitmi a vulgar style. Derirative nouns are constructed by means of
particles prefixed or annexed, from primitive nouns (although rarely),
from adjectives, and from verbs chiefly, and, in a few instances, from
other parte of speeph ; as in Ladn <« akitudo** is formed fixun << altus,"
and " permutatio " from « muto/*
From adjedjyes they are formed by prefixfa^ the particle c^ka^ and
amietxmg d>e particle ^J ^ath or by the latter alone. Thus from «jj^
rendgft low, comes ^Ij^ ia-rendah^an or ^IjJ; rendahHtn fewness,
humility; from^ biidr great, ^^^L^ ia^besar^^n greatneps; from ca^
moff dead^ Jl^ kiĔ^matl^andcastbi from ^dU salah wroai^ . ^tJ ka^
salah-ati criminality; and from ^jA^ manii sweet, ^jm^ numu^ĕtn
sweetmeat», and ^^j^.^ ka-^fnoms^n sweetness» So also fitm verbs, as
from iA^ nanti to wait, ^^.^xi ia-nantuan expectation ; froon ^jt lAr
to.mn, ^Ji ka^lari^an flight; from J6\ itCgin to desire, ^^^JU^ kiHtigin^
an lusts;, from c^ bhagi to divide, ^^^ bhagp-an division ; and from
^ makan to eat, ^\C« makan^n victuals. But exclusively of these
derivations taking cJka-^ and ^ •an^ which are in general what gram»
marians tertn abstract nouns, a numerous class is in like manaer formed
K from
Digitized by
Google
34
A GRAMMAR OF THE
from verbs by prefixing the particles^ per, with its varieties JS pel and
i^pe, and ^ pen, with its varieties J pern and ^ pen^^; being by these
changes of termination adapted to the sound of the letter with which the
succeeding syllable commences. Thus from jSJ tidor and jj] adu to
deep, repose, are formed ^^^J per-tidor-^m and ^^yy pcr-^du^an a
sleeping place, recess for a bed ; from ^jc^ mandl to batlie, ^jcmo^
per-mandl-an a bath ; ""from csjy buat to do, ^tjjy per-budi-an work,
performance; from^< j/^r to learn, ^^U-Ji pel-ajar-an a school; from
y^^ 5fa*ii/K to order, send, )ijjyJi pe^ruh an envoy, messenger ; and from
^ bili to iMjy, j^)Llo* p^-*«Vwin or ^^^lU pe-bilp^Ln a market-place» and
^JLl^j pem^iluan the article purchased.
So also from ^//^ churi to steal, is formed \^jjfi perirchuri a thief;
from 4}j> ^no/t to kill, «O^ pem^bunoh a murderer ; from Jo layer io
pay, jj[L«3 peni'^ayer payment ; from ^^ chuchuk to (Herce, j;»-^
penrchuchuk a fork, skewer ; from us^b dapat to obtain, l^^joS /^m^
dapat i^prehension, and ^\$aJ penrdapdt^n acquisition; from uu4^\
Uia to follow, c:.^,.Jj prng-ikut a follower ; from^j^ iZArir to carve, j^^
peng<Mr a carver or ei^raver; from ^j ofo/t to nurse, «uU» perig-aiok
a nurse ; from JlSf £»5/? to dig, ^jUii peng-gall a spade ; from c-^ /wi
to see, ^yA* peng-lHt-an sight ; and from jjbU *a5 to know, ^yfJo peng^
a-^/OfW^Ti knowledge.
It may be remarked, ^that the derivative nouns formed with J per^ J»
pel^ uJpe, express for the most part the place of the action implied by
the primitive verb, or the action itself; and that those formed with ^
paip J pern, ^ peng, express the agent by whom the action is per-
formed, the instrument, or the faculty ; the former partaking of a neuter
or
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 85
or of a passive, and the latter of an active sigfiification. Their corres^
pondence with the intransitive and' transitive signs of the verb, jj ber and
^ men^ will appear in treating' of that part of speech.
In the examples that have been given of the formation, 6f derivatives^
it has been effected by simply prefixing or annexing the particles, without
any other variation than that of the relative length of the vowels {oa
principles to be hereafter explained] ; but there are circumstimces under
which an entire change takes place m the first syUable, in order, as it
would seem, to retider the coalescence with the particle more agreeable
to the ear, as from ^l; tqjam sharp, is formed ^U penajam (instead
of penrtajam) an instrument for sharpenmg ; from jp tawar to cure,
j^penawar {not pen-tawar) an antidote or charm; from ^^^ samun to
rob, ^Ui peniamun a robber ; from txJL» sangat to sting, ^jlJ^ peniangat
a sting ; from yL sapii to sweep, yU ptniapu a sweeper ; from ajU
padam to. extinguish, ajUj pemadam an extinguisher ; from cjcj .pan'
dang to behdkl, cjcmm pemandang a view ; from Jj^ kanal to call to
mind, JJu penganal recognition ; from J^\^ kawal to guard, J^UJ periga^
wal a watchman or guard ; and from ^ pegang to hold, ^l3US /7^«*
megang'^in a holding, tenure. This adaptation of the particle being
equally attended to in the inflexions of the verbs, the paiticular rules by
which they are governed will be more conveniently explained when these
are treated of ; and it remains only to observe, that verbal nouns are also
sometimes (though very rarely) f(»rmed by prefixing the particle ^ $e
(more usually employed in the ccmstruction of adverbs], as i\i^ se^tau
knowledge, privity, in the phrase ^.^..^AJb i^;^^^ oU tiada darigan se^tau
amba it is not with my knowledge.
Derivative nouns may in like manner be deduced from {»imitive
Digitized by
Google
S6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
nounsy or from words in any other parts of speech, as from u^^a amba
a servant, ^,*U«j* p^-^tmba^n servitude; from uJly tdpa secluskn^ pe-
nance, lJ\jJ pcr-iapa a hermit, recluse ; from jU;1 antara between, ^Jj^
pd-aniardn a hkli, passage. It may, however, be more correct to con-
sider these as deriving immediately from the verbs u^^ ber-amba to
serve, %J^}j per-tapa to perform penance, and Jsi\j ber^antara to lie
between. Fractional numbers are also derivative nouns, asu^^j^er-
ampat a fourth part, cJ^Ji^ sa^per^tiga one third, ^ 4^^ ttga per-Gma
three fifths ; but beside these We meet with some derivatives from numerals,
expressing tides of command and office, as {j^iS/i pertg^ralus a centurion,
from ^]j ratus an hundred, and ^^ peng-Rma or pan^Uma a go-
vernor, prefect, from ^ Rnm five : but the origin of the appellation is
uncertain.
LasUy, derivatives may be formed progressively Irom other derivatives,
in a mode that will appear intricate to those who begin to study Uie
language, or who are accustomed only to the ordinary colloquial dialect
but which is not devoid of method and Consistency, as may be ieen in
the word ^U sama alike, same, which becomes by duplication the adverb
r>U tama^sama together, from whence is formed the verb f ^U^ bcr^
sama-sama to act in concert, and by annexing a particle, the derivative
noun ^*U-*«L^ ber^samasama^n confederacy, concert. Thus also in
the sentence, ^^\JSj> fH d\j ^^^Asi^J! f^^ o\J tiada kami ber-ka-limpah^tn
tiada kami ber^ka-karang-an we are not in a state of abounding, nor are
we in a state of poverty, where the two derivathres progressively fOTmcd
firom the verbs ^ limpah and t.j^ korang^ become verbal nouns in one
stage, and finally verbs again. So likewise "^Xii pinggang iht waist
may become ^!Xm^ ^'^per-pttiggang^n^Tua what is wt)m about her
waist;
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. ^
waist ; aAd jj i^ two, wMch by the application of cJia becoiMs j^
kArdiia both, and then' by |nrefiktng ^ ie becomes jiLm se-ka^ud botU
together, may^ by anAe»ng tho tralnntive particle ^ kan^ become the
rerb ^y^tL^ se-^a^dua-kan to da a ihmg by mutukl agreeihent It Hiay
here Ifkewise be noticed that derivatives, although in their full st^te of
formation they generally remain fixed to their proper class, yet some-
times we find them, by a licence hot very justifiable, transferred from one
|nurt of speech to anMher, a^ in the insttaxie of ^*UJU ^b k^L i^^ «j^
long atnat sayang dan mengastafki who id very tfiercHiil and compass
sionate, where the last word is properly a verb fonated from the noifn
^^(^ kasth-^Tt pity, but here ezdpAoyed as an adj^tivef. . Tlmsi sdsb the
transitive yerb ^^^^ mejudantang to lay upon the bfick, is imed in the
sense of re^upkiuii, ^^ ly^ ^^ ^^ 1^^^ «" ^^ ^y^ menujUf properly
** to point to," becomes the adverb ^ towards/'
Adjectives.
Adjectives or words denoting the qualities of nouns, and which may
therefore be termed qualitives, are xiol (any more than the noons) sub*
ject to variation of case, g^der, or number. That which they undergo
IB the formation of derivative or abstract nouns expressive of quality,
has be^ already explained; They are connected with the noun by
position only, and in simple construction always follow il, as iSy j^
kuda putih a white horse, ^\j ^Ja drl raya a festival day» ^Iki JH
kapal tinggt a lofty ship ; but when a quality is predicated of a noun,
or in other words, when in the corresponding English phrase the verb
substantive intervenes, the qualitive is in the Malayui made to precede -
the nouuj although the verb is not necessarily expressed, as y;^t eut j;^(i
L bath
Digitized by
Google
38 A GRAMMAR OF THE
batk orang ttu that man is good, ^j j>/ AJy putih kuda raja the king's
horse is i^faite, k,,,^..Aib ^^ jJ kechil rumah amha my house is small.
They may be formed from nouns by prefiudng the particle j ber, as
^yj ber-bulu feathered, from jljj bulu feathers, ^^sij ber^udl wise, from
4^jj btidi wisdom.
Comparison of Adjectives.
The comparison of adjectives or expression of the relative degrees of
quality, is effected by words and particles prefixed, and not by any
change of termination.
The comparative degree is formed by means of the words ^ kbUi
more, andji> dcri or^ jj^j deri-pada than, or by either of them separately,
as JjW jj ^jJ^ aJ lebih panas deri daubi hotter than formerly ; ^U U
J^ djj^ lebih mdnis derufada gula sweeter than sugar ; jj ^jU ^Jju
\j^ tinggi aluwan deri korong the stem is higher than the stem ; AJ]
^ jj;j ^j^ in>lah suchi deri-pada lain this is cleaner than tlie other.
The superlative degree, by prefixing the intensitive particle j ter, as
j^J ter^besdr very great, ^lj^ ter^kwasa very or most powerful, ^S^
ier4qfu very swift ; or by an adverb to which that particle is applied, as
Jijter-lalu or gy iJp ter^lebih tnah extremely old, j;S2^ J»^ ter^lalu
guppok excessively fat ; land these expressions are sometimes enforced
by adding the words ^ man indeed, JIC sakaH entirely, or u:^1 amat
exceedingly, as ^ j^l Jij ter-^ldlu bmk man extremely good indeed,
JIC-^ Uy ter-lebih besdr sakaHj or ^ c-^l Jij ter-lalu amat besdr
most exceedingly great ; or the latter may be used without the fprmer
adverb, as JIL. ^Jy putih sakali perfectly white ; and when the definite
article is prefixed, an absolute expression of the superlative is formed,
as
Digitized by
Google
MAJ.AYAN LANGUAGE. ^9
as JIC jA»' ^ tang baik sakali the best, JL» ^j^ ^, untg buruk sakali
the worst. The inseparable term l^ mahd ,h also applied with the
same effect, as 1^ \f« maha-multd most magnificent ; Jbu \^ ^ utng
mdha-tinggi the most high.; and a kind of indefimie superlative is pro-
duced by doubling the adjective, as Xs^jauh-jauh very far, X^\j ramu
rami very populous, fcjlj niaritig^niaring very shrill, Uj^ merah'
merak rery red. '
In strictness, howevc^r, the most part of the foregoing examples ought
rather to be considered as phrases or members of sentences, than as a
comparison of adjectives in the sense of the Greek and Latin grammarians,
whose object was to distinguish and to account for certain changes in ^
the form of the words themselves, denotii^ the degree of their aualky,
and not to shew how a comparisoa of ideas might be expressed by a
chncumlocuticm.
Numerals have usually been classed under the adjective, with which
they have many circumstances in common, but their nature is sufficiently
peculiar to entitle them to be considered as a separate part of speech.
They are distinguished into can&tals, ordinals, and fractionals/^
The cardinal numbers are as follows : c^ suatu^ lzJl» satUj ^\ dsa,
U sa one; jj dOa two; cJ^^ ttga three; u^l ampat four; A lima
five ; Jl anam six ;. -i^^i tujuh seven ; ^j delapan^ ^jj dulapan, and
^J!L> salapan eight ; Jumi^^ sambtlan nine ; AyL» sa-puluh ten ; ^jj^ sa--
bias eleven ; ^^y dua^blas twelve ; ^ cJ^ tiga^las thirteen ; ^ly jj
dua-puluh twenty; cj\j^ A^ y dua-puluh suatu twenty-one; ^y i^Jj
tiga-piiluh thirty; Ay ^ llma-puluh fStf \ ^\j^ sa-ratus one hundred;
^ Digitized by VjOOQ IC
46 A GRAMMAR or THE
-pV^y diOrraiM two hundred; w--^yM» sa-rtbu one thousand; ^jjL» sd^
laksa ten thousand; ^ ^^ sa^^luh laksa one hundred thousand;
(^^^ sa-juta or ^ tHir* *^*^^^w ^^^^ * million. In borrowhig thfc
word ^^ /aisn from the Sansli^it (he Malays have, tery arbitrarily,
changed its signifioadon from an hundred thousand to ten thousand;
which often ^ves rise lo misunderstandingci in their transactions with
merchants from the continent of India. In some Malayan countries, but
not uniyersally, the term /J Bknr is applied to the ncbveration? between
twenty and thirty, in the satme manner ta yJb Unto that Between teft
and twenty, itfid thus instead of o^j^ at/ ^ diik pnluh main tweMy-dnd,
they say /JL sa-Rkur^ for twenty-two J^yi dm^Rkut^ for twenty-three
J4 C4y RgOrRhir ; aiid ^eeably to this we find the date of aii epistle
given in /ac simile by Valehtyii (VoL 1. p. 121.) thus exptlsssedj (iSj^
cA* Jy jj ^l^ J J H^j-» ^^ J!r^ Jjt (^j^J^ deri-pdda sa-likur an
bulan satcal taun sa-ribu dan sa^-ratus dua-puluh satu on the twenty*
first day of the month sawdl in the ye^ (of the hefrah) 1121 [A* D.
The numbers mid-way between each ten are expressed, especialiy ih
conversation, in a peculiar ipaimer, as, for twenty-five, they familiarly way
^jf lJ^^ tangah tigu pulufh or, literally, half of thirty ; for foi^-five,
^y (4 ^ t^^^g^h, lima pulnh half of fifty ; and upon the same principle,
for one hundred and fifty, ^\jy^ 4k tmCgak dm rdtus, KteraHy, half ot
two hundred, that is, of the second hundr^. Thus also for two and an
half, they say cl^ ^ tati^ah ttga half of three, and (or three and aa
half, duJUt tt3 tangah Hflipat half of four; Nitie is ofttA expressed by a
phrase implying the deduction of one from the next following ten, as fo^
saty'4iine they say ^y ^jj y^ ^Jf kdrung asd H^uh pHluh wanting oni
of
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. ^t
of seventy; for nincty-nine, ^\j^ ^\ \j^ korang asa ta-ratus wanting
one of an hundred, or, an hundred less oile.
It may be observed, that a contraction- of the numeral of unity becomes
' the indefimte article, as tiMC ĕo-kata a word, or, oiie ^cmJ, \jy^ s^drang
a man, oi;, one man. The same takes plabe m most <>ther languages.
The ordinal numbers are as follows: J^ pertamĕ (for the Sanskrit
pratania)^ ot JsJ^^^umg jwrf^m^* the first, in^primis; y^ ka-duM the
second ; vl4^ ka-^iiga the third; csJUi hi-anipat the fourth ; J^ kg^^
Uma the fifth; ^^ ka^sa-pUlnh the tenth ; ^y^ kct-dua-blas the
twelfth ; yi ^y cl^ ka^tiga puiuk dm the thirty-second ; ^^1^ ij>^j£ kd^
tujuh ratus the seven hundredth.
Fracticms of nnmberB, which have already been noticed in speaking of
derivative nouns, ar^ thus expressed t iik*^ sa^tangah ' 9Xk half; cl^jL^^
fa-per^ttga a third; kaJ^^J^ ta^a^^ampdt a fourth ; JyL sa^per^ltma a
fifth; uL^-Jji jf> dua per-iJga two-thirds; cui^y cJ^ tlga per^ampat
three-foorlhs ; J^J caJUt ampit per-Rma four^fifths ; jj ilb tari^ah diia
006 and an half, as before explained. Of multiples and divisionals '
examplei^^reas^ follows : ^jjfi cJiJ (iga lapis three fold, triple, triplex;
oJTu^ iigaganda three-fold, treble, triplus; ^^ lima lapis iye-fold,
quincuplex ; jcs? U Itnta ganda five-fold, qbintuplex ; jU ^JUt JtJ 4!^
cr^ y> tJg^ k^li ampat jadi dm-blas three times four makes twelve ;
CJt^ c/l^ bhagittga divide into three parts; C^ ^Cl^ \y,^ tj^ji.^^
cs^U jj J5ju CSt^ fji\i ^J^ J^ se-telah ber-himpun buang tiga-tigajeka
tinggal asa baik jeka tinggal dua jahal having added together (these
numbers) cast away the threes (divide by three); if one remains it* is
lucky, if the remainder be two it is unlucky.
The foregoing system of numeration, evidently founded upon that of
M the
Digitized by
Google
4? A GRAMMAR OF THE
die Hindiis, from whom the Arabiaas, and through them ihe Europeans
derived then- knowledge of arithmetic, must have been familiar to the
Malays, and incorporated with their language long before the introduc-
tion of the Arabic character, and accprdmgLy they have not adopted t^e
practice of inverting the order of numeraticm and proceeding from the
units to the decimals and hundreds, as the Arabians usually dowhen
they express a date or other number in words at length. The cipbess
or figures employed in their more formal :Writing9 are those of the latter
people, viz. 1 i, X 2, T 3, P 4i o and ^ 5, 1 6, v 7, A 8, V9, ♦6,
!♦ 10, tl 11, ir 12, r* 20, !♦♦ 100, 4jW alt/ 1000: but in their
ejHstles and ordinary transactions they more commonly employ the nu-
merical figures which, although* of Hindu origin and not materially
changed in fcnm, we now consider as European.
y No instances haying occurred of the Malays employing as numerals
the letters of the alphabet arranged in a particular series, well known to
AraUc scholars, and as such to the Malays themselves, under the name
of «XcfTl abjd or abjidi it seems unnecessary to enter further into the de-
tails of it in this place than merely to state that 1, c^, ^ j, *^j,j, -.,'t,
represent the units, ^^, C^ J, (%, ^^ ^^ ^ ,«.J, ^ the decimals, j, y^
i£j^ O9 ^1 J| ^, 1^1 the hundreds, and c a thousand.
Of Pronouns.
Pronouns may be divided into personal, demonstrative, and relative.
]^ersonals are those substitutes for names by which the person who
speaks of himself, the person spoken to, and the person or thing spoken
of are designated without a repetition of tht name. When aj^lied to
inanimate.
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN. LANGUAGE. 43
inanimate things, though considered as of the third person, they faU
more apdy, in this language, into the class of demonstratives.
To the perscmals belong the possemve pronouns, which are not dis-
tinct words, but produced, as the possessive form of nouns, either by
annexing the term ^y punia own, to the pronoun, or, more usually, by
the respective position of the words, as explained in treating of the
noun.
Amongst the personal pronouns some are found to prevail more in
one, and some in another of the vaiious countries where' the Malayan
language is spoken. Those belon^g more particularly to the politer
style, which is also that of books, are fixed and uniform, whilst on the
contrary, those employed in the bazars^ are often local, and consequently
little known beyond their own district. The following enumeration con-
tarns the whole that occur in the best writings, or are recognised in. the
dialects of the different islands.
Pronouns of the First Person.
ijj\ aku or (when connected with another word) c^ku^ I, me, we, us»
:q>pears to be the simplest term by which the first personal ^ ejqpresscc^
and is generally employed by superiors addressii^ their infedors, but
sometimes between equals, and in certain cases by inferiors, as ijy$'cJ\
aku suruh I order, clj^ ^y^ menurut tttah-ku to f(dlow my direc-
tions, 4,fAJ^ ^ CS^f tuhan-ku tang kursaritbah my Lord whom I s^nre.
When thus contracted to c/ it is made to coalesce with and form a part
of the verb or .noun with which it ^rees in constructic», and especiaUy
in the possessive form, las in the preceding example. It is sometimcg»
but rarely, used as a plural, and only where anotbo* word cgoveyiog
the
.Digitized by
Google
44. A GRAMMAR OF THE
the idea of plurality is joined with it, as jj^ cJ\ aku ka-dua we two, both
of us, ^j^ {jj\ aku sakati^n all of us. When thia personal follows a
vowel Qr nasal sounds it is oden changed to cJU\ in order to avoid the
hiatus, as cilj ^ akm daku to me, cA> «^j^ fnenur^gu-t daku to.
attend upon me.
c^«^4jk amba I, me* This word properly signifies a servant,, and when
employed as a pronoun should in strictness be considered as of the third
person, but use has determined it to the first, as c^W (u.^4Jb amba kata I
say, cL);jj («^^^ amba turut I follow. In its original .s^nse it might be.
' natural-^ to say, in a style of humility, it» ^^^ amba-mu iau thy servant
knoweth, or ^^^ «ji sji kasih pada amba-mu give to thy ^ervaiA; which .
phrases are equivalent to I know, give to me, and being from their fami*
liarity liaUe to abbreviation, it may have become the practice to drop
the possessive, and to say more briefly amba tau^ kasih pada ambd.
Thus, as in many other instances, the different parts of speech usvTrp
each other's places, and as pronouns are defined to be substitutes for
nouns, so this and some similar nouhs become substitutes for pronouns.
(£^ beta. What has been said of L^ amba applies also to this
word, which equally signifies a diHnestic Servant, as J^ j cu^ tiy^ «^ wch
bunbh beta daulu alas, kill me first!
kj^ ^ya, signifying a slave, implies, when used as a pronoun, more
humDity than the preceding; but as language, and .particularly thelan-
guage of compliment^ is not always to be construed literally, we must
not understand that the person who employs the term necessarily regards
himself as the slave, or even as the inferior of him to whom he addresses
himself, but only that it is his intention, by an affectation of humility^
to 8h$w hii politeness ; and accordingly we find it much used by Malays
of
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 45
of rank, in conversation with the superior class of Europeans; as ^^
jJy uu.^:^ iaya minta tolong I request assistance.
C^^'pitek seems to express still more hUmility than ^J<^ saya^ and
is little used in ordinary conversation, as jjflS ^jj^^^^S jf^j u^ty l ta
ttton^ku darigar^kan api-hh khabar-nia palek O, niy lord, give ear I
pray thee to the story of thy slave !
Ij^ gm appears as a pronoun of the first person in. some vocabularies
published at Batavia, and may have been borrowed from the Chinese;
but it is viilgar, and does not occur in any good Malayan writings.
uu^ Hto we, us. This personal plural is used for the singular by
^royal personages. When employed by others it frequtody includes in
its signification, along with the speaker, the person addressed^ and cannot
therefcNre imply any circumstance of supenority or inSnriority, as cs^
aU^mi.c^ ktia.pergi sama-sama we go together, ^y ct^ kita^nia
ours. When a greater number than two is meant to be expressed, it is
usual to annex the t^rm cj^l ermig perscm, and to form the compound
word \jy^ ktfdrang by the eUsbn of one of the vowds ; but it chiefly
belongs to the familiar style.
^JC kanti w«, us, on the contnoy, excludes the party addressed, but,
like u^ kitUp is ofte& employed for the singular in the style <yf • sove^
reigns, as ^U jU ^\^ iami ttada mm we (or I) do not chuse, .^^JL^
^Jl^ kthbesdr^n kami our greatness ; it is not, however, confined to \this
tone of superiority, and the phrases y^ 1^^ ^^ katnipinta totangyrt
beg assistance, and even ^J\» ^ ^JJi kami hina papa w;e ar6 mean and
poor, are not nnccnnmon. When, in order to express several persons^
the word ^^^1 orang is amiexied, no elision takes [^ce, both because the
final vowel is long, and in order to distingmsb the compound trocpL V;j-J^
N karrCorang
Digitized by
Google
•
i& A GRAMMAR OF THE
iam^arang Sot iSmu^rang ye ; at ^t ^j< ^^^JiLi ^jl ^<*K kanii-orang
sakaiMm orang achch yre nre all of i» men of Acliiou
Profumns of the Second Person.
/^\ adgkau^ or, by contractioiH ^ kdu tbou, thee» you» ye, appetrs to
be indifferently used both in the singular and the ptural» by superiors and
krferiors, as in the fcJlowing examples : J\y •>£ jS^I A:!^ kambuti-lak
mgkau ka^padM tuan^-nw return thou to thy master; ^ sia^ takut^kah
Mngkau art thou afraid f ^^^^ jli^\ C^y ^U id-ta& tuhan-ku
migkaurlah tang mmg^04mH O, my LonI, tboii art He who kooweth
(all thii^) ; j\ iL^^ jJj^y \jAL» ^jixc ^ hei mantri utkaU-an
tSruUlak aif^kmt katSJm mi O menbefis of my CQonoil, be ye obedient
to these my wotds2 When sdbbreriaied to ji kau it is genersiUy employed
ia> a tone of oirerweeiiing wthority» approaohing to contempt, aa %Jfi
Ij/^ apa kfm-X^ang what dost thou want? Jjj^ J^ ti3da kau-kanat
art thpo not aware 9 ^ J^ md^bth fym die thou t
jjj4> dikms you, thee, appeavs to be oidy a modifio^ion of jU) ai^kau^
kk order to accommodate it to the sound of the prece<&^ vowel or nasal
and avoid a hiatus, as ^^ JU^ derumana dUeu from whence (art)
^Mmt?. j(ji) ^ ^js!^ «i^^r^ <^Hi^ ^^/ v^ J'Atf kMuMiĕi bagUu $^
^ud^a iUrbunfih akan, dikm if thd» doest ao^ I shall fertaiudy put
A» to.deftth: m mhkb imtaix:fis the words mana krSgkoiu mAakitrp
imigAm Wft«M4 he impk9sati(j9 ^s ear of a natfarea It is nfver (pr, i£
mfVf wider ^lery peeullw oirewwtaaces only) employed as the agent or
pamimfitr €9m t» the Ycrh, hut is the object or ssbj/ect oT the aolioi%
aad gfiMiiU^ folks^a a pnpoeHic»w . This would seem to entitle it tĕ
iM^CPOnckl^ ]«>G»tt of the prtisoun/flj angbmy were there not a
more
Digitized by
Google
J» AtAYAN JLAMGUAGIL 4;
cioie consistent mode complaining wky it it £buad in tUe htter sitpatioh
al^nei which i» tUs ; that in the.pkice of a tuiminative preceding th<
v:erb| as w^U as the oth^r, pturts d£ the sentence iminedbEfeety connected
with it, the occasion would not exist lor ^y qubttfication of Qth or^fbal
IHTomMin, beciAise no hiatus could b^ thei^ apprehended. **
' jX kitrntif A mu thdUy ybu^ diee, are used l>y t^ superior^ addk^sing
the inferior, as ^^ ^j ^'>j? jV« iJI^ jIj tiada k^t fikM ber^nO-an
dorian kamu we do not chuse to make peace with you ; ^^^JiU a1^ ^ hei
kamu sakaH'on ho! all ye I When abbreviated to m mu it is, as well
9A the contaractioiBis of cA dku mndJiM^^tifikau^ piidBxed or annexe to
the verb, of tOt thc^ noun tu a ppssessire)' m the' naaner of a^ iimparaUe
Jparticle, as CS^ ^jt j^V ^%^ uHf^viu iting-^hu psy thou my debt;
C/U^ b0pa^k% my lather ; ^U^ wjUi $iafari^34HU wjib is. your king?
Whei» it| i^uial ii^ibnaed by the «dditkaa of ^jl^ ' ^hich coallesces with
it^ a B(ill ^«ater diitincticHei* is 'marked between the par'tiesi a^ ^U
^^j^ j^ Iji-^^ jSrtgan kanCoranff gar&k denrsim stir not yie frtttk
iience.
^ tium% vhicb properly ttgnifos ^^ master," is employed as a pnv
noun personal in addresses fran ndEeriors, and, politely, amonj^st equals^
Jb form it appears to be a substitute for the thiid personal, but is efieo»
^Tely used for the second, as c^^ Jjoi^ ^y ^JjH ka^nme tOdn dndak
fcrgi whither do you meauf to go ? uX* ^y '^i^f tmn ^ma suka as yod
pleai^ JK^J^^^ US apa tuan maii makOn what A> you chiM^ to eat ?
In all yfhkh instances it is evident that the possessive Was iniginally
understood to accompany the wxcdttkn^ and that the phrase .#as ^
L^,^.^ tmnamba or CSi\^ tuin^ku varf master oriny lordl . By & wigu*
lar delicacy of langu^e^ this word when applied to the jDivloiity and
signifying
Digitized by
Google
48 A GRAMMAR OF THE
signifying The Lord, is invariably written with the aspirate ^y tuhan^
to distinguish it from, the ..more familiar appellation, as ^^JLi jj>^ ^J
tuhan serwa sakatt^^m the Lord of all hosts, 411 \^ ^jby cU tidda tuhait
bania allah there is no Lord but God.
j^ pakanira^ y^ju» ) lu$ thou, you, ye, are words to be met with as
pronouns in some European vocabularies, but they are provincial and
vulgar, and not to be found in good Malayan writings.
Prcnofuns of tJie Third Person.
^ iya he» she, him, her, it, has no positive character of superiority or
inferiority ; yet it is considered more respectful (as in other languages)
to designate the person spoken of^ as well as the peraon spoken to, by his
or her name, title, or other description, than by the use of a pronoun,
and instead of ite ^ iyU tau he knows, a well-bred native would say, ^j
tmn or. 2f\y ^^\^ *gjj1 orang kaya tau his honour knows. The word is also,
but not commonly, writtea «^1 inya»
In order to avoid the hiatus produced by gaccessive vowel sounds, and
collisions uniJeasaat to the ear, (as noticed in speaking of the pronoun
/ij dikau) ^ iya is frequendy changed to ^ diya, ^ c^} ^ ts-J
pifiia diya pergi ask him to go ; J\y ^ ^ J^ ka-mam iiya mau her-
layer whither is be goitig to sail ? .^.i J\ ^ ^ iya kanal akati diya
be recollects him. It may be observed, in reference to what has been
said cSjLi^ dikau (p. 46) that ^ diya, althoi^b generally, is not always
in the utuatipn of an objective or a subjective case, as in the last example
but -one, it forms the nommative to the verb jU rnaU ; and evidently takes
the place of ^ ^«^ on account of the vowel sound immediately preceding
in the word ^U jjMna,
As
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 49
As applied to inanimate things its use is not frequent, the itiore cus-
tomaiy form of expression requiring that the noun should be repeated
with the definite article ; yet it is by no means incorrect to say, when
ftpeaking of moveables, ^^j ^JJ^ mengaluar-kan diya to take them away.
In the possessive form of the noun, and also in the indefinite form of
the verb (preceded by the particle j de^ as will be hereafter explained)
this pronoun, being annexed to either word, undergoes an entire change
of letters, and instead of ^\ iya is written and pronounced ^ nia. - We
may conjecture from analogy that this was at first intended for ^Jl inya
(the'^ n being frequently interpolated, as ^aJ pontong for ^jS potong^
to improve the sound) and afterwards, for the sake of brevity, expressed
by a single character scarcely differing at all in sound from that pronoun,
as in ^^^ kapala-nia his head, \»^y^j rambut-nid her hair, ^y j de
pukul-nia . he struck, ^A,Ui^ j de minta-nia he asked.
Alth9ugh 4^^ iya and 4^j diya are sometimes employed in the plural, it
is more commonly expressed by annexing %jj\ orange as ^U^j uX-» %j^j^
dVorang suka ber-mStn they, or those persons, love to play, U^
yp \jy^,^ kasih dV orang pHlang allow them to return.
4i-^*c-Jj^ maink 'ttu or mankd ttu those persons, they, them, as ^^IL»
fiL\ Qjj^ i:j^J^ji *-^*<-^y* cr*^ sopaya janga?i marik 'ttu ber^ham-
pur dangan nrang vilUm in order that they may not mix with Mahome-
tans, cu^'u-^j^ J^ ^jj^ suriih4dh kambali marik 'ttu order them to
return. In sense it is nearly synonimous with ^j-^J dVorang^ but
much less common in conversation.
Personals, equally with nouns, of whose nature they so much partake,
assume the possessive form, by annexing the word ^^^ pUnia own, be-
longing to ; or otherwise by the position of the word betokening the
O subject
Digitized by
Google
50 A GRAMMAR OF THE
•ubject of property (explained at p. 32), as ^^ cS\ aku punia or
^^ amba punia mine, ^^j:^:^ ^^:^ beta sindiri punia my own, ^^ ^
angkau punia^ ^y ^^ kamu pUnia, ^A^^ ^y tOan punia thine, yours, ^
iya or ^^ ^^ diya punia his, her's, theirs ; CJ^^ pedang-ku my sword^
C;,.^ ^ tangan amba my hand, j»tuf mala-mu your eye, ^\ anak-kau
thy child, ^^ ^ bJni tHan your wife, ^^ mulut-nia her mouth, ^\CJ
pusaka^nia his inheritance.
Pronouns Demonstrative or Definitive^
This class may include not only demonstratives proper, but also the
definite articles, together with relatives and interrogatives, which, in thi»,
as in other languages, are for the most part the same words employed in
a relative or interrogative instead of a demonstrative sense. They are
enumerated as follows, ^ tang that which, those, who, whom, the ; as
c?dV ti ^^^S ^^^ '^^^ which is good, those who are good, ^yy ^j
tang de per-tuan he who govemeth, the sovereign, ^l^ ^ tang pertama
the first, ^b ^ ^y musim tang ddtang the approaching season, ^
i^jU ^A^yU\ tang ampUnia rumah the person to whom the house belongs.
The pronoun ^ nen seems to be only a vulgar substitute for ^^ tang*
u;^^ ttu that, those, the, as 4^:^^ tj^ orang ttu that man, izJ\ CS^ *>5
pada kattka ttu at that time, «^ u^^.^^ sebdb ttu on that account, ^JaXt
^^ Z^j ^^^'-'^'^ ^^^ ^'^ the king was sick.
^\ mi this, these, as ^\ Jy bUlan tni this month, ^y\ J\ y\ atau
tni atau lain either this or another, jjjj ^^1 j^b aLj! ini-lah balk ttn-lah
buruk tliis is good, that is bad.
%J\ apa what, which, as i^ «Jt ^/w? ttu what is that? «^'1 ^\ ulih
apa by what means ? ^^\ i-^ (;j- wraf iz/^n tni what writmg is this ?
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 51
uJL-» si-apa (being the preceding interrogative personified by means of
a particle commonly prefixed to proper names) ivho, whom, which, at
*U <-JL-» 5i-^ii man who chuses ? tJL-» ^ oA-^n ^/-5/wz to whom (rela-
tively as well as interrogatively), jp^ ^^ («JL- suapa punid budak or
«^Lrf Jpy W?^i{ ^i-a/wr whose servant?
J^ rkana^ is properly the adverb ** where,'.* but is used Idiomatically
to signify *' who, whdmi which, what,'* as ka^ ^J^ «.jI orang manattu
who is that man ? ^^U yj benua mSna what country ? ^U j^ iuda mma
which horse?
^^^j £ri self^ is commonly joined to pcraonai pronouns, and, ias in
English, partakes much pf the nature of a noun, as a\^ ^^^j (jj\0^jaga
diri kamu take care of thyself, ^a^j ^ ^ itiS^ ^Ji iya iudeh tikam
akan dirunia be has stabbed himself. When the perscmal precedes,
this definitive is changed to ^jfi^^^smdin or ^^ji^i kindlrt^ as ^^.^a
i^jijiJamba smdhi I myself, ^js:i ^y Hum kindirt thou thyself, ^^j
4^^ja$ i/lya kindiri he hin^lf. Soihetimes, however, it is employed,
but ratltfr quaindy, for the secmki personal, as cJi i^j^d 9mi\ apa dtri
kata what dost thou say ?
ij:^ b iya-ttu may be considisxed as a compound pronoun, but b only
employed to express the phrase of ^^ that is to say."
The definite article; being thus classed with the pronoun, it may be
proper to. oliserve, that the indefinite article ^ sa or 'L sa a, an, is no
other than a contraction of the numeral of unity (as in most European
languages) and has already been noticed as such.
^ ■ v^
. , Verbs.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
52 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Verbs.
The verb, in the same maiinet as the noun, may be distinguished into
primitive and derivative.
The primitive verb is, in its original signification, either transitive, as
J^jS pukul to strike, «.JCi? tangkap to catch; intransitive^ as J^jalan
to walk, ^ iidor to sleep ; or amlnguous, as jA ajar to teach or to learn,
^ ^figg^ ^o gu^d, keep, or to dwelt
The derivative verb is either the primitive determined to a transitive
or intransitive sense by the applicadon of particles, or it is a verb con-
stituted by means of those particles from other parts of speech, as nouns,
adjectives, and adverbs. In conversation the primitive verb is frequently
employed to express both the tranntive and intransitive setise, where a
more correct style would require the derivative, in order to avoul the
ambiguity of meaning to which verbs of that description are liable, as
in the instance of t^ tegga to stand, or to set up, where the latter sense
Would be more clearly expressed by the same verb in its derivative form,
tL< menegga.
The particles used to denote the transitive are either prefixed, or an«
nexed, or both.
The prefixed particles are ^ men^ ^ fneng^ ^ mf m, and ^ me,
being in fact varieties of one and the same particle modified accoxding
to the letter with which the primitive word begins, in order to render
the pronunciation more grateful to the ear..
The annexed particles are jf kan and ^ t. Examples of their aj^li-
cation in forming derivative verbs aie as follows.
^ men may precede words beginning with the letters - 7, ^ chj
and
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. ^
Afid ^ dj M iAmL meh-jdmu or ^y^si^ men^Jamu^n to treat, feg^
cmUU mm^fiobut to draw or pluck out, ^tJ^d^ fMft-didiA to hoil^
seethe, ^«/L#j^ mten^m^ian to pactfy. It kMEoetimeB also pneced^s
i£j /, as ii^mm^ttah to order, woJ^ men^tutup to shut ; hut verbt
begknung with this letter nore uiually undergo a chjiuge that will be
hereafter explained, and uJby titup would «u dbt derivatit^ form become
Uijy^ menitup.
^ meng is used before a Tdwd sound, an aspirate, and also the letter
41^ as ^jmJU meMg-ampun to pardon, j»^tt« meng^jar to teach, (^j^
fneng-utap to anoint, ^i^JU meng4ipMhxx> hire, ^jjtls^ mtng4but^an
to comfort» l;'^'^^!^ mtng-idup4 to brk^ to life, ^jJaIU meng^mfH^^
tan to cause to draw lugh, ^^/I^aJU meng^Mora^-kdn to put between,
%iterp(we, ^^^^^^ tnthg-hmila^kĔn to make readf, bring fotward,
j^U^ nung-hasH-Aan to collect produce, ^^^^iyJU*« miAg-g^mtt-kan
^ paw» ^JuSa* mtng*garuqh{ to complete* Whm the pirimitive begins
with 1 it or j^ A followed by a quiescent letter or what we term a long
Towel, those preriouk letters are suppressed, and the particle unites with
the l<»ig vowel, as from ^a^ iiat to bind, sa^^LSu meng-iAatj from ^U
habis to finish, ^\JU meng^bis\ the el»ion befeg commonly denoted
by the orthographical mark hamxah.
. * ^ mem precedes the letters 4^ b and «^ jp, as jK^ mtm-bSyer to
payi j^Lfi^-t- num-benasa-kan to deMroy» di^fj^ mim-bunoh (or 43^4^
memunoh) to )cill^ 4!^^ mem-pJUh to chuse, ^J^fU^ mem-putih^an (or
J^l?^ memutih'kan) to whiten, i^V^ mtm-pUniaH to af^opriate.
^ me precedes the letters j r^ J /^ |* ^ ^ »9 »d^ o^ as ^j^j^ me*
r»5J)t to spoil, J^jj^ me^n^^i^m to represent» poortray, ji^ me-UUor
to fling, cast, y^oil* mc4«nta$ to pass thimigh| J.^a^ me^mM^km to
P put
Digitized by
Google
^4 A GRAMMAR OF THE
put to death, ^jjU^ me-mabuk'i to inebriate, ^Gi^w nu^fumiukmt to
expect, ^jy me^arta^kan to report, publish* It also sometiiaes oc«
curs before the soft aspirate 2^ as^^uf« me-hantar to convey, J,^ me-liHa
to drag, and before a vowel, as jjkT ^JiL-# me-tlang^kan jcfak to deface ^
the track ; but ^ mm^ is the particle more Commonly employed in
this situation, with the omission of the aspirate.
It appears by the f<»iegoing that the simple application of the particles
is confined to certain initial letters, and it being necessary that the tran-
sitive sense should equally be given to words beginning with the other
letters of the alphabet, but which by collision with the particle would
produce that harshness of sound so carefully avoided by these people,
recourse is had to the expedient of modifying, in a peculiar manner, the
first syllable of the primitive, when commencii^ with one or other of
the letters iZJ t^ ^^ s^ lJ pt j kj or c^k^ and thereby adapting it to the
particle, which is also itself susceptible of the variety of terminaticm
already mentioned. It may be supposed that the observance of these
minute rules is not unattended with difliculty, but the learner will find it
DQore serious as matter of study than of practice, and that the latter will
be much facilitated by the smoothness of pronunciation resulting from
these changes.
. When the prunitive word to which the transitive partiqle is to be
prefixed begins with oj U the derivative is formed by omittii^ that
letter and making the final conscmant of the particle ^ men coalesce
with the following vowel sound : thua firom ^y tolang is formed VJL^
menolong to assist; from 4;:^^ tiirmt^ ^j^ memrut to follow; from
ijmJ umtu^ ijjr^ mcf{antu-kan to asoertsun; from ^(; tar^is^ Q^^
menangis^kan Xo bewail ; and when a reciprocity of action is meant t6
'- he
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE* i»
be exfureMed, the veri>^s repeated in the two forms^ as ^J^ y^ tohng
metiolong to ^ye mutual assistance, (^Jj^ ^jSSs tarigkis menangkis tĕ
parry each other's thrusts*
When the primitive begins with ^ x, that letter is changed to ^ nitf,
anid the particle ^ me is prefixed ; oi' it may be conudered that the ^ #
is dropped, and the ^ n of the particle ^ men changed to ^ nia : thus
from ^Ju^ sampei is formed IJU^ meniampei to cause to arrive ; from
j^ya iusu^ i^y^ meniusu4 to suckle ; from ^ senahg^ ^^ meniinang
to satisfy ; and from mj^^ tnram^ mj^ menyirant to besprinkle. This
modification of the particle sometimes takes place iik forming transitives
from words beginning with ^ and ^, as from ^as^^ jwtjmg ^JJii^Lĕ
mefiiunjang'kan to raise to the head, and from y^y>- ckuchi pure, ^jf^^
menmcht to purify ; but the mcxt correct inflexions would be ^jUaaoru
meu'junjong-kan and ^5^JfU menrcknchS*
. When the word be^s with Jjp^ that letter is chained to ^ m, and
the particle ^ me is prefixed, or the cJ /> is droj^ped, and the second ^
m of the particle ^ mem coalesces with the vowel, as from ^ palii \a
formed ^U« mcnialu to strike ; from ^ pegang^ \1^ mem^gang to
hold ; and from ^y piituSf ^j^y^ memiUus to break off*
' When the word begins with cJk^ that letter, in the formation of the
transitive, is dropped, and the particle ^ mer^ being prefixed, its final
letter coalesces with the vowel : thus from i^Ji kata is formed c^tiU
mef^aia to acquaint ; from jjl^ ka-luar^ jjU« merigaluar to take or put
out ; frcHu ^jJ^kiipaSj (^ji* mengupas to peel ; from ^jj^ ktpas^ ^ JA t
mengipas to fan or to winnow ; frcmi J;^ kanal to recollect, JJi perigamt^
as m the following sentence, ^J^ ^ JjB Jj \^^ ^j JJu J^ 4/jfJU
vungatoH^ dan meriganal dangm peiCgatau^an dan penganat tang
* iemparna
Digitized by
Google
5« A ORAMHAR OF THS
umpwuM to kuow and to f«iiie«ber with perTeCt knowledgle and vecat
The annexed particles ^ -kan and ^^ •? may be employed «kher ia
fOiyunctioD with the prefix to enTorce the tramkiTe aentei as &j» ^J^^
piefigumi-'kan pedang to uosbeath a svord, ^^p ^/Wm mm-idwtm^
l^an negn to ruin a conntxyi ^^ i^^J^f^ mtm*bharu4 kĕbun to re^ew
a pbintatian ; or, independently oi the prefix, to form a transitive verb^
as uJ\ jMt^yt^ BmbiU^n api blow the fire, ^ ^J^ itpas-kan kuda let
loose the horse, J^, ^^jj^ j de tantu^i-im bechara he ascertaiaed the
matb^i ^jjj ^j^ i> d€ lumw-Jaan-nia dinding he daubed the wall. It
may be d^xved, that the imperative finm does not admk of the prefix
(hough it does of the annexed particle, and that the infinitive seldom
dispenses with the former.
The particles, or modified partkkt ji bir^ J> M^ 4^ be, denotii^ the
intransitive sense, ate prefixied to the verb or word veibally employed,
yrithottt any aimexed particle, as^l^ btr-^ar or^^ bd^ar to learn,
^^U^ bfr-angfut to drift or float away, ^j bernliri to stand up, ^jj
^w&oH to keep sileiM^e, ^^j^j ber-sinyum to smile, ^jy^ ber-mrak
to shout, ^l»^ ber-parĕMg or ^lg^ be-iforang to go to war, g^jl be4an
to run away» fiJJsi/ be-rintik^rmtik to fall in drops. In most instances
l^e pavticlesy ber and «^ be may be indifferently employed, the fcormer
^ii^ joor^i usual in writbg, and the latter in conversaticm ; and it may
be observed that these two iptransitive prefi^s are much aMMne simple in
^leir application than the transitive, and coalesce with all the letters of
the alphabet. The other modification, J^ bel^ which seklom occurs,
precedes only a vowel sound, althou^ from analogy it might be ap-
posed to coalesce with i^ b also^ as in tb« foonatioo of derivative nouns ;
but
Digitized by
Google
but although (hey write C^\^ pet-hhagi division, the verb is C^l^ j
ber^kagi to become divided. Before J / it may admit of a doubt
%betbef the prefix be Jj Af/ or t-^^e, as the Malays avoid double letters
in writing, and rarely avail themselves of the orthographical mark ( "^
leskdidj by which the duplication of the J / might be expressed.
Although the foregoing distinction between the effects oif the transitivfe
ind intransitive particles, is founded upon the obvious tenor of the lan-
^age, yet many exception^ to the general rule occur, which it is prop^t
to notice.
Some veibs not strictly intransitive, inasmuch as they admit a strt)jedt
or accusative case, nevertheless assume the intransitive prefix, as ^]b
^Uajar to learn (a lesson), ^J^J^j ber^sinipatt to hive (money) in keep-
ing; yet as distinguished from the same primitives with the transitive
prefix, jJjio meng-ajar to teach^ '^J^^ menyimpan to put by, lay up,
they are considered in the light of intransitives. A few anomalies
iKmever, s^peaf^ which this explanation will not account fbt, as ^^
5,j-i bef-kirim surM to send a letter ; and when the particle J pir (which
^ill be particularly noticed hereafter] is introduced betweeh the ititran^^
Bttive prefix atid the verb^ the latter commonly admits the anne^^
transitive particle and expresses a transitive sense, as^ ^J^if^Ji ^^*
per*stimbah*kan kkabttr to communicate intelligence (to a superior) ; and
in like manner there are instances of the transitive particle being pre«
fixed, where the verb is notwithstanding employed inti-ansitively, as u^^
J^ amha meiig-artt I understand, ^J^ *U ^^j diya tau menari slid
knows how to dance, ^^L* jj\ anak mtnMgis the chttd cries, jlaio
^U men-jadi masftk to become ripe ; of which last verb the nature and
peculiiirities wiU appesir under the next head.
Q, Verbs
Digitized by
Google
58 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Verhs Substantive. »
The verbs denoting being and the progress of existence, called verba
substantive, are j\ ada to be, is, and J^jadi to become, wax ; answering
to the Latin sum and fio.
These verbs being in their nature intransitive, do not require the in-
transitive particle y ber (though they admit of being rendered transitive,
with a facility peculiar to this language, and then assume the usual pre*
fixed and annexed particles) as j;jb j^ ada baik is good ; jj\i Si ada
ba?iiak there are many ; <Ujj *>^ J^ o de-mdna ada rumah where is the
house ? u^^4jb jj liU ada-lah pada amba I have (there is to me) ; «J^
,^^ cJ^j J\ j^JlS bagi pdtek ada permdta sa-btji thy servant hath a
precious stone ; ^JjOcSj ^\ j\ ^i:>^J€kalau ada lya ber-kandaran if he has
a conveyance, ^\J^ cS^ ^b c:j>jL» seperti bdyangjuga add-nia it is like
a mere shadow.
When used without an adverb or modal, J\ ada does not appear to be
confined to the present nor any definite time, as f^ ^^ J^j 9jj— » S ada
sorang rdja benua djem there was a certain king of Persia, '^\ %j^^ ol
^<^J ada s'orang anak^mia perampuan he had one daughter, ^y ^y
JL*^ ^b JUL» jtc:^ ^^ ^U nona puMUg jdngan silsah dii ada sa-
Idmat ddtang kambdli your mistress is gone, do not be grieved ; she
will come back in safety, -^ ^^1 4^1 j jo^ andak ada it/a suchi he ought
to be clean, ^y^^Uo jjjj id ^Ji S ^djjcj^ andak-lah ada it/a lebih deri*
pada peni'bdyer utang^nia he ought to have more than sufficient to pay
his debts.
Employed as an auxiliary it is equivalent to a participle of the present
tense, as ^^ S %j^ orang ada mdkan the people are eating, j\ jj\Sjfi
^Jlcj k'dnak-dnak ada ber^main the childrea are playing, ot at play.
It
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 59
It is much more frequently understood than expressed, as ^l^ J^
bendr-lah bechara-mu your counsel is right.
When used in an active or transitive sense, it signifies to cause, give
existence to, or occasion to be, as jlU meng-dda or ^^ m^*^ me?ig-' ^
add'kan kwasd-nia to give existence or occasion to his power.
The other verb substantive jU. ^a^/, in its simple intransitive form,
signifies to become, to wax, as ^^l^ oU t^j diya jddi kdya he becomes
rich, ^^IS jU ^fij^ drt'pun jadi pdnas the day waxes hot.
In the transitive form its signification is nearly the same as that of
the precedii^ verb,. i;/z. to cause to become, to constitute, to create, but
is more commonly, employed, ^a ^j ^^jjsm men-jadi-ian rdja to con-
stitute a king, JU ^^Cjj^^ ^ ^y tuhan tang, men-jadi-kan dlam the
Lord who created the world, jhj^ ^^jd \Jjjb^s^ men-jadi-kan diri^nia
gariida transformed himself into a griflSn. Contrary, however, , to one
of the most consistent rules of the language, the transitive form of this
verb is often employed intransitively, as olact* mm-jddi (but never, with
both the' prefixed and the annexed particles, ^JlscLo men-jadukan) AJ\
islam to become a Mahometan, 25^ jl^ c/1 aku men-jddi tuah I am
growing old, ^^ jlacu ao- ^yi^J ^\ anak-nia perampuan sudak men"
jddi bunting his daughter has become pregnant, ^j ^a^^^jj^j de jadi^
kan-nia rdja he became a king. In the last example the irregularity is
the most striking.
Verbal nouns are formed in the usual manner from both of these
verbs, as J\S^ ka-add-an existence, ^o^ ka-jadi-^tn creation or pro-
duction ; and even in its primitive form, jl ada is sometimes ' made a
noun, as jU ^\^ Jijzj\ antdra ada dan lidda between existence and non-
existence, between is and is not
Distinctions
V -i
Digitized by
Google
:€o ^ A GRAMMAR OF THE •
Distinctions and Relations of the Verb.
The distinctions of active and passive voices, of mood and tense, apply
but imperfectly, and those of person and number not at all, to the
Malayan verb. In order, however, to conform as much as possible to
ideas rendered habitual by the practice of reducing the grammar of other
languages to the standard of the Greek and Latin, it becomes expedient
to consider the verb under the most applicable of the established rules,
and to explain those departures from them which are peculiar to this
language.
The personal pronoun or the noun that stands in the relation of %
^nominative case or agent, commonly precedes the verb, and it rarely
happens that any words beside the qualitive or the modal (and that ge«
xierally expressive of time) intervenes between them, as i^j^ ^-r^^
^mha chart I seek, ijjij ^jt orang ber-kata people say, Jij *jw. v^j
diya ^udah ber-layer he has sailed, c^j Cf\ Aj jt;^ \j^ g^dong bharu
balum ada ter^uka the new warehouse is not yet opened. But, when
the verb is preceded by the indefinite particle ^ de or sign of the aorist,
the nominative case is then always made to follow, and the accusative or
subject frequently to precede the particle, as ,^jii de per-lambat^nia
he delayed, ^Uy ^Vi^y J jU tiada de terima allah puasa-ma God will
not accept liis fasting, ^); <U^ J «^ v/Ls sopdya iya de bunoh raja that
the king may put him to death, ,^yJuj j (»^v4Jb c^ j!^y j S^*^ amba
. de pukul aria amba de rmnpas-nia me he beat, and my goods he plun-
dered. In the following example the agent in the former part of the
sentence, contrary to the general rule, appears to follow the verb in.
order to preserve and maintain uniformity with the construction of the
latter part, which obeys the rule last-mentioned ^j^ 4>y\ *^^^^ CJ^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. «i
i^j ^ ^\^ jeka gugur iya (for iya gugur) atau de gugur^kan kuda-nia
akan diya if he fall, or if his hwse throw him.
The passive voice (as in English and French) is found only in the
form of a participle, and is rather a branch of the transitive than a
distinct species of verb. It is denoted by the inseparable particle j ter
prefixed, as ^^j ter-tulis written, aiyj ter^^bunoh slain, ^lJJ ta-^jHlik
chosen : but to avoid harshness of sound in pronunciation, the^ r of the
particle is sometimes dropped, as *jaJj ie-lampau exceeded, ^\p te^er-
alas founded.
The moods of the verb may be named and ranked as follows, viz. the
^ imperative, indicative or assertive, ^conditional, and infinitive or indefimte;
which admit, for the most part, of being expressed in the present, the
past, and the future tenses or times.
The imperative mood, in its second or characteristic person (the third
being more strictly a permissive) is in this language the original and
simplest form of the verb,"^ and the only one in which a perfect sense
R can
* In the Latin, Greek, Oennan, Persian, and many other hmguages, the inlperat^?e
;8eem8 to be the most obvious basis of the inflexions of the verb, yet it has not been ^o
regarded by grammarians, who assign this property, some to the ^ird person of die pre-
terite tense, and odiers to the infinitive mood. Sir William Jones says, that the latter
'^ is properly considered by the oriental grammarians as the spring and fountain of all the
moods and tenses." It is widi diffidence I venture to state my opinion in of^sitioo to
such authority -, but to i;ny mind it appears more probable, both in point of form and stmt,
diat the infinitive, which so far from conveymg a simple idea, approadies in fieict to th«
character of an, abstract noun, (as in the phntse, ** to give is better than to receive,")
could never have been the source of that mood in which the earliest sentiments of childhood
and
Digitized by
Google
6a A GRAMMAR Of" THE
can be convejred without the ^watance of imy other word ot particle, as
4^ ftngive, cJ/pergigOj J\^ makan eat, jJjJ duduk sit down. It
does not admit of the prefixed, although in some instances it takes the
annexed transitive particles ^ kan and ^^ F, and very commonly the in-»
tensitive ^ lahj as j^^ J^ lepas^kan arying let loose the dog, ^jj
^^pUang'kan gadei return the pledge, Aj^^ maji-lah come, 4i£it
hangUn^lah waken, arise;
When the pronoun of the second person accompanies the imperadve,
it is made, as in other languages to follow the verb, as m^ ^) Ian kamu
run thou, %jy^^ JU Jalan kam'orang march yie !
It may be observed that these personals are such as imply inferiority
of condition (persons in that relative situation only being liable to receive
commands) and that a well-bred native would express himself otherwise
to his equal or his superior, and instead of i»^ jJ^i) duduk kdmu or
/^t J^j4) duduk arigkau sit thou, would say jjy ^y cM^t minta tuan
duduk
and the rudest of savage life are known to be commanicated> in terms equivalent to " giye,
** take, come, sit, eat, go.*' But without reasoning ^ priori, what unbiassed person will
not adak Ihat the LattB inflcadons '' damns, dabam, dabo,** are nioie likely, with respect
to theletteft widdi compoec the words, to iMive proceeded from '^ da*^ f^e, than £roBi
^ dare" to fife, and '' ianis, ibam" r^ier from '' i" go, than from ''ire" to g<^
or from any other mood or tense of the verb. Upon the same principles I should «ay
that the F^nitA mfinitire ^<X«j;j punSdan to ask, is formed from ^y^ purs ask, ^J^
iirdaii to carry, from j bmr bear, and (j(^]j rJpukM to diive, from ^V^ rin drive, by
amiexing the^yllablet ^Jtj» Uan and ^ J den to the simple roots, and not by the contrary
mode of proceeding; whatever the native grammarians, who speak teehnicaUy rather thaja
philos<q[ihkaliy, may Msert. In some langiaiges, I am aware, the proofr are not so
striking, b«t artificial refinements may have taken the place of more original ei^piessioiis.
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANOUACE. 63
Mui^f or, rtill more politely, jj^ ^,^ 4^ nH-km-lah tSdn duduk
h^ prevailed apOD, Sir, to sit down.
A species of qualified iqipearalivei which may be termed a recom<»
mepdative (exprep^ed ib Ei^lish t^ the auxiliaries ^^ should " and ^^ ought")
mil be noticed in spring of the conditional mood of the verb.
The indicative or awfertive mood partakes of the simple quality of the
imperative, pioticularly in the first and second persons of the present
tense, as jU cJ\ nku man I chuse, JU v,^..v#,ii amba jdian I walk ^\^
CM^ soya minta I ask, f^ ^)i kamu mmum you drink, ^^ifl\ arigkau
kata thou speakest, 4/yy \jy-^ kanCQrang perchaya ye believe It
fusumes howeiner both the prefixed and annexed transitive and intransitive
particles, as ^y ^ ^A'*^^:»^ l/^ soya me-nanti tttah tuan I wait your
orders, ^ ^ C^\ ^Jj^ C/t aku sarah^kmi anak^ku ka^pada tdngan^
mu I commit my child to your hands ^J\ ijya mj^j u--*^ amba ber-kirim
mrat ini I send this letter. If the transitive forms in these two persons
are not so familiar to the ear as in the third, it is because they must be
employed to assert what, from the action itself, is sufiBcienUy known to the
person addressed. The thiid person, on the contrary, and particularly
in the past tense, is a more habitual form of the verb, and admits of th^
easy application of those p^urticles, J^o ^U^ 4^ diya ber-Jalati dauiu
he walks first, ^tf luV^ 4/j diya mem-basuh tangan-nia he washes his
l^^ds, y^j^ jjf^ ^^\ aiding mem-hum rusa the dog pursues the deer,
C^j^jiW« ^^^^ tsp^^ \jj^ orang Jtu sudafi mem-bayer ulang-nia that man
has paid his debts.
In the interrogative form of the indicative the personal is usually made to
follow the verb, as Ji c-^ «^ apa kata karmi^ or ^y cJi kata tuan what
•ayest thou? /JS%i^ i^\jf brapa kirmg kamu how many do you want?
Digitized by
Google
64 A GRAMMAR OF THE
9j}^ ^ J^ ta*mana pergi kam'orang whither arc ye gobg? But
they also say Ji \j^^ uJlU meng-apa karrCorang lari why do you run?
Of with the proper interrogative particle 4 kah^ c::^) cs^jyle^ a^j
de-mand-kah arigkau dapat ttu where did you get that? Where the
nonunative case is. other than a pronoun personal it more commonly
precedes the verb, as ^y iju> ^^ 4S^ ka-^mana^kah burong sudah
terbang whither has the Wrd flown ? JL*^ jjcjb ^j dAJi] apabila-kah
raja andak kambaU when does the king mean to return?
In the assertive form the agent or nominative always precedes, and the
subject or accusative, as well as the object or dative and ablative cases, in
plain donstruction, always follow the verb, Init without being liable to
variety of termination or other change of form that can justify the ex-
pression of the one governing or being governed by the other ; as t^y
i^jj tL« tukang meneggd rumah workmen build a house, ^\ JLa^ |^^
orang memlkul bdban men carry burthens, j^ Jijt JSi kapal ber-layer
ka-ttmor the ship sails to the eastward, c^^JI Jj^ c^U ^y» ujan jatu
ka-dalam laut rain falls into the sea. In poetic language, however, these
* rules are dispensed with, and inversions of the order of words are not
uncommon.
The rules which govern the assertive apply equally to the condFtional
or potential form ; the word which precedes it in construction and causes
the verb to express a conditional or potential, instead of an assertive or
positive sense, not affecting the application of the transitive or intransi- ,
tive particles, as jJVj ^y C^jeka tuan ddiang if you come, yjU Jij jlK
kalau raja me-larang if the king forbid, ^Sy ^\^ ts^lj dapat kdrnt
ber-ontong provided we are successful, ^jj j? ^^^^^ ^U ^^ sopdya
jdngan amba kcna rugt that I may not incur a loss, JU j^ e^' ij^^^
igdr
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 65
Mgar sopaya anak^nia men-jadi alint in order- that his children may
become learned^
From the conditioual 2» explained In the foregoing examples, and
which may be termed the conditional-assertive^ we must distinguish a
recommendative foriHi which being expressed in English by thi auxiliary
^ should,'* seems to beloi^ to the subjunctive mood) but may with more
propriety be regarded as a qualified or conditional imperative. Like the
simple imperative it rejects the prefixed transitive and intransitive particles
^ mm and j ber^ but assumes the indefinite particle j de (whose
extensive use and peculiarities will appear in the sequel) and is preceded
either by the adverb dilc maka ere, before, now, whereas, or the auxiliary
^iisijb andak'lah should, ought, or by both, as in the following examples;,
y^ {^ ^y "^ *-^ ww^fl de potang dangan ptsau you are (then) to cut
it with a knife, ^a^^I^jj j uX« maka de randang^kan-^nia you are to fry
k, 4^ ^^ <^j; o- jU lJ^ maka tiada de bunoh akan diya you are not to
kill him, ^^} *i uX« maka de per-ulih-nia in order that he may obuin,
^^1y J idijo* CJ^ maka andak-lah de buang-^kan-nia he should or
ought to throw it away, Jj> j J ^|y «dijcj^ 4!^ maka andak-lah puasd
dua bulan should or must fast two months, JUJci i^\ ^U iUocjb andak'^
lahjdngan iya ka-tinggal-an he ought not to loiter behind, idijcjb uX*
{^.JSjj^ ^ Jij ^jt \Ji^ maka andak^lah de parang ulih raja akan
marik *itu the king ought to make war on those people.
When the verK substantive is introduced, the indefinite particle is
omitted, as ^^a ^^ j^ «diJjJ^ andakylah ada iya sikhi it should be clean;
4>/ cr^k*> v>^ u*!/ ^^ «^^ J»^^ andak ada iya kwdsa dUduk de-atas kuda
be ought to be a|>le to sit upon a horse, ^^J^ ^j^ ^ i^^*^ jxj^andak
$ ada
Digitized by
Google
66 A GRAMMAR OF THE
ada iya lebih deri^pada pem-bayer utang-nia he ought to have more
than wherewithal to pay his debts.
The optative, which in other languages is likewise classed with the
subjunctive or conditicmal mood, in this seems to belong (as the preced*
ing] to the impieradve, and requiring the indefinite particle, j dtj is nearly
allied to the recommendative in point of form, as cuC^jui ^J^ 4Jt ^^j j
de bri allah kamarau sedikit God gradt a little fair weather, ^JJU^ o ^U
4U\ barang de sampei-kan allah may God cause it to arrive. The optative
or obsecrative expressions, ^U^ apa-lnh^ ^\J A^ apoMi kira-nia^ ^\^
gardng-arij are much employed in giving energy to this mood.
The infinitive mood rarely dispenses with the transitive and intransitive
particles, which seem to belong in an especial manner to this form of
the verb, as ^\ 4/jV^ j»^ <i^ P^gi kamu mencfiart ontong go thou to
seek fov g^, ^^ cu^ lambat mendbng slow to asust, ^J\jaiu^ }yA
s^ \:^J^ (J*^ 5ttA'tfr mem-^ccJtara-^an dan mengarja-kan diya difficult
to plan and to execute it, (cJCct^ «^Ju» $tdia ber-angkat ready to set out,
^Ujj lX. s^cl ber-mmn glad to play, c^\^ ^jmS pantas ber^kata fluent
of speech, ready at speakiiEig.
The distinction of tenses or tiroes to which the action of the verb^
refers, being effected by the use of specific words expressive of the
past, the present, or the future, and not by any alteration in the form of
the verb itself^ the subject might with propriety be treated under the
modal or adverb, but the learner who is accustomed to the method of
European grammar, will naturally expect to find whatever has relatioo^
to the verb exemplified in this place»
^ Where the assertion of acting or suffering is unqualified by any par^
ticular
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 67
ticular attribution of time, the present or existing time must of course
be understood, as cufJ L^^iib amba Rat I see^ ^\i (^J^ mata^ri nmk
the sun rises, Jb^ uJ\ api ber-niala the fire blazes, 4/jfJU ^ M allah
tang meng'OrtaU'i God who knoweth, or is all-knowing; but it does not
reject the addition of modals, which serve to mark the time with more
precision, as c^lC u:j>jj w««Jb ^ iniriah amba bOat saiarang this I do,
or am doing, now ; d^ ^^ 4^J d^a niakan juga he still eats, or is
eating ; Jij ^j. ^ crU pdgi mi praii ber-layer this morning the vessel
sails ; joL «x^t tJ^j^^J^ ^^<^ '>^ «^ ^^^ paduka kakanda ada datang
mi maigawinrkan anakanda baginda my dear brother is taow coming to
receive in marriage the daughter of your majesty.^
Where the present time is denoted by modals expressing a continuity
or existing duration of action, the verb, although not altered in form,
may be considered as assuming the nature of the participle present and
gerund* The modals employed for this purpose are c^'i lagi still,
more^ J^^^^ sambiU 4^]/^ seraya^ and cj^ terta whilst, when, at the same
time, as soon as, whereupon, with, together with, as ^i j <^ ^gi datang
coming,; jjuJ tlhl lagi tutor sleeping, or, still asleep, ^^ji J-^*.^ JU^
ber-jatan sambil ber-sinnt/um walked on, smiling, ^^ J-^i^ v.^^JU ^b
^^lo jA dan meng^uckap sambil ber-ltnang dye)* mdta and said, the tears
at the same time trickling down ; ^\u /} CiU« ^\j^ u^ meniatnhah
Hrdya menidpu dyer matd-nia made obeisance, at the same time wiping
away her tears, en essuyant ses larmes ; c^\^ t^\j^ ^^J j de tertawd-nia
serdya ber^kdla he lauded, saying, ^b «^1 c;^ serta iya ddtang^s soon
as he comes, upon his coming ; ^V.^j^ «.-^ Ci^ serta tiba sural ini
upon the arrival of this letter^
A present continuity of action is in like manner implied by prefixii^
the'
Digitized by
Google
68 A GRAMMAR OTT THE
the verb substantive ol ada, as «^jo^ ^S «^j diya ada nkrndt she is bathing,
J^J j1 t^^*^ ^'orang ada ber-jalan they are walking. It must be
remarked, however, that the veil) substantive is not confined to the pre^
dent time, but may be Connected with a modal of the past, though npt of
the future.
Beside these, a gerund in form as well as in sense, being in fact a verbal
ooun infinitively applied in construction, is produced, as other verbal
nouns, by prefixing to the simple verb the particle cl/A:a-, and annexing
tilt particle ^ -aw, as ^yL» ^^ jcK l.^.^^ J)\i^^ cLi 4/jW wifltf/i-an tiada
ta-lial^n sehdb kaMndoiig-an-lah sayup-nia the sun was not to be seen
by reason of the shadowing of its wings ; <^ ii>j^^^ ^ <— ^^ <^W^ tiada apa
tang ka^darigar^n lagi nothmg was any longer to be heard; ^y ^
^ ^\sji fjXcj^ karna burnt santiasa ka^datang-an oyer by reason of the
earth continually imbibing water»
The past time is most commonly expressed by modals, which in th6
construction of the sentence precede the verb. Those chiefly employed
^a-e J^ Ulah and irju^ sudah, ^U abis and Ji lalu^ all signifying «^ past
or done,** as 0I J^ y^ j1 ^ telah ada atau baldm ada has been or is not
yet; j^j 4j <^«d diya telah ber-ldyer he has sailed; ^x^ ifx^ ^^ kamt
sudah menang we have won ; ^^ us^ 1^^ burong sudah tabang the
bird has flown ; -j^ ^^U kx^ ^j1 orang sudah abis ber-karja the men
)iave done working; jjy J3I j^U tu^ tiba-itba masuk lalu dUduk
suddenly entered and then sat down.
The same words are also employed in the formation of participles of
the past, as ^Jia^ aIj telah srnnpei arrived ; ^ telah or c^U ^Jua sud<^
mati dead ; ^ idJ telah pakei worn ; JS ^dJ ^ ^ taun tang telah lalu
the past year, or, year that has elapsed; and where the sense is decidedly
passive,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 69
lilissive, with the interrention of the particle j. ter, as %yj ^^'%j Mhui
derham tang suddh ter^buang the money that was thrown away, iJU
y^j ij^ ^ ^j\ barigkei orang tang sudah te^-gantang the body of a
qaaa who has been hanged ; ^^j ^LjU ^ i^jj rumah itu dbis4ah
ter-panggang the house was burned down ; jfU; ^^U obis ter-makan
eaten up.
The time impeifectly or indefinitely past is usually expressed without
a modal, by prefix;ing the indefinite jtaurticle j de, as ^jy^ j dem^uh^nia
be ordered ; ^\y} *> de per^Jmat-nia he performed ; 4/j^ ^*;aCw o dc
tdrCgkap-nia p€n<huri he seized the thief; ^ljl^ jL. A^ ^^fSlJi,^ df
parang-kan-mia ulih segdla pahluwan he was attacked by all the warriors;
or, all the warricnrs attacked him ; ^j j^\ jio j de dangar ulih r^a it
was heard by the king, or, the king heard ; in which latter examples it
will be perceived that a passive form is given to the verb, although the
sense is active, by the preposition 4jt ulih ; as in Latin, factum bst. a
TB is kised for tv pfiCiSTr.- The imperfect is also sometimes denoted
simply by annexing the particle A lah$ as 4^^ ^y ji^ ^j ^J iJX« maka
pergulah raja ka^da tUan putri and the king went to the princess ;
^Ji ic)f^y ttu^un ber^nianyt4ah thereupon sang.
The means of expressii^ in this lai^oage a simple future tense ^e
extremely defective^ the modals or adverbs, and auxiliary verbs employed
Tor this purpose (like " will" and " shall** in English, the former of
which includes the idea of volition and the latter of compulsion) being
words which possess independent significations, not always striqtly com*
patible with the use made of them to denote simple futurity of time.
The auxiliaries chiefly used in conversation are jU maU will, intend, 4)ji
kilih may, will, {^^ nanti wait, as ^jS ^U u^-^i^iii amba mail pUlang I
T am
Digitized by
Google
7& A GRAMMAR OF THE
am about to return ; ^j^J jU ^/j diya mail ttdor he will, or, k going to
fall asleep ; ci^y jU jlJ ^^ diya tiada inau turUt he will not follow ;
J^ i^ U;.^4A <kSj> biilih amba shiggah kaldk I shall call presently; ^^xi
^b i.;^M4> nanii amba datang I shall come ; juw ^ cmJ nmi/i ^f^i
sumbok shall presently be restored to health.
Those used in wiiting and in correct discourse, are jjcjb andak will^
intend (but which' more commonly denotes a conditional or qualified
imperative) J\ akan to, and the indefinite particle o de^ which (brms an
aorist of the future as well as of the past, as aU/ ^^pc^ffHi ddJjoib andak*
lah angkau meniata^an nama^mu will you, or do you intend to make
known your name ? ts.^<^ jjca ^^j diya andak ber^arfgkat he intend^
to set out; Jij J\ ^y JlCil apa-kala tuan akan ber^ayer when will you,
or, are you to sail ? ^^p ^U. jjlo ^ jjjf garuda akan datang me-
niarang negri the griffin will come, or, is coming to ravage the country ;
/j^ J\ 4d)\ JU\ ^ oU tidda de amfun allah akan dikau God will not
pardon thee ; u>j1 H^ ^ ^j ^jjju j s^V** ^i^chm^a de siksa ra^aaksm
pcmrbimoh ttu the king will certainly pmish that munkrer«
Inflexians of the Transitive Verb.
A^ jabot to touch or handle.
Inoperative Mood*
\^jabat touch.
/1\ ij:^\t^jabat angkau or /^ AijWjabat^h angkau touch thou*
^U o 4]ijcA andak^lah dejalM^ia let him touch.
Indicative
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, ^x
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense»
uuoU cJ\ a&ujabati u^\afi^ men-Jabatj or ^Wu men-jabai^um I
touch»
. (.s^WU ^\ angkau meii^jabat thou toochest^ kc*
«.s^lflcu 4^J diya men-jabat he toucheth.
v^l^ L<^^ A*a/nJ men-jabat we touch.
c^^lfl^ ylcl angkau men-jabat ye touch.
i.£^lflcu ViS^wX/^ mflfri^ %m mcn-jabat they touch;
Past Tense.
e^U 4; c/t aku telahjabat I have touched*
' v£-^ ^ j^^ angkau telahjabat thou bftit touched^
ur^W <dJ 4^j ^i^ii /e/aA joAnf he hath touched.
. ^A^t^ ^ ^^ kami tekh jibtU we.have touched, kcr
Indefinitely Past Tenie.
^U. «> dejabat-nia he touched.
4/4) idj^ ci^U J dejabat ulih diya it was touched by him, or, he touched.
Future Tense.
chV j'^ ^^ ^^ ^^^ J^batf cuoWu j*3cjh <j/l tf*u andak metiiiabat,
iiUjU c^ 4J^ bulih aku jabat, cJ\ cs^V *^^^ J^ftfltf flr*M I will or shall
Couch.
u:^U jjjjb^le^ angkau andak jabat ^ Sec. thou wilt touch.
^*^V c^ h^ ^^y^ akan jabat, 8cc. he will, or, is to touch.
■■ ■ / ^
.J
Digitized by '
gle
7t A GRAMMAR OF THE
^^V {J^ Lf^ ^^^ akanjahat^ Sec we will, or, arc to touck
Conditional Mood.
u:^l^ (^4> CJ^jtka dhfa men-jabat if be touches.
i^lasi* ^\^ 4,^ sopaya kamt men-jabat that we may touch.
%z^\^ u:^vlCtj^ c&Jb dapat marik'itu mm-jabat should they, or
provided they should touch.
Infinitive Mood.
u^Uu men-tfabat or ^Ifu men^abat^kan to touch.
Participks.
or the Present
vtf^U c^)l lagijabat or u^U a cIS ligi d$ Jabaf touching, still
touchinj^ or, continuing to touch.
Jf^ sambil, isjj^ $erta^ w u>eWu «^ straya mcn-jabat touchipd
€r, whilst touching.
vs^U c^ ada jabot is touching.
Of the Past.
is^U 47 telahjabat, i^U j »Jwi ^ii^KaA dejabat having touched
Of the Passive Past
is^Wy ter^jabat touched, uu>U j ^ i^;?^ dejabat who was touched.
4j ^ ian^ /^ilfliAt or, i£^\^J fj^ ^udaA ter-jabat that hath beca
touched»
Gerund.
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
73
Genmd.
Jf\fJ gj tang ka^jabat^Uy or ^JlJj ber^ka-jabat^an that is to be
touched. •
Verbal Nouns.
c:Mlflci$ pen-jabat one who touches, handles, or who holds an employ-
ment
Jf\^J per-jabat^an and jiljf ka-jabat-an what is touched or handled;
an employment or office.
^y tolong to assist.
Imperative Mood.
y^ tolong assist
M^ y^ tolong kamu assist thou.
^y J 4^jcjh andak4ah de tolong-nza let him assist
^^j jn y^f J ^Mb andahlah de tolong akan diya let him be assisted,
or, let assistance be given to him.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
yy uy..^ amba tolong^ or y^ menolong I assist.
y^ M^ kamu menolong thou assistest.
jjy^ 4^j rfiyfl menolong or ^>^ menolong^kan he assisteth.
jjy^ ^l^ X:5mF menolong we assist,
y^ ^j-*^ kanCorang menolong ye assist
y^ cj^ J dVorang menolong they assist.
U Past
Digitized by
Google
74 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Past Tense.
^y iJu» u.^^ amba sudah tolong I have assisted.
^y a,^ Ji kamu sudah tolong thou hast assisted. •
^y 2fju» i^j ^1^^ sudah tolong he hath assisted*
^y 2rju» ^l^ j^mj 52^d^/i tolong we have assisted, kc».
Indefinitely Past Tense.
^y o ^^ tolong^nia he assisted^
Future Tense.
jU uj.'i^iii ^mitf mau^ jooi^ andak^ ij> btHih, ^ J\ akan tolbngr or
^^^menolongj I will or shall assist u^^vijb ^y «> (jmJ tutnti de tolong,
amba I will assist or am going to assist^
y^^ jxjb Ji kamu andak meholongj 8cc. you will assist.
t^^ {J^ s^ ^W^ ^^^^ ^^^^long he wiir, or is to assist.
t!^ c^ v^^ X:5mi akan meholbng we will assist.
jjy^ c^ \j^^ kam'orang akan menolong ye will assist;
^^^^\jy-i,*y di'orang akan menolong they will assist, or are to
assist.
Conditional Mood:
y^ L,^^^^ C^jĕka amba menolong if I assist;
y^ fc/j fc/lL» sopaya diya menolong that he may assist;
yy^ ^^\^ c:-ob i/i/>fl/ A^amt menolong should we, or provided* wc
«hould assist.
rnfinitive
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 75
Infinitive Mood.
^l^ memlongi ^J^y^ mendlong^kan, or ^^ menolong-t to assist.
^Jy^ ^y tdlong-memlong to assist mutually.
Participles.
Of the Present
yy c/Jt lagi tolong, or y^* j ch lagi de tolong assisting.
J-^ $ambiU c^j-» ^er/a, or \1^ ^\j^ seraya mcnolong assisting, or,
' whilst assisting.
y^ 4)V ada tolong is assistmg.
Of the Past.
^ *3 yjw. sudahde tolong having assisted.
Of the Passive Past.
^^y ter^tolong assisted.
tLy yjw. ti ^^^4? 5iirfflA ter^tolong that hath been assisted.
Gerund.
\J^y,tang ka^tolong-anj or ^j,£^ ber-ka-tolong-an that is to be
assisted»
Verbal Nouns.
%Jyj penolong one who assisteth.
A^J per-tolong-an and ^^ kaHolong-m assistance.
ttf*'"
Digitized by
Google
76 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^L» samun to rob.
Imperative Mood.
^L samun rob.
jC:^U samun^kau rob thou.
^4^L j 4SjjJb andak'lah de sdmun-nia let him rob.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
^U ^^%4Jb flmftix samunf or ^\^ vienidmun I rob.
^L« a\^ ^amu meniamun thou robbest
^\^ ^^«3 </i3^tf meniamun he robbelh.
ttf'V* L5*^ *5mJ meniamun we rob, 8cc.
Past Tense.
^U ^ u^«4Jb amfrtf telah samun I have robbed.
^U ^ |»\^ ^^rmu ^e/^A samun thou hast robbed
^L ifJwi 4^0 i/tya ^</izA samun he hath robbed, kc.
Indefinitely Past Tense.
^Aji^\^ J (/^ samun-nia he robbed.
Future Tense.
jU 4-.^^ flmto ma«, jjub andak^ ^L^ ^ akan meniamun I will or
shall rob.
^L« jjcj^ a\^ ^/7mt/ ^miaX: meniamun you will rob.
^L« ^ 4^43 (/zj^iz tf^an meniamun he will rob, Sec.
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 77
CofuUtional Mood.
^jJu^ U{^%4jb sUi^jeka amba menidmun if I tx>b.
cr*V* L/*^ */^ sopaya karm menidikun that we may rob.
^^^ ^>^^ <^^«> ^ii^/ karrtorang meniamun should ye, or, provided
you do rob.
infinUive Mood.
^\^ meniamun to rob.
Participles.
Of the Present.
. ^U ilS'li lagi samun or ^jJJjC^ Idgi de samun robbing or con^
tinning to rob.
J^A^ sambil, c^ serta, or ^L« ^^j^^ seraya meniamun robbing, or
whilst robbing.
^Li o\ ada samun is rohking. ^ * ^ j \^
Of the Pkst.
^U*3 ifx^sudah de samun hsmxig ujkbdd^ . . \; : .
Of the Passive Past
^ly ter-samun robbed.
^\^J »«x^ ^ tang sudah ter^arhun that hath been robbed.
Oerund.
Jfy^ ti ^^S ka^amun-^ny or ^y^ji ber^ka-samUnran that is to be
robbed.
X Verbal
Digitized
d by Google
7? A GRAMMAR OF THE
Ferial Noim.
^\^ peniamun a robber.
^^J per^amun one who hiu been robbed
^y^ ia^samim-an robbery.
InfiesAoM of the Intramitwe Verb.
jSJ iidor to sleep.
Imperative Mood.
jXJ iidor sleep.
f}i j^jiXJ ttdoT'lah kamu sleq» thou, or go thou to sleep.
^«V J 4i<xJb andakrlah de iidor*nxa let him sleep«
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
js^ 1^ diya ttdor ovjxJj ber^tidor he sleepeth.
Paflt Tense.
jjui i<u c/1 aku sudah iidor I have slept.
jxj ifiX^ jCftt angkau sudah iidor thou hast slept
jiXJ «Jbi ^<«1^ iamJ n/i/a/t iidor we have slept.
Indefinitely Past Tense.
^c^*i de tidor-Tua he slept
Future Tense»
jU 4l^ aku mau or jJlJ jjcji andak iidor I shall sleep, or, am going
to sleep. p,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 79
jA^ ^1f^/i^ aiCgkm andak Mar thou wilt deep, or, art going to
«leep.
j^ e^ ^«J rf«>« akan tidor he will sleep, or, is going to sleep.
Conditional Mood,
jii^j 4/*> C^jeka diya ber-iidor if he sleeps.
j^ S^^ V^ ^(>p5yfl kamt ador or jXjj, ber-ttdar that we may sleep.
jV ij^ csJb dapat kam'irmg Sdor should ye, or, provided ye
should sleep.
Infinitive JHood.
j^/b^-ttdor to sleep.
Participles.
Of the Present
jXp ch lagi ttdar sleeping.
Jh^ sambilf c^ serta^ otj^j ^^\jm serSya ber^Jder tlequng, or,
whikt sleeping.
jju? c\ ada tidar k sleeping.
Of the Past.
jxS «Jui sudah tidor otjXj 4; telah tidar having slept.
Of the Passive Past
We cannot look for this participle as belon^ng to an intransitive verb,
but inasmuch as the generality of these verbs may be rendered transitive,
and from jxj tidor to sleep, may be formed ^jix^ men^idar^-kan to
put
Digitized by
Google
.80 A GRAMMAR OF THE
put to sleep, 60 we may Iiave the passive participles jJuNSf ter^tiddr put
to sleep, and jXJj ix^ ^ tang sudah ter^tldor that hath been put to
sleep. •
Gerund.
^jjc^ ^ tang, ka-tidor^n or ^^j^j ber-^ka^tidar^n that is to go
to sleep.
Verbal Nouns.
jj^ pethtidor 9> sleeper, sluggard.
^j^^} per-tiddr-an a sleeping place^ bed.
^j^ ka^tidor^an sleep, the act of sleeping.
J^jalan to walk.
Imperative.
J^jalafk w^lk;
f,^ A^\^jdlan4ah kamu walk thou.
^U J lOiiJcj^ andak-lali dejalan-nia let. him walk;
JnfiUcative Moqd.
Present Tense.
JU 4.,^vUb ambajalan or JU^ ber-jalan I walk.
JU^ ^^ kami ber-jalan we walk.
Past Tense,
JU j^ ^^ kamu sudah jakm thou hast walked.
\JH^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, 81
J^J ^ \jH'^ dVorang telah ber-jalan they have walked
Indefinitely Past Time.
^U J dejalan-nia he walked.
Future Tense.
jU u;*%a amba man, jxjb andak^ JUjj ^ izi^n ber-jalan I shall
walk.
u^^uh JU J dejalan amba I shall walk.
tt^ jH ^j-^*^ kam'orang akan bcr-jalan ye will walk.
Conditionai Mood.
J^j fX CJ^ jeta kamu ber-jalan if you walk.
JU^ ^^^ iji^ sopaya diya ber-jalan that he may walk.
JU^ V;>-^ <^V ^^^' kflfn'orang ber-jalan should ye, or, provided
you should walk»
' Infinitive Mood.
J\^j ber^jalan to walk. (Transitively) i^llfsU men^alan-J to cause
to walk^
ParticipUs.
Of the Present.
JU (jjn tagijabm walking.
JW^ J-^4.- sambil ber-jalan walking, or, whilst walking.
JW j1 adajalan is walking.
Y 01
Digitized by
Google
8s A g:rammar of the
Of tbc Past.
JU ikXa sudahjalan or J^j Ai telah ber-Jakm having walled.
Gerund.
jliJ ^ tang ka-jalafi^an, or ^l^ ber-kajalan-an that, or, who is
to walk*
Verbal Nouns.
JWu pen-jdlan a walker.
^IU^ per-jalan^an a journey or march.
^lj^ ka-jalan^n the act of walking.
In the fc»*egoing scheme xX inftexiom, certain words expressive of
time, condition, volition, «nd «ther cTOumstUBces of wtioa and sufifaring,
have, in imitatigisdr «be Eaj^idi nd Fnendi g iiwmirHi l^en employe
in fiaiMiigthft iModt «Bd teBms tif tibe verb, though in stridiiess they
should rather be considered as co-efficient members of the luiiliarn im
which they belong, united to the verb in construction, but neither con»
stitnting a part of it, nor influencing its form ; those changes alone which
resi!^ from the apj^almi ^ lasepanMe partkies (the origin peAaps
of the moods, tenses, and persons of the Greek and Latin verbs) bcuig
properly the inflexions of the word.
Some further account of the manner of employii^ these verbal par-
ticles (with the exception of Ae transitives and intransitives, already
sufficiently explamed) may be here given, with advwtageto the 'learner.
J ter being prcfiaDod to At ^eib deaoles die passive participle, as
J$ji/ ter-pukul struck, dJSj ter^lah conquered, ^j lcr-(£Af written ;
having the force of the Latin adjunct «tus, as in <* ama-tus, doc-tus,
lec-tus
Digitized by
Google
If AJLAYAN LANG0ACfi. 03
icC'tai (Gar kgrt^t Ac^m, audi^tut.** Thoii^ vnaUf applkd to the
simple form of the verb, k h aomctimes fiwiid «nked in the same
dkmadve word iwitfa y jur (which will praeadjr be explained) and the
intcnsitsw 4) lak. When precedfng^ jHfTi the ^ r of the foimer of the
two particles is dnoppfid, euphonir gratii^ as ^U^fi? te-per-^ayang com*
juflsiiouited, ^ t^iikp i:^*^ (^V "^ P^^ misM tang mina te^per^nak^
lah iya at the time when he was huju
When the fHosive fartkipieis foHonKd bjr^tke direodve Aji uUh by
4>r through, ifbe sene ixccsnes active, as ^ kx^) CX« m&ka ter4tM
mtik-ma mw tbese iwas aoen hy iuss, ijr, he ^air.
^ per k pteBxed 4o ^erbs transidv^, and when employed in the forma^
tion ^ veriial nonns, <knote8 an active sense, in -At^iptmet sitaation it
appears 4o-eiq>ress a <}oiitinnity of ^ieactiim,:alidsoix^^ an intensity,
4yiit its «pe^ific «se is wt «ieiy cimons^ aqd it seems 4o 4>e rather con^
duoiv^ to 4^ efegMice 4km ecNMrtial to the tneaning ^ the mnrds, as in
tlie fbUb^ing ieaiattipWs: ^ ^4«^^ «^ e^>^ «/iP'^ mtmtn SMhtli-^ de
per-^imuifamu^nia he feastedali the smHistrw of «tate; t^ijj ^^J^yJj^ «^
Ji JX uJ^4e pet^gmnU-giniimia dm-padĕ suatu Juh-peia Imn handed
in 4>aek and ferwiard ifrMs iA» 4mt to the «other ; ^}ĕ j^^./ ^^^!>^ wJLm
«2n^ di^ per4ISik4 negri whp «an ipspoMre die cottdation of the
immtay ? ^^^^J^^} jm-tia^-ian umg patut to pomt out what is
"H^tJ *:* cA^ (/^ •> JP^ «ndirf ife pe-^rtiJcan iaiSgm mat (the
nctiw^ cw^t to be abeoinparaedifkfa intention; ^U# ^^&^ «> ^«> i&«
«fe per^of^iut-ma mmdih^m and he carries to eacess his iiberidttyt
^y^O^. ^ ^ d^i) ^ ^ piMUiUmia flu dttngan baniak tusak be
obtained ^flnft wMi innch trouble; ^ Ji\jr^ Ji^^ pOMvakU^imi
iorang akan ganti-nia to comnussion a person to act in fail stead ; 4^
Digitized by
Google
84 A GRAMMAR OF THE
«iUt Jkj^Ji J*^^ *^ kama kakanda andak be-per^istri^km anakda for
it is my wish to provide a wife for my child
J de. This indefinite particle answers in some measure to the Englisb
infinitive particle <^ to»** as well as to the auxiliaries << do^ doth, did,
may, will, shall,^' and in its application to both the past and the future
partakes of the nature of the Greek aorist, as will appear in the fcdlowing
examples adapted to each of those significations, viz.
J de to. ^J^ «> «OiJoii uXi maka andak-lah de huang^kan he ovght
to throw away ; Ijj^ j uX« maka de randang you are to fry it. or, it is
to be fried ; Ij^l ^U j oU ^ tang tiada dc makan orang whi<lh me»
are 'not to eat, or, which is not to be eaten ; ^K^ lii ^^ j ^^^£U. Ju
dan jangan de palii^nia pada muka-nia and be is not to strike her on
the face ; jH^ o ^j^Jj^ ^ tofig hams de Hrtaworhan which is of a
i^ture to be laughed at ; J^J o ia^U oU ^ tmg tiada dapat de Ubahf
kan which it is impracticable to alter ; u^) ^\^ o^l ^ «> ^JA^jarQ^an de
banting amat kaan itu you are not to beat that cloth too much ; ^y o jU
^b tiada d£ ter-biUmg baniak-nia their numbers ace <iat to be counted
J de do, doth, did. ,4^:;^ j dc per-lambat^nia he delays, doth, or
did delay; ^^t «^yl^.j de tarigkapmia orang he seized or did seize the
JM"^ ; i^ tj^\jj^ ^ •^ «liVjV^ de gagah arang akan diys. if men do
compel him ; ^tj^ gr^\ ^Jc4 J ^ ^J^^ *^ 'j^^a^^ C^ ^^ Ji!tj\ apa*
btla irang laki-ldki ntemandang pada istrhnia dan de pandang istri
ka-pada^nia when a pruiu looketh at hb wife, and his. wife doth look at
him ; ^a^JU; j k.^..^^ iSJj^ J^ ^y d u^^u^ amba de pukul-nk dan aria
^mba de rampas-niavM h^ struck, or, did strike, and my gpods.h^
plundered; ^j J\ Ji,iS Jt^f*^ CJ^Jeka de guguX'^ken kudornia akan
diya if kis horse do throw him.
^de
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. §5
J de may. Jij ijj) o f^\ g?li-i sopdya it/a de bunok raja that the king
may put him to death ; ^^^ j uiU maka de per-ulih-nia that he may
obtain ; ^\ ^JJU^ J 9jV barang de sampei-kan allah may God cause it
to arrive.
J de will, shall, ^^j ^ idJ\ ,^;X4. j t/V^ nischaya de siksa allah
akan diya God will certainly punish liim ; jCj ^\ ^j ^J^\ j jlj iidda
de ampun raja akan dtkau the king will not pardon thee.
When this particle, being prefixed to the verb, is placed in a state of
contrast or antithesis to the same verb with the transitive or intran-
sitive prefix, it conveys a passive sense, as JU J ^ fj*} JL^ ^i ^^^S
mentlik dan tang de iilik he who favours and he who is favoured ; ^
Li^jf^ J ^ J^^ L2Jjij) tang ber-buat dan tang de per-buat he who acts,
and he who is acted upon, agent and patient; j^yt ^^^4^ td ^^^ ^^
^j! ^jeka mdli tang memrtatau tang de bri if either the giver or he to
whom it was given, be dead.
When the verb to which it is prefixed is followed by the directive
Jj\ illih by or through, it likewise assumes a passive form, although the
sense i« active, as ^j ^j\J^ a ^\z^ se-telah de dangar ulih raja as soon
as it was heard by the king, or, the king had heard ; ^U a ^*x:a lL^
ts^^ J\ iiJj. iij\ maka andak-lah de parang illih khaUfah akan
marik'm war ought to be waged by the khaUf, or, the khalif ought to
wage war against those people.
The particle however is not essential to this passive form, for they
say, m the imperative mood, ^l^ 4),\ e^ji buat ulih kdmu be it done by
thee, for, do thou.
When it is preceded by ^ dangan with, j^j deri-pada from, and
some other directives, it causes the verb to assume the character of a
2 participial
Digitized by
Google
86 A GRAMMAR OF THE
participial noun, as ^^j j ^ jU ^ ^b barang tang jadi dorian de
diris any (grain) produced by irrigation ; ^jjUp j ^ dangan de sahaja^
nia with design, purposely ; JU^ ^a^j,^ o ^^ dangan de kesad^kan-nia
kambali with the intention of returning ; ^^ J\ ciJjb j^ ^^ cu|J i> o5;*>
derUpada de Hat orang tang halat akan diya from being seen by men
who are not related to her ; Jj». o ^^\^ karna dejual for the purpose
of selling or of sale.
A peculiar change in the construction attends the employment of this
particle, viz. that the pronoun personal or other agent Js made uni-
formly to follow the verb, and the subject generally to precede it and
the particle, as ^j zjy^ j v-^^viib CJ^ jeka amba de suruh raja if the
king should order me ; ^ ^Jl, o jxj ^^ kulit-nia iidak de makan
best his skin the iron would not penetrate.
The following sentence containing examples of several forms or in-
flexions of the verb, may serve to exercise the learner in the application
of some of the foregoing rules: o ^jca uX< ^Jlo t^\ JlicJyjJ uuoy ^i^ *
C^ •M/^ ui*^ *^ u*^ JAP cr^V s^^ dr!r (^^ *^^ ti L'V i*r^^ i^^^*
lau terbitfajar tatkala iya mdkan maka andak-lak de buang^kan^nia
barang tang ada de-dalam mulut-nia sopaya jangan ter*parlan makan--
an tin kamedian deri-pada siang if the dawn should appear while he is
eating, he ought to throw away whatever is in his mouth, that the vic-
tuals may not be swallowed after day-light; (at the commencement of
a fast).
Adverbs
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 87
Adverbs or Modals.
Adverbs ^xp words emplciyed to modify the action of verbs and the
qualities of nouns, denoting the circumstances of time, place, condition,
degree, 8cc. under which they appear in a sentence.
That all adverbs and other indeclinable words, as they are termed,
have gradually been formed from other parts of speech, has been ably
shewn by an acute granmiarian oS the present day, and his theory, if it
wanted support, would receive it amply from an analysis of the modals
of this language, there being few instances in which their derivation
from verbs, adjectives, or nouns (particularly the two fcHiner] is not
more or less apparent. At the same time it may be suggested, that
whatever they were in their original state, having gone through the
stages of corruption and reproduction, their nature is no longer the
same, and having assumed new and useful functbns, it would be unfair
to exclude them from ranking next in order to those more important
species of words whose origin does not admit of being so distinctly
traced.
It has become a practice, though perhaps an unnecessary one, be«
cause encroaching on the province of a dictionary, to enumerate in gram-
mars all the adverbs (as well as other indeclinables) that are found in a
language. In the Malayan this cannot be done with aoy precision,
their numbers, from the facility of their derivation, being almost unli-»
mited ; but those in most current use shall be given under three general
heads, as adverbs of time, of place, and miscellaneous, instead of
brimching them into « more detailed variety.
Adverbs
Digitized by
Google
88 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Adverbs o/* Time.
cJLi sakarang^ ^j^ k'tni now, ^^j\^ /^«Liust pow, very lately,
ad; telahy xx^ sudah past, J^ daulu formerly, jl^ A-a/fl^, c^ji:,^ se--
brnitar lagi presently, cJy^jugaj y^jiia stUl, Aj balum not yet, ^j^
kamedlan afterwards, ^ sedang^ jl- ^e/^n^ whilst, ^^|^ seraya at
once, then, ^ pemah^ <U3 pemz/^ ever, diU maka ere^ cjl^ kadang,
J\Cc;b barang-kali sometimes, c/lS />J^' to-morrow, JUjI apa-kala^
J-JI apa-bildy J--J pabila, ^^UL bila-mdna when, at what time, J\ScJ
tatkalCj CS^fiL» se-kattka then, at the time when, ^^^ kala-kian so
often as.
O/ P/oce.
^^ ^?iii here, cu^ 5J/t/, ^U ^Jna there, ^^U mana where, ^j^jauh
bx oflF, (j:^j ^(e^f, ^Ufc flfTWipir nigh, $j\ arah about, ^^U mari^ i^J^
ka-mari hither, JS IMu past, ^^kvL. se-panjang along, ^^1 «to^ above,
iTjl 6^a/i below, jjl /i^^r out, Jb dalam in, ^ sa-bldh on one side,
c^ sabrang over, beyond* The six latter are employed as directives
of prepositions also.
Miscellaneous.
^^ bagini, ^^^^^ demekian thus, in this manner, ciuJj bagitu so,
in that manner, jJL bagUmana how, in what manner, ^L or ^l^ saja^
^yr- J^g^f y^ J^ ^^hy <^:-^ct- sarigat very, J5ljJ ter-ldlu extremely,
^c^ amat too, ^^ makin the more, ^^ flfn^^ rather, W lya yes, jju7
iSfrf^A- no, j^ Aii^/m it is not, ^J^>'jangan do not, i^lf-^ nischaya cer-
t^^y> (^1/ t^-utama especially, j^ *(z/wa whereas.
A more
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 89
A more useful distiuction of adrerbs arises from the manner of their
formation, and they may accordingly be considered, with the exception
of those whose origin cannot now be traced, under the following classy,
viz. . . . _
Words belonging to other parts of speech adverbially employe^ with-
out any change in their foiln ; as ^\f boik well (properly, good), j;/U
baniak very (properly, many), a^ kbih more, j\^ bharu pewly, J^t tf/wr-
btla Jl^l apa-kdla when (properly, what time).
Words rendered adverbial by duplication; as Ti-^ iiba^iiba acci-
dentally (from c^ tJba to arrive), f^^j^ chw^ehuri by stealth (frcmi
i^j^ cfmri to steal), fc:^ ganti-ganti by turns, interchangeably (from
>s^ ganti to change), r J^ mula-mula at first (from Jj^ mula the
beginning), fy dua^dua by twos, two and two, Tj^-U masing-nming
separately, individually (from ^\ asing separate), X\^ garang^garang
loudly, vociferously (frum ^&fi girnng loud); In this way the adverb
is more commonly formed from verbs than from adjectives, because the
duplication of the latter is sometime» employed to denote an excess of
the quality or sort of superlative degjree, as r^ besdr^besdr very great.
Adverbs produced by the application pf particles to words belonging
to other parts of speech, and especially to adjectives. The particles
thus used are ^ se andj; bef prefixed and ^* ^n annexed. By the
first of these, which is the most regular adverbial sign, the same efiect is
produced , as by adding the syllable ly to English adjectives, as j,^ se^
benar truly, from ^ benar true, Ji^ se-betul righdy, u,fcLi se-ganap
completely, ^l^ se4ain differently, j^\^ se^aniak as many as, ^Li se-
lama as long as, l^La se-barang whatsoever. It is also applied to nouns
and verbs, as CS^ se^kattka whilst, from Ci^ katlka point of time,
A a jSUJu
Digitized by
Google
go A GRAMMAR OF THE
J^JcLi se-penifiggal Binw, subsequently to, item ^^ titCggal to leave,
f j^ se^bulih'bulih by all possible means, from ^^ bulih can, X%jf^
se-kdrang'kdrang at the least, from g^ jf korang to want, ^^ se-rasa as
if, like as, from ^\j rasa feeling, tact, jflU sc4aku thus, so, from p Idku
manner, conduct; if the two latter examples should not rather be sa-^rasa
and sa^lakilj and the particle be supposed a contraction of aU sama
together, alike, or of ^cjLi satu one, as is more evident in the word Uf^j^
sa^rupa alike, or, having one and the same appearance.
Adverbs made by prefixing this particle ^ se are not uncommonly
put into the possessive form by annexing the personal pronoun ^ nin
(see p, 49), as ^yUu se-patut^nia properly, ^pi^ se^sunggiih-nU
truly, and by the pliability of this language become a sort of adverbisd
nouns, as ^ylLi ^ dangan se-patut-nia According to propriety, ^
^^k^m^ dangan sc-^unggiih^nia with truth, or, in good earnest* Future
instances will occur of this conversion of one part of speiech into an*
other.
J bcTy . which is in common tbe sign of the mtransitive verb, is also
employed adverbially, as Jj^^ ber-muta (but more usually Jy^f^ se-ber-
rnuia) at first, tizjj^j beMurut-turut consecutively, TisJ^j} ber-ganti^
ganti interchangeably*
^ ^an^ which is employed in. the formation of verbal nouns (see
p. 33) is also sometimes annexed to various words in formmg adverbs,
as ^Ur iambah-an moreover, from ^ht tambah to add ; ^fu^ mudah^
mudah-an posobly, perhaps, from ja« mudah easy, Jf^j^ji ber-pantas^
pania$*an expertly, adroitly, from ^^^pantas quick, expert; ^J\Am^\^^
ber^sama^sama^n together, in company, from ^U sama together, alike.
But this last derivative word assumes also (without the duplication) the
character
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 91
character of a noan, as ^\y}ijai\ ^^U^j j) dJ^ J^^^ ^^^ ber*$am3ran
antara ka-dui-nia if there be an equality between them» ^b 4^ u U^
u^vX» ber^sama-an bhaya dan salamat an equality of danger and safi^.
Many adverbs are subject to degrees of camparison like adjectives, as
j^U ^ Ubih jauh farther off, .^ ^b^ j^ e^j^^ ^J^r" {J^ *^ ^
daulu^kan suddra bapa perampuan deri-pada sudara Ibu the brother of
the wife's father (may see her) preferably to the brother of her moUier.
Prepositions, so called from their usually preceding the words to
which they are related in the sentence, may in respect of thdr employ-
ment (which is that of pointuCig out the direction of movement to or firom
an object, or the coincidence of position with it), be termed directives» .
Not admittmg of discretional formatbn from other parts of speech, like
the adverb, their number is more definite, and they may without incon-
venience be detailed, though not precisely, as some of them partake so
much of an adverlnal signiication ^ to render their class doubtiul.
It may be proper in the first place to pardeidarise certain prepositi<ms
of very general use, which are commonly employed in composition or in
conjunction with other prepoaticms^ mth adverbs, or partides* These
are,
«> i2e at, in, on ; as ^^ ^ o de kakt gunong at the foot of the
mountains ; t^^ J\f 1^ de balik bukit at the back of the hills ; ^ju# ^
c-^ de pantei laut at or on the sea-beach.
When connected with other prepositions it modifies thehr 6%nifieati€M:i
and serves to form new prepositions, which are likewise formed by its
junction wilh adverbs and some other words, as j^l «^ de^bamh beneathi
Digitized by
Google
^ A GRAMMAR OF THE
^jJi^d de^cs above, upoot ^(^ de^adSp-an befone, in front of, ^SLj
de^lakang behind^ Jb j de^dalam within, j^ j de4uar without, odtside
of, %^ 6 de-^abrang on the cAher side of (a river). But wh0;i joined
with adverbfi, the sense pf the compound word is often adrerbiaK as ^Uj
de-mian^ wh^rb, ^j^£> &-iJiu here, ^Lo de^ana and uu^ j de-situ there.
U/ihf to, unto, coalesci» with the word to which it is prefixed, as
jMi hhpmar to the faslzaiV j^ htriimor to the east, ^\s^ ka-tartian to
the garden. In the same manner as the foregoing it is connected with
other prepositions toA with adrbrbs, und follows similar rules, as ^L^
ia-atas t^ to, to t]be top of, ir^U ka^awah to the bottom of (implying
th6 motion or direction . upwards and downwards], ^\JiS ka^dap-^m to
the front; into the presence of* So also when connected with adverbs,
the sense coinmonly becomes adverbial, as ^U^ ka-mana whither, J^
ka^sana thither, 8cc.
ji> deritcom^ does not coalesce with the. words to which it has im-
mediate relation, as iz^Jljd dm laut from the sea, ^^^jCt deri ulu from
the ii^ferior cduntrjr, unless When united with adverbs of place, in order
to form new modals and directives, aft u^^j^ d^ri-atas from above or
upon, ifjljj deri^wah fixwi beneath, j^j^ dai-lmr from without, jj
JU deri^idm from whence, ^Vji^ dcrirsana from thence; which in
pronunciation seem to be compound words, though it must be remarked
that the J r being in itself an unpomected letter^ we cannot readily ascer-
tain whether, a syllable ending therewith does or does not coalesce in
writing with that which foUgws. The same observation applies to the
.{Hrepositiiai J, iJe» which is also an unconnected letter, but as a syllable
it may be inferred to coalesce ir^m the compound word being sometimes
, (though not correctly) written ^\iodi^^ as YfeU^ fjjVo'de^as.
The
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN. LANGUAGE- 9$
The two foregoing prepositions c/ ka to, and jj deri from, when
placed before nouns or yerbs, are commonly associated with another
peculiar preposition, jj pada^ which appears however to be expletive and
not to alter the signification, as u^j jl5$ ka-pada inimahio the house,
y\ ^ di^ ka-pada tepi ayer to the water's edge, ^^^ jj^j deri-pada
lan^it from the sky, \a^\ u^^ «xS^j deri-pada sebdb tin from that cause,
^b^ ^iLjLJU oj^ deri'pada mehg^dbis-kc/n arta-riia from having con -^
sumed his property. It is more particularly employed in forming the
comparative degree of adjectives and adverbs, as jjj dijj IlUj aL>! /wF-
lak tinggi den-pada lain this is higher than the other; ^Uj j^^j J^
fj:^\ dauju ' deri'pada. zeman tlu earlier than than p^iod ; oj,j c^U j^V
j^jij fj^— • «-J^ balk maii deri-pada idup s'orang din better to die than
live a solitary life. When usod.as a separate preposition it signtfieV to,
at, foir (but never from), as l:u^< ^U o5 pAda masa ttu at that time;
^4^:jU^ jS j^i Bi^ pada jabat^n-nia suitable to his employment ; jj ^|^
«^j^ ^Ui^T ^owi />tfrffl ineng-alnh-kan negri able to conquer, or, to
the conquest of the country ; ^j^^'k^J^ jfe-» «^S ^ batanja pada segala
art hdjl money for. the expence of every day's pilgrimage^ It is also
frequently introduced between the verb and the noun in its objective
and even in its subjective sense, where in our language a preposition
would not be thought necessary, as c/j^ ^y tolong pada-ku assist me ;
cs..wjJj^ ji A^\ ampum4ah pada mamk*ttu pardon those people ; ^yi^
^\ jj mhnnji pada allah to praise God. . ■
^ja 5fl, which' appears to be a contraction either of ^L iamfl together,
alike, or of c^U isJ/u one, is employed' only in composition artd. then
conveys a^signiBcation of .union or iinity, as aI:^^ sa^narna namesake^
^^\C sa-kdwan in company, conjointly, jjo^ sa^kd^dak of one mind,
B b JIC
Digitized by
Google
94 A GRAMMAR OF THE
J\L» sa^ali at once, 4Jjy^ sa-mpa having similar appearance. The
worckf thus compounded become adverbs» and in some instances tt is
difficmb to cfistitigiiish this Contraction from the adverbial particle ^ se^
before noticed.
^l iilih by, per (Lat) is peculiarly used in changing the form of the
▼arb from active to passive, as A\ oj^ buat ulih^mu be it done by thee,
finr, do thou ; %s^\ ^j ^j\ J^\ j de ambel iilih raja ttu there was taken
by the king, for, the king took.
The other most common prepositions are as follows, xnz. ^ akan to,
for, cJj bagi tc^ unto, Jb dalam in, ^\ atas on, tji arah towards, nigh
to, JS labii aSi lampoht ^ iepas past, yj^ koliling around, ^j truSf
^j^ lintas through, ^Ji^ ingga^ ^b ddtangj ^JU^ sainpti unto, as far
as, Juj^ ampir^ i^J^ dekat nigh to, ^^ sabrang beyond, Jpj darigan
with, jWt antara between, ^j demi by, c;^ ganti instead o^ ^j) lawan
in opposition to, jlU balik on the other side of, behind, j^ kador about,
€irciter, U^ semd or ^ sema to, unto, at An ambiguity attends Ibis
last preposition^ which is familiarly used in Sumatra before the objective
case, as J^ \^y^j^ baxva sema tOan kamu carry tb your master; but it
doe# not often occur in writing, and when it does, seems to be identified
with |%U same together or along with, as in ^U ^ aU «xi ^ij^jekalau
pada sama iat^ahjalan if at or about the middle of the road.
The wt)rds jf^U bawak under, jj liar out, r — si$i be^e, by the
side, ^ sa-^fldh on one side, and some others, do not acquire the force
of fMrepositions unless when in connection with j d^, c/^^ orjj deri^
a^ M^\!,*i de-bawah beneath, j^j de-Ular vrkhoutf ^fLj de-^^lakang
behind, ^ «^ de^a4}ldh on one side of, ^\S ka-atas to the top o^ up
to, jjj j,^ dcnrlOar from out.
Conjunctives.
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, ^5
Conjunctives.
Goig'micttres are employed to denote the conDexion in sense between
wools not immediately dependant upon each othet in construction, and
between di&rcfnt clauses or members xX the same^^ntence.
Instead of the customary distinctions of copulatives, diisjunctives, dis-
cretives, advdrsatives, causals, exceptives, and other classes almost at
numerous as the individual w6rds arranged imder them, bm which do
not appear to «iswer any purpose of grammar, they may be summarily
divided into direct and indirect conjunctives, accordii^ to their respective
properties.
The direct conjunctives are ^1 j dan and, and yl atau or, which serve
to unite two m more Words standing in equal relation, or parts of a
ienience grammatically independant of each other,, as J|^ ^ s^jW
matikiri dan bulan sun and moon ; ^jj yt ^j>^\ amat atau perak gold
or silver ; JU y\ ^ siofig atau malam day w night ; ^j ^b jA» cs..ci^
\^ csJl^Ju» minta baniak dan terima sedikit s^ to ask for much and
receive a little only. It may be remarked that the prepoation ^
datigan with, is often used indiflerently for Jb dan^ as y\ ^^j^
(tnggor dangan ayer wine with water, for, wine and water.
All other conjunctives may be considered as indirect, connecting Wonfa
in miequal relation, and parts of sentences between which a contingent
dependance is inferred, as j^li jl^ ^ sedang kalau bSik sofficient if
good ; c^^vUb ^fj (-«Or j^ &^ y^jt^ S^^^ ^-^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^y^ utang
kamu kalau chukup wang amba I shall pay your debt if (or jMrovided
that) my money be 8u£5cient ; \jyma ^^ ^ J^ ^ASi^j (i^ ^^^
jangan
Digitized by
Google
g6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
jangan kamu bcp^ingkat meleinkan darigan kawan s'orang do not set
out on your journey unless with a companion.
The indirect conjunctives may be enumerated as follows, viz^ JLi^
jekaj ^jekalau, ^ kalau and^\^ kalau if, ^^li- wpaya^ ^\ agar that,
in order that, for, JcXc meleinkan unless, ^laJ tetapi, J^3 wellakin but,
howbeit, yet, ^U hania but, excepting, but only, CJ^-jugay y^jua also,
•till, only, ^U or ^l^ ^^M ^^Y^ Jy i^to ilso, c^ lagi yet, still, Jy.^^
se'-ber-mula in the first place, -^ bahwa whereas, Jy ciS lagUpula^ JUfi
sahadan, ^} arkiyan^ ^Lc tambdhan moreover, further, ^jjo Jdni that
is to say, ^^ ka-tau-i to wit, ^^^ kalaktan whenever, so often as, J^^^
sambil^ VJui selang whilst, ^^ seraya then, at the same time, withal, ^U
mail whether, ^U tndsa what though, ^\^ gardngan^ ^\ antah for-
sooth? an? nonnc? J^ly tagal^ ^ji kama^ L^^^^sebdb because.
Whatever may have been the origin of the two direct conjunctives,
which from their obvious use must have occurred very early in the
progress of language, little doubt can exist that the others (as well as
adverbs and prepositions) were ori^oally nouns or verbs, or phmses
which for the sake of brevity in utterance have . been contracted ; a$
already noticed in treating of the adverb. Thus the word ^jJu^ me-
leinkan unless, is properly a. verb signifying ^ to change," and that verb
is a derivative from ^ latn^ an adjective signifying ^^ other, different*?
It is not uncommon to ettiploy together, without any appaifent advan*
tage to the sense, two.tonjunctivcs, each of the.lsame meanii^. ' Tim
happens more particulwly where one of the synonithous words, is^bor-»
rowed from the Arabic, as l/L»^\ agar sopaya in order that, c-^ ^Ji
kama sebdb because, J jS ^\j^ sahaddn pula moreover.
Interjections
Digitized by
Google
iNX^^^^ECTiq»^ or Exclamations.
iBlerjecUoQs are ju^dden exprea^ioiis pf /ef)ipg, for ^e jpost p^
unconnected with other words in discourse. Not unfrequently, ^hp^-
ever, they are found in the same relation to nouns and personals as in
other languages, where they are considered as signs of the vocative case,
as i^\ I ya Ulahi Q .God I C^y\ ya tugn^hUrO my LordT Apd in
. sDiue iostances, as. will be ^e^ in . the . fpUp^ing ^nuo^ei^tion, , the .excla-
jnation itself consists of more than one word.
\j yd or Ja O ! (ift^ation and jptrealy) ; ji\oyu oh ! (affection) ; uo\
adofh ^^^ adoh't oh! alas! (pain, g^jef ) ; ^J^ M^ ^) ?V^J (gri?f,
AS (i/jj ^> hfi,pada-ku woe is me!),; i^mh alas! ^heiar ^ hat, jk\
ahil or afuiuhol (calling); /j nitf A, uu^^t incAiV away! out! ^. ehfh
or cheh fye ! ^\j waiy ^Ji karam or ^ karam woe to thee! ((bieaten-
-ing) ; Jij Jffdjll^hi by God! (This and mpst other imprecaliopis ai^e
: borrowed jTipm the Arajbs). ^j^haik^ ^Ut m^ well! good! y^
j)aGas, JJ^jirQran'kan far t>e it! .foi;J>id itl^U sayangj ^kasm
'tis pity ! alas ! M apa-lah, ^\J kira^nia^ ^\J ^lUt (g^-lah kira^nia^ ^\^
garangroniptithdel Qayl (solicita>i<m).
Particljssl
Although the application of most of the inseparable pfoticles em*
ployed in the formation of d^jiyatiye wpscjb, has beea alres^ shewn
. when tre^tijng of Jhose vpwb lo,wl^i?h tbpy respectively, att^ yet as
. some jof . them still remson upexplalped, and their impoftaoce in the
structure of the language ^ves them a claim to be cpimdered as a p^rt
.pf spe^,. they shall be. here, collected in one point of yiew, with the
G c distinction
tDigitized by
Google
98 A GRAMMAR OF THE
difltinction only of particles prefixed and particles annexed. In order
to avcnd unnecessary repedtions, it will be sufficient, in the instances of
those already explained, to refer to the places where the examples will
be found
Particles Prefixed.
J beris employed as the sign of the intransitive verb (p. 56), and also
in the formation of adjectives from nouns (p. 38), and of adverbs (p.
90)-
^ men^ ^ meng^ a me (being modifications of the same particle) are
employed as the signs of the transitive verb (p. 52).
1 pen, LS pengj J pem^ «^ pe (being modifications in like manner
of the same particle) are employed in forming derivative nouns, which
commonly express the agent or instrument (p. 34).
J p^t J5 p^l ^r^ ^^ ^*®^ J^ t^^ formation of derivative nouns, which
signify for the most part the action or the place, and partake of the
intransitive and passive, as the former particles do of the transitive quality
of verbs (p* 34).
J terU the sign of the passive participle in verbs (p. 61), and of the
syperlative degree in adjectives (p. 38)^
«3 de expresses the indefinite time in verbs (p. 69), and is also a
preposition (p. 91).
C^ ka is employed in the formation of verbal and other derivative
nouns, which* take at the same time the annexed particle ^* an (p. I33).
When prefixed to numerals it expresses the ordinal (p. 41) ; and it is
also an inseparable preposition (p. 92).
^ iahj as a prefix seems to be only a contraction of the adverb ^
telak
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 99
telah past or done, and is applied to express the past time in verbs and
^participles, as ^l^ laJirabis expended, ^\ ^^ 4 lah gugur enak^nia
she has miscarried. The form is however coUoqoial, and rarely, if e^er,
occurs in correct writing.
^ ^ is employed to give an adverbial sense to words, whether pri^*
mitive or derivative, in any other part of speech, as ^^^ se-benar-nia
truly, from^ benar true ; ^J^ se^-harus^nia properly, from j^U harus
proper; r^U- se^mana^mana any where, wherever, fh>m ^^U mana
where ; ^j^jf^ se^er^mUla in the first place» from Jj^ ber-mula to
commence. There is also a particle written ^ $a and L si^ which ig a
contraction from cl^U satu one, and of ^U sama alike, as ^jSL» sa^lagis
single, from ^jJS lapis fold; J\L« sa-kalitt once, from J^ kala tune;
<J'U sd'-ati with one accord, from cjU ati the heart.
It may be remarked that in these prefixed particles the supplementary
vowel sasiifat'hah is pronounced as a short^f and not as an ^ , excepting
in the instances of cJ ka and A lah, and in a few words implying tides
of office, where ^ is pronounced pangf m ^}j^ pang'&lu ^, superin-
tendant, and not as in j^^ peng-ibtir a comforter.
Particles Annexed.
^ kan is a sign of the verb transitive, and is usually annexed where
the particle ^ men or ^ meng is or might be prefixed {p. 52).
^ J is employed in the same manner, and has the same transitive
power as the preceding particle (p. 52).
^ an belongs to the formation of verbal and other derivative nouns, to
which the particle c^ka or J per is commonly prefixed (p. 33).
i) lah, if it be not merely expletive, may be considered as giving deter-
mination
Digitized by
Google
t6o A OltA^MA/R OF THE
tmiiatkm to Uie word to ithichtitis anoeBed, and be called Ma iateoftUive
parti(ile, as ^l inl^lah this (vr hioh I point to), 4)^^ marulah come !
tdjjjb batk4eh 'tis wcU ! 4Ux^ swkth^-iah cease ! there is eoough.
4 kali is an interrogative particle that may tie annexed to words in any
part of speech < that became thesohject of a qiiestion, as iS^j rqja^kah
is it the ki^? ^y jmtih^kaJi is it white? ^t itu-Aafi is it ;that? y\
iiJi turn Imnrktth or another? c^\ a^j> j jdxih «Jt anto/t intitf^ r/e
bmoh^nia-kah iTitt^ I know not whether it behis intention toikiU.me.
4; AiA is likewise an intenpgative, and ^eems not to differ in its appli*
cation from the preeediffg particle, as atUiU mar^apa-tah wherdbre?
-ĕ;\jS-hMnana4ah whkhar?
^ Tda^ C^Jcu, ^ mu, ^^kau^ ahhMgh akeady describedas coptra^ti^
personal pronouns, yet being annexed in the manner of other instyarahje
particles, and produeing. in common with thema prosodial.efittt to be
hereafter described, are induded in this enumeration.
f^^pun is annexed inditferently to words in all the parts of speech,
seeming to be < generally. expletive imd to serve only ^ for givii^. roundness
to the phrase, as uX^ u^^ kami-pm sidoa^t are pleased; ^y.^sr^
jjjf ^ji JU jJw siang pun ttdak malam pun ttdak it was not day,
neither was it night ; cU ^3^|y>^ clX« niaka suatu-pun tiada but there
was not one; lU ^ ^^y 4^1 iya pin sgng iau he it is who knoweth.
Adverbs are' fbnaed in) a>iew instaiices by tfae:.addttion of this, particle, as
^^\ ftW'pun thereupon ; ^ySf^ia^SE^jHm moreover. It does not appear
to affect the prosodial quantity,, a^dlj^erefbre, althoiigh frequ^^tly cqn*
nected in writing^\Mith the^fireoediBg.wMd, it; siay, be «doubted whether it
should in atrictnestf be considerodas^ ancaonexed.paijti^}^
oj nda. is an addilbo^to 'Wcn:ds expcesfiye of., febi^qn^hip, in the
courtly
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. lot
courtly style, in order to distinguish them from the ordinary appellations,
and is, in a grammatical view redundant, as oj^\ dyanda for a^f ayah
father ; ^\ anakanda^ and sometimes jX)! anakda^ for ji\ anak child ;
ojj^ kakanda for c^ kaka elder brother ; jj j< adenda for j^jt i7^>t
younger brother or sister, or, figuratively, lover and mistress, as in the
Canticles, " my sister, my beloved !"
The changes that take place in the consonants of primitive wordt
upon prefixing particles, and which seem chiefly designed to prevent a.
harsh concurrence of sounds, have already been explained in treating of
the verb and verbal noun, but* those which,' upon annexing particles,
affect the place and length of the vowels, are more properly the subject
of prosody and will be found under that head. Their regular adjustment
serves, more than any other criterion, to distinguish the degree of correct-
ness in writing the language.
O/ Syntax.
Having treated of words individually and the classes to which they
are referable, we come now to speak of their constructicm in sentences,
or that part of grammar called Syntax, and by the Arabians and Malays
ygr nahu otjaer Ae> \lmu nahui.
The characteristic of the Malayan construction is simplicity, the
words assuming in general that order which we may conceive to belong
to the natural course of ideas. The rules of syntax must therefore be
iew, and where there are no inflexions, no changes of termination to
denote case, gender, or number, there cannot be concords, in the sense of
the Latin grammarians. The connexion of the words with each other
is ascertained partly from their own nature, and partly from, thdar relative
D d position,
Digitized by
Google
102 A GRAMMAR OF THE
position, which answers the ends of regimen ; and consequently there
can be no arbitrary dislocations to exercise skill in collecting the scattered
members of a sentence.
The necessity also for going into much detail in this place is dimi-
nished in consequence of most of those rules havii^ been already noticed
in treating of the different parts of speech to which they have reference.
For the purpose, however, of brining them into one point ofview, they
shall be here repeated vrith as much brevity as possible.
The nominative case, or noun or pronoun denoting the s^ent, in ge^
neral construction precedes the verb, and the noun or other word which
is the subject of the action or the object to or from which it is directed,
generally folbws the verb, as ^j:JUj JS^ j/ kuda makan rumput a horse
eats grass, ^U i\i ^^J diya tau jalan he knows the road, Ls^Sl\ji -1;
f^)ji raja ber-angkat ka-negrl the king proceeds to the city, ^j^ ^y^
iA^^ji ujan turun deri larigit rain descends from the sky.
But under certain circumstances, as when the verb is preceded by the
indefinite particle j de, the word denoting the agent is made to follow,
and the subject to precede the particle and verb, as ijJ^ cHJL^ «^ H""^ u^
kabun amba de rusak gajah my plantation the elephants have ruined,
^\ fjJjU J ^Lo dosa-nia de siksa allah God punished his crimes.
In the interrogative form of the indicative the agent may either pre-
cede or follow the verb, as a^ ^b Jujj deri-mana datang kdmu from
whence come you ? clj ^y ^U^ ka^mana tuan pergi whither are you
going? In the subjunctive or conditional, as in the indicative or.assertive
mood, the agent usually precedes, as ^b jU ^y CSj^^ jeka tuan fndii
datang if you chuse to come; yet by an allowable inversion it sbm^imes
follows, as ^^ i^jfji ^^ sopaya bcr^cherrci milsuh that the enemy may
disperse. In
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 105
In the imperative the agent ahnost ever follows the verb, M ^\ ^\i
bdngunrlah atigkau awake thou, ^3 c/\a^^^-«\^^ danger kanCorang
kaiorku mi hear ye these my words ! It is likewise not uncommon in
grave discourse to separate the personal pronoun from its immediate
connexion with the verb, by introducing the preposition ^djl utih by, per,
as A\ c^ kata ulih-mu be it said by thee, for, ^' say thou«" The agent
is found however in some instances to precede the imperative, especially
where the command is circumstantial, as f^ cl^U ^^ j ^^j ^J\ i*^^ Ji^
dan kau^pandang akan diya darigan niata aii^mu and do thou look
stedfastly to Him with the eyes of thy heart. The imperative may also
be employed without any pronoun or other agent being expressed, as
^J\jii^ jJy pulang se-bantar mi return this instant; ^J\^ jjjj duduk
makan sit down, eat.
In the passive, which is properly a participial form of the verb (as in
English), the noun of suffering commonly precedes the participle, and
seems in strictness to be a nominative case to the verb substanUve under-
stood, as (Jj^^ ^j^>H/ «-r^^^J^ amba ter^jar uUh guru^ku I am taught
by my religious instructor, where ^ty jt \^nAJb amba ada ter^djar would
be the more regular, though less usual mode of expression. The noun
of action in this form is separated from any immediate connexion with
the verb, by the intervention of the prepositions ixjjl ulih or ^j^ deri-pada
by or from, as in Latin ** per magistrum meum,*' or " k magistro meo."
But the noun rf suffering may also be made to follow the participle, and
the noun of action, with its prepositions, to go before, as j>Aj c^jj ^\
L^..AJbulih guru-ku ter-djar amba.
The noun, in simple construction, precedes and is immediately fol-
lowed by its qualitive, as J-> \jji orang babal an ignorjmt person, |*)U
Digitized by
Google
104 A GRAMMAR OF THE
t^i padang luwas an extensive plain ; but they may also be separated
by the definite article or pronoun ^ tang^ as J^ ^ qj^\ orang tang
habal a person who is ignorant, ^jSki ^ i^sAS kilat tang tangkas sharp
lightning, or, lightning that is sharp or quick, ^ ^ ^U jalan inng
lehar a wide road; by which the existence of the quality is more strongly
expressed than if the pronoun were omitted. Under some circumstances
the qualitive may be placed before the noun, particularly when it is the
emphatic word of the sentence or subject of the asserticm, as ^j ^U^
besdr malegci raja great is the king's palace, i-^«^ aU j^b baik mma
amba good is my reputation ; in which expressions the verb substantive
ol ada is understood, and would, without the inversion, have the effect of
detaching the qualitive flrom its noun. But if the sentence be analysed
we shall find that it easily resolves itself into the general rule, for with-
out an ellipsis it would be jj^b Jj j1 u,^«4Jh Jj mma amba ada 7iama baik
my reputation is a good reputation.
The qualitive of a noun understood may in like manner precede the
noun expressed, as cpU cu^ sakit ati sick (at) heart ; where the person
to whom the word sakit applies is the noun understood ; A»^ c^U c:;^
bUta mala sa^Uih blind (of) an eye ; ^U j^ u:^ lambat ka-dafang-an
slow (in) coming ; ^^ ^ funa budi mean (of) intellect ; or thus with
an intervenmg preposition ; ^-iiU J\ ^^^ takut akan mantissa afiraid of
mankind (the name of the sensitive plant or mimosa) ; ^ji^ ^ j;/U
mabuk dangan minUm-an Mrunk with liquor ; ^L^ ^jd ClSU suka
deri'pada ka^menang^an joyful from victory.
Numerals (which it has been thought right to distinguish from adjec-
tives or qualitives) usually precede the noun, as Jy^ J\ anam biilan six
inon(hS| i^Ji uJl i;i^ ^ tUjuh patigkat api narka the seven stages
cwr
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 105
or gradations of hell«6re. It is not uncommon to make them follow the
noun, as cuX«l ^^j burong ampat four birds, \^\j^ c-4 lembu sa^rdtus
an hundred oxen, y Ujj rumah dm two houses; but in this situation
the terms j^t tkur^ g^ buahj or others equivalent^ are understood to follow
and connect themselves with the numerals, according to a peculiar idiom
already described in treating' of that class of words. In imitation of
numerals, with which they are so nearly allied,' adjectives of multitude
generally precede the noun, as yji ^y JC» segala puhn kayu every
timber-tree, ^J^^^ \j^ ji\i bdniak orang ka-datang-an many persons are
coming ; but they may indifferently be made to follow. The ordinal
numbers should always follow the noun, as cX?^ l^Ja art ka-ttga^ or,
still better with the article, ^L^ ^ ^J^ an tang ka^tiga the third day,
y^ j^jU art ka^^ua the second day; for if otherwise placed, ^^^l^ cJ:^
ka-iiga art would be understood to signify " the three days/' and g?jU jj^
ka-dua art " both days/'
When two nouns stand together without an intervening verb, the for-
mer is generally to be understood as the subject of possession, and the
latter as the possessor, which in Latin woiild appear in the genitive or
possessive case, as ^j jcj b^nda raja the treasures of the king, or, the
king s treasures, u:^ ^Jp<^ ka-tinggt-an latigit the height of the heavens,
^J^ ^l^ chdya mata^dri the brightness of the sun. In such com-
binations as ^j^\ ^jU. chdwan amas a vessel^of gold, c^b cl)^ kota bdtu
a fortress of stone, ^^ ^y tukang best a worker of iron, c^ ^\ tkan
laut sea-fish, ^ Aj rajajin^ king of xlemons, ^^^ ^ beniia china the
country of China, jU. <0l7 tdndh jdwa the land of Java, although posses-
sion is not strictly implied, the latter words would equally appear as
genitives in languages admitting of the distinction of cases. Certain
E e nouns
Digitized by
Google
io6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
nouns may» however, stand in connexion with proper names and titlesi
without partaking of any possessive sense, as ^ji ^y tuan putri the
princess, «X4^ i^ nabi muhammed the prophet Mahomet, jjJLt Jj
raja iskander the king Alexander ; and synonimous words standing for
the same object must of course be excepted ; such as j\:ub c^^^ ^yb titan
rimba belantara^ which signify a waste tract of country overrun with
woods ; ^^ ^jj ttrei kalambu the curtains (of a sleeping apartment).
A verb in the infinitive mood immediately foUowii^ a noun, partakes
of the nature of a possessive noun, and becomes subject to the same
rules, as ^j jcJ tanda beraht a token of loving, ^U^ iUj^ rurnah ber*
main a house to play in, or, a play or gaming house.
When a pronoun personal directly follows the noun, whether annexed
or otherwise, simple possession is implied, being the ordinary mode of
expressing it, as «.^^viJb ^U tartan amba my hand, Ji ujj rumah kamu^
or in the contracted form, ^^ rumah-mu your house, jGjb arta^-nia his
effects, ^Ji uJV ^^P^ ^^^ ^^ father.
When any one of the three contracted personal pronouns, c/ku, m
muj ^ nia is annexed to a verb, it changes its veri>al quality to that of
a noun, as ^ ^UoL c^ ^y buat^lah seperti sangka^mu tni act con-
formably to this your opinion ; ^^ t^^ jjj jU tidda layik rupa pakei-*
nia the style of his dress is not becoming ; ^bt C^ ^V ^-^J^ seperti
bayang juga ada-nia like a mere shadow is his existence ; Jfisi olJ
^^\j^ iif^^\J^^ ^} tidda ka-tantu-an pergi^nia dan datang-nia orang
ttu there is no certainty respecting the goings and comings of that man.
The natural order of words being so litde deranged in this language,
the occasion for any signs of agreement between the relative and its
antecedent is scarcely perceived, and their concord, like those already
described.
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. io;
di^scrlbed, is known only by position. The pronoun V^ tang^ when
employed as a relative, may be said generally to refer to the last preced-
ing noun, as ^^\y,^ Jji JU ^ Jy^s> y\ leji y\ ^Ji •^j^l orang hay a atau
ber-Umu atau budiman tang tiada layik per^budt-an-nia men rich, or
learned, or wise, whose actions do not correspond. Here its antecedent
is %jj\ orang men, from which it is separated by the intervening quali-
tives ; but most usually it is itself the next following word ; as ^^y %^y^
lJ^o «ix-i c^'i ^^\ ^ menolong perampiian tang ampunia Idki stidah
maii to assist a woman whose husband is dead.
The interrogative pronouns naturally precede the word which con-
stitutes the subject of inquiry, as aKc ^\ ^p^ nama-mu what is thy
name? the verb substantive ot ada is, being understood; ^ i^L^sidpa
tni who is this ? cl^ jU uJL^ sidpa mdu pergi who chuses to go ? But
the interrogative may be preceded by words connected with it in signifi*
catbn ; as c^l c-JL-i ^J^ negri sidpa itu whose city is that ? ^ i^Ju^
jkii gampar apa tang ku-dangar what clamour is it I hear ? Or with
an interrogative particle annexed, as uuo\ 4;\i1 jSy pulau apd-tah ttu what
island is that? ^ 4!^ Jj\ anak siapd^kah ini whose child is this?
Adverbs or modals as applied to modify the action of verbs, usually
follow them in construction, as Y^jbiJ aJi kdta per4dhdn per^ldhdn
speak slowly; ji:>^ uu^u nanti sabantar wait awhile ; f^^i A^^^ nU ^^ iya
tdu mem-bdcha bdtk-^dik he knows how to read well ; JIC ^U ifj^
iudah dbis sakdli entirely finished. But they may also precede the verb
and its nominative case, as ^J^ ^b 4^1 ^^Ua»-» santtdsa iya ddtang ka*
mart continually he comes hither ; ^JU-» uu-> \J^^J^ bfidru sakdrang
beta sampei it is but just now that I arrived.
As applied to adjectives they almost always precede in regular con-
struction.
Digitized by
Google
io8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
struction^ as ^^\) Jij ter-lalu bdgus extremely handsome, u^U ut-%cU
$angat pait very bitter, c^Uyu* ampir mad nearly dead ; but an em-
phasb i» sometimes given to the degree of qilality, by letting the adverb
follow the adjective, as i.-^L Ji/j^ besdr ter^ldlu sangai most eminently
&^^ 5 {j^ ^y {Ja^ ^^^^ pw^/A nlan doth white indeed ; u^^t j;jV ^
tvdng baniak amat too much money.
The variety of adverbs being unlimited, with many idiomatic anoma*
lies^ there is much latitude in the modes of applying them to these as
well as to other parts of speech, the knowledge of which must be acquired
by practice in the language ; such for instance as c^V^ ^U sdma rata on
a footing of equality, ^<t>U aU sdma mdnusia fellow*man, ^\^ J^ ^
tang Tndna gardng-an which^ I pray thee? jjuJ ^Jlio mengdpa tidak^
why not ? CJ/ (^j^ sMa pergi to go together. The term l^ mahd^
eminent or eminently (borrowed from the Sanskrit) is never used as a
distinct word, but only in imposition, as j^K^ mahd-besdr eminently
great, UU\f« mahd^muBdy or, more commonly, LUf<» mahamulid most
glorious. Thus also it is more usual, though less correct, to write ^|^
mahardja than ^J^ mahd-rdja*
Prepositions or directives are, in their most regular and ordinary ap-
plication, placed after the verb and before the noun, serving to denote
the course of the action as it respects the object, either to it, from it, by
it, or in any other ima^able direction ; as ^^JiJ Ji^ JU^ ber-jdlan ka-
pada negrt to walk to the town ; ts^l ^yl J\ ^*^^ j de suruh-nia akan
utus-an ttK he gave orders to the ambassadour; <j/tjj j\ ada paddku
there is to me, or I have ; ^^jb y^ u-^1 ^j oj j\ ada pada raja ilu sa^
buah negrt there is to that king, or, to that king belongs a city ; ^^ ^.^^
^\ cSi iy- mem-brJ hormat bagi allah to gjive honour unto God ; ,^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 109
^jj5' dijd ^llfj ka-luar dagang-an derUpada gadong to take out goods
from the warehouse ; ^ ^ jj;*) ^^j^ merCrima deri^ada tangan lakt-
nia to receive from the hands of her husband; ^l&^l 2\6^ ^y^^i de
masuk^nia ka-dalam astana he entered into the palace ; ^^^ ^j^ji itfJJ"^
de per-arak^nia ber^Jcoltling negri he proceeded in triumph round the
city ; ^A^j 4j\ ^^y.J *> de ber-buat ulih waktl-nia acted by his represen-
tative ; ^jiLS ifj\ ^y terbang arah ka-saHtan to fly towards the south;
Such is the manner- of employing prepositions in their plain signifi*
cations^ directed to material or sensible objects ; but in the progress of
language they seem to have been transferred from thence and applied by
analogy to verbs and other subjects of the understanding, to which an
ideal locality is thereby attributed; as^S^ ^ jfJcJ^s^^ iyd andak akart
ber4aycr he intends to sail ; j^jc^ ^ ^^y j de turun-nia akan mandi
they went down to bathe ; J\^^} J\ v-S^^^ ber-chdkap akan per-karja^ .
an to shew an alacrity for work ; 4UI d^ J^J u^ takut deri^pada
morka allak afraid of the wrath of God; "^j j5jj ^ju^^j ber-hentt deri^
pada ber-parang to desist from fighting; u.^^ dijj ^Ify ter^harigang
deri'^pada me^lidt astonished at seeing; jU ^b ^^Jsi\ antara ada dan
tiada between existbg and not existing ; ^l^ ^^LJUjUjb ampir meng-aUmg
niaxva-nia near to losing his life.
The two direct conjunctives, ^b dan and, and y\ atdu or, must, as
their use requires, stand between the words or parts of the sentence
which they are intended to connect or to separate, as kz^ ^b a^ bumi
dan latigit earth and «ky ; ^*\LJ^j> ^b ^^^ ^b ^ mSkan dan mtnum
dan ber^suka^^Mka-an to eat, and to drink, and to make merry; j^jytSj
C^\>j! ber-tidor atau ber-jaga to sleep or to watch ; jjcJ^ y\ lUyc (^^
A\^ meMg-alah'kan musuh atau ber^tunduk tcr^lah to conquer the
F f enemy.
Digitized by
Google
iiQ A GRAMMAR OF THE
enemy, or to stoop to him, conquered. It may be proper to notice that
the conjunctive ^b being always pronounced short, although written
with a long vowel, is throughout this Grammar and Dictionary written
dan instead of dan»
Of the indirect conjunctives those which affect the verb in its condi'»
tional mood always precede it, as ^|^ _^ ^^\Li sopdya katnt me-rasa
that we may feel ; ^^ o ^J^^ melehikan de larunia unless he run
away; ^U ^^^jj^ ^^ ^^jekalau tiUm mdu her^nidm saja if you mean
(mly to jest Many are employed chiefly to mark the commencement of
a paragraph, and are often written in ink of a different colour, as ^jy^^f^
st^ber^mula in the first place, ^yjt adorpun^ ^ bahtva whereas, \^Jti
lagirpun^ Jy ^J^ tambah-an puUij ^Jj^ sahaddn moreover, ^^^ ka^
tau-t be it known, um\ jj^ ^^i^ kamadian deri^pada itu furthermore,
subsequently to that ; and when a different part of the subject is taken
up, ^)'^;i ^(bu^y vl$U maka ter-sebuulah per^kata-an now it is rehted in
the stoty. Others mark the beginning of sentences, of which «IJU maka
is by much the most frequent, occurring, indeed, either as an adverb or
a conjunctive, in almost every line, yet scarcely admitting of* a transla-
tion. In the body of the stotence it may often be rendered by our
words " ere, before that," as ^b \j^ ^ CJio jjy o\ Jj \j^^ s*drang
halum mda pulang tnika lain orang datang one person is scarcely gone
ere another arrives ; at the bef^aniog^ by ^ now, but, and," or any other*
expUtive ; the employment of many of these redtmdut words serving
msrely the purpose of distinguishing the sentences and parts of seiUences
from each <Kher, ma language to which our sy^em of pointing is on*
ktyown. Other conjunctives, as Ai^y^juga x>r jua only, ^A,bl C^ Juga
ftH-moi tfaur ahme it ia^ affect princ^aUy the clase of periods, and lil^o
the
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE; itt
the formet* tire for the most part expletive. For the mode of applying
them properly or consistently with the received idioms, a modetate degree
of practice will avail more to the learner than many rules.
Interjections or impassioned exclamations are not, in any language,
considered as the subject of grammatical rules. In composition, how-
ever, which does not always represent the lang^age of nature, they are
thrown in (as the name imports) with sucH discretion as to prevent them
from injuring, if they do not improve the construction of the sentence.
The most common among them precede nouns or personal pronouns, ia
what would be termed the yocadve case if these admitted of declensi(»it
aiiid they frequently stand unconnected with any verb or other words, a9
C/\Si ^ hei bapa-ku my father ! CJSGi\ ^ ^^^ ontong^ku alas, my fate I
^j;-lX-i \jy^ *li niah kanCorang sakuR-an away, all of you ! Some follow
the interrogfitive pronouns, as ^^jc^ ^\J uJl apa gardng-an ka-andak'»
mu what, prithee, is thy wish ? Many of them are imprecatbns of bless*
mg or cursings and in imitation of the Arabian style, are connected with
the name of the Deity.
The foregoing observations apply chiefly to what grammarians consider
as the first part of syntax, or that which relates to the agreement of
words, as the second does to their government This latter term implies
an influence possessed by the one word capaUe of obliging another to
conf<»rm to it in certain particulars, such as person, gender, and number;
which ccmformity, in Laitin and Gre^k, is usually expressed by the ter-
minating syllable: but in a langu^ where no influence of this kind ,
prevails, nor any change takes place in the veri> or the adjective in
consequence of their c<HinexioQ in sense with an antecedent nominative
case or noun substantive, it cannot be said, with any practical or useful
^ meaning.
Digitized by
Google
Hi A GRAMMAR OF THE
meaning, that the one word governs or is governed by the other. The
«econd part of syntax therefore is not applicable to the nature and con-
struction of the Malayan language.
Of Dialects.
The general uniformity of the Malayan written language has been
elsewhere noticed, but the oral tongue, both in respect to pronunciation
and the use of peculiar personal pronouns and other words, differs con-
siderably in different parts of the East-insular region. What relates
therefore to dialect applies more especially to the latter, although the
former is not entirely exempt from variation in the orthography.
The most striking distinction of dialect is that of the mode in which
the short vowel (usually denoted hy fat'hah) which terminates a great
proportion of the whole mass of words, is pronounced in different dis-
tricts. At Malacca^ Kedah^ Trangganuj and generally on the coasts
of the peninsula, it has the sound of /7, as in the words C;.^4jh amba^ cj>^
kota^ c^l; rate, JIa^ kapala^ C^y^juga, whilst in the ancient kingdom of
Menarigkabau in ^xjMKTViAf as well as in the Malayan establishments
along the coasts of that island, and even in the interior districts of the
peninsula which acknowledge a political dependance on MenarCgkabau
as the parent state (according to the interesting notice by Mr. Raffles,
in his paper on the Malayu nation published in his Asiatic Researches)
these words and others of the same descripticm are made to terminate
with 0, and are pronounced ambOp koto, rato, kapalo, jugo. But how-
ever the question of originality may be decided, the claim of superior
authority, arising from a more enlarged intercourse with the rest of the
world and consequent cultivation and refinement, must be aUowed to the
dialect
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 113
dialect of Malacca,; and with regard to European philology, it has been
in a great measure fixed by many valuable publicalimis under the sanc-
tion of the late Dutch East-India Company, whose servants had oppor*
tunities of perfecting their knowledge of the language at those places
where it is held to be spoken in the most correct idiom.
V Other distincticxis of dialect may be percehred in the following varia-
tions of orthc^graphy and pronunciadon.
The change of ^^ m into ck and ^j, as ^^ chiichi for — ^ suchi
clean, ^^l^^ chtpak for ji^ sipak to kick backwards ; of ^ j into ^ ch^
as Jj^ chiipul for jj^ jiipul to befall, <,?/ kkkap for <-^ kgap a
twinkling, ul.o^ karchut for k^^^J karjut an aquatic plant ; of c-i 6 into
J u;, as ^jl^ chawang for ^U^ cfiabang a branch, (jL^jx^jawatXov c:uiW
Ji&/7; to handle, rjSt lawa-lawa for f c->!l laba-laba a spider ; of 4^ ^
into ^ m, a« j^^^ TwiitAF for ^j) buht froth ; ^^,4^ mambu for j^ hambu
arundo ; of c^ ; into ^ n and ^ m, as ^jJl^ ntpis and ^^J-^ mtpis for
1^^ /ipw thin ; of «_3 j» into «ju /, as J^y ^m^/ for J^ ^9^^/ to strike ;
iX ijLJ t final into i^ p^ zs (.JL^ H^/> for uuU ^J/ia^ lightning, u^U.
^Jt^^/7/i fi^r c:^^\t^ jawat to receive in the hands; of cl?g into c/ k (or
vice versa), as ^j^ kunchang for ^^ gunchang to agitate, cs^ ^^//a
for <^ ^rt/tf a couch, ^^jj' gundi for ^^jcJ ^z^n^ a water-pot, CJ^ baki
for cJj bagi unt6'; the introduction of a m or ^ n at the end of the
first syllable, as JUSf gombala for JlJ' gobala a herdsman, ^U/ /jm-
pjyflfn for ^U? tapayan a large jar, j^;^ kuntum for w/ ^iZ/z/m a bud,
jui luntar fory^ /5/i7r to fling, ^^ i!tmipii for ^^ lapis fold, _tw ^am/i?
for ^JU ^5/)? oxen, </j-^ kambtrl for ^^^ ^tf Ain castrated, ^^:^^ go»
mintar for^^ gomitar to tremble, ^y;^ tnuntah for ^ mw/^rA to vomit,
jB^ kunjur for ^j^ A^*2^r a lance, j««ji^ mensiyii for j;;«^ Tncsiyu gun*
G g powder,
Digitized by
Google
114 A GRAMMAR OF THE
powder, ^jsi^ jutfjong fior \^^ JHf^ to support^ jx^ ^stmdmk ftr
^y^ suduk a spoQDL It must be obsarvedi that in many of these Ittler
instances the word is. more generally written with the inserted letter thtft
without it. •
Amongst the words whose pronunciation VMie» whilst their ortho^
l^aphy is fixed, we may enumerate ^j^ Imtas and lintat throng, ^
lambing and limbing a spear, ^ lambong and liminrng the flank,. ^
lambei ^nd.limbei to beckon, ^^ iambang smd kumbang full blown as
a flower, i,j^ hanchap and hmehap an unblown flower, yuf. chmMr
and chumar foul, uu^l lamhiit and lumbut soft, J&;^ ^a^i^ and ^n/«/
mucilage, ^ /:^;iii and kennel hit, ^yj ttwrna and (by a vulg^ transpo-
sition) rum cdour, i^^ hormat and rdmat honour, «JCJ tfrti and rertl
ipeaning, (^ tfrt^i and retta efiects.
As being m some measure connected with the subject of dialect, it
may not be thought irrelevant to notice in this {dace certain peculiarities
in the language, hovcei^er difficult it may be to account for ihem satis-
factorily. The most obvious is that of the frequent^ smd as it may seem^
unnecessary use, in yrriting, of the harsh Arabic letter j ia the ter*
mination of indigenous words, which are, notwitfistanding, commcmly
pronoimced (unless in £armal recitation] with t soft vowel sound, as tundm
for jocJ tundtik to stoop, tabi for jib tabik compliments, bOda for ji3^
bUdak a youth, mabu for ^U mabuk drunk, niasu for jJU masuk to
enter, masa for jj^ masak ripe, ana fqr ^\ anak child i conformably
to the general smooth, nature of the language; &r, widi the exception ot
this anomalous letter, it will be found that nineteen words out of twenty
close either with a vowel, an aspirate, a nasal, or a liquid, and even
where a mute occurs in that situation it is, in familiar discourse, softened
intO'
Digitized by
Google
IHALAYAN LANGUAGE. 145
ioto a vowel or aspirate, as ameh for ^^ ama$ goid, dank for a>^
ddrat the shore, kreh for ^^ ^rtf^ hard, kulah for u:J^ ^^/^ a measure,
kulih for wut^^ ^/^ skin or bark, sakih fot L:u^sakit sick. If this
practice be a provincialism, it must be aUowed that in the coontri^
where it {prevails the people speak a softer dialect than where either
the mote letter or the hard guttural is retained in pronunciation.
The emfdoyment of the j as a final letter, although it is not found
an any other part of a genvune Malayan word, we may presume from its
universality to be as ancient as the introduction of the Arabic characteir,
but we have no direct pro(^ of its existence in the ond languagif of the
Malays previously to that period. There are not Wasttmg, however, some
{jlimpses of light to direct Our oiwnon as to its originality, tf not in this^^
in some at least of its cognate tcmgues» Although not firecjriendy occm''^
ring in the Batta^ Refgng, NU$^ or Lĕtmpung bo^i^s of Sumatra
and it0 neighbourhood, I find it to prevail in the dialect» of t^ Phi«
lippines, particularly the PanipOnga (of which^ as well a» of the
Tagala^ BisayOj and Yleco^ I possess eopieus dictionaries, both primed
and manuscript), and what is not a little remarkable, it it found ;ds0 ki
^he dialect of the great £ast*Insular, or^ as it has been terobed^ Polyn&k
sian language, 8ix)ken in the island of Mai^AOASCAB) where, for m^
«tance, the word ji\ anak child, is pronounced xaHachy according to
yLACOURT/ and aunacJti according to DRtjRY's very gesAltne vocabu-
lary ; ^U mdsak to boll, and also, ripe, is, in both these Ĕena^ mossac;^
jjj tuak the sweet juice of certain palms, is toak ; j^ chicMk the
house-lizard, is tsgtsac; jjc^. sunduk a spoon, is sonrwc. These two-
authorities (and they are quoted in prefierence to that of vbcabulauries^
fonned in later times^ by persons conversant with the Malayan) may be
admitted
Digitized by
Google
n6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
admitted as 6u£5cient evidence of very high antiquity in the use of thii
tenninationi as it must have e^Lkted before the separation of the tribe
which emigrated to an island situated at the western extremity of the
Indian seas» Of its general prevalence in modem writing I am myself
competent to speak, having in my possession a voluminous collection of
the correspondence of two eminent merchants (Gapt. Francis Light and
Gapt. James Scott) with the princes and chiefs (who, it is well kuown,
are themselves all traders) in almost every country where the Malayan
language is spoken.
Another peculiarity worthy of remark is an apparent disposition in
the laiqpiage to employ words nearly resembling, although actually dif*
fering in sound, but having no grammatical relation as derivatives or
otherwise, to represent ideas closely connected with each other in signi-
£cation. It is almost unnecessary to observe, that this is independant of
Che sameness in common orthography which frequently appears between
words entirely remote in sense^ and which should properly be, and some«
times are distinguished in writing by the application of supplementary
vowels and orthographical marks, such as ^^ best iron and _^ bisj
handsome ; ^xf bintang a star, ^uj bentang to spread, ^ biniing a
rampart, and ^a:^ bunting pregnant; ^^ bantun to pluck up, ji^
banUm the name of a city called Bantam, and jsjj bhUan the name of
an idand called Bintang ; ^ll« tnakan to eat, and ^U makin the more \
c^y buat or buwat to do, and cjy buta blind ; id^ biilih can, may, id^
bulah the whole, and ^j> biiluh the bambu-cane. These, in fact, prove
nc^ing more than the inaptitude of the Arabian alphabet to express the
sounds of a foreign language; for from that alone can arise any doubt
respecdng the sense of the words, their pronunciation being sufficiently
distinct;
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE- 117
distinct ; but in the following enumeration we shall observe approxima*
tions so near as to become almost equivocal, both of sound and sense,
without any regard to the characters, whether Arabic or European, in
which they may be written. This must necessarily be found embarrass-
ing to the learner, but rather after he has made some j^ogress in the
language, and is able to cope with difficulties, than in the outset of his
study.
Amongst many more instances that present themselves in the Dictionary
it will be sufficient to point out some of the most striking; as j^) layu to
fade, zndji layur to blast; ^^ golong to roll up, ^^ golmg to roU
about ; uJ^\ angkat to lift, tJD^\ angkut, to carry on the back ; j^U
jamu to feast, y^jumu satiated; ^U basoh to wash, U^ basah wet; ^^
tapak tfaie palm of the hand, jaJ tapuk to skp ; jli kandak a mistreM,
harlot, jjdT gundik a lawful concubine ; ^ kenchi a lock, ^^ kanching
a button, clasp;' e^l^ kdbut a fog, j\i kabur and ^jJi kabus dusL; A}
luluh mud, uuJ^ luhut to daub ; }^ ular a snake, u:J^ ulat a worm ; t jj^
rmdang shady, ^ lindong shelter; ^jio daun a leaf, ^b dahan a
bough; ^ tagoh or tuggoh stout, firm, i-a^T iagap stout, muscular";
uu^!^ kait a hook, crook, Jj\^ kail angling, Jjji cJ^ mata kail a fish4iook;
jjb balik to turn, and ^b balas to make a return.
By persons superficially acquainted with the language, the difficully^
of accouuting for these approximations will be resolved in a summary
way by supposing the one word to be a provincial corruption of tb«
other ; but I know them to exist in their separate meanings not only ia
the same spoken dialect, but also in works quite unconnected with that
dialect, and where the indiscriminate employment of the one for the other
«rould destroy the sense of the passage where they occ^r.
H k Of
Digitized by
Google
)i8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Of Prosody.
Prosody is that part of grammar which treats of the accent and quan-
tity or measure of syllables, and of their due arrangement in forming
metrical composition, or verse as distinguished from prose»
Of Quantity.
' it will not be necessary here to enter into the question of the difference
or the identity of accent and quantity, which has divided the learned
world; With respect to the Malayan it is sufficient to observe, that long
syllables^ or syllables containing a long vowel, are generally, though not
iidways accented, especially in a final syllable ; that when the first sylla*»
Ue of a dissyllable or penultimate of a trisyllable is long, it is always
accented, as ti^ bumh to kill, u^ takut afraid, J12^ kapala the head ;
that when both syllables are long, the former only has a perceptible
accent, as ^ 772^1! ashamed, ^^jU man come, J|^ <i2/Fdeaf ; that when
both syllables are short, an accent is in general ^ven to the first ; or, it
may be said, that in all doubtful cases the accent inclmes to Hjat former
rather than to the latter syllable ; as (ju^ lambat sbw, uuJ^ gUtUi to
change, J:^ kanal to recollecti but in certain words, as j^^ besdr great,
J^ kechil little, Jb balim not yet, a decided stress is laid upcxi the
last It must at the same time be observed, that the accent or syllabic
emphasis in Malayan words is for the most part much less strong than in
the languages of Europe.
It has already been stated that when particles are annexed to primitive
words in order to form derivatives, a prosodial change takes place, the
long vowel being usually suppressed or rendered short in the syllable to
which
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. ng
which it belonged in the primitive, and a proportionate length of sound
given to the short vowel of the other syllable. The rules by which these
changes are governed being of importance to the due knowledge of the
most artificial and delicate part of the language, must here be detailed
with a minuteness which their utility alone can excuse.
By loi^ vowels we are to understand, in our acceptation of the termsi,
the quiescent letters 1 a, j i^, and ^^ i, and by their being rendered shott
is meant that they ^ve place to their corresponding short or supplemen*^
tary vowels, /tf/-A/iA, dammdh^ and tesrah^ as will appear in some of the
examples hereafter given ; but as these people are in the habit (common
also to the Persians and Turks, and even to the Arabians themselves) of
neglecting to* mark these supplementary characters in their writings, the
vowel is in fact altogether omitted, and the sound only must be under-
stood to remain in the pronunciation of the next preceding consonant.
From the authority of such books as appear to be written with the most
itkill and precision, these rules are compiled, and they would be more
perfect if the native writers were themselves more ccmsistient with each
other.
The most general rule, but admitting of exceptions as will, hereafter
appear, is, that upon annexmg a particle, the long vowel in the first
syllable of the primidve, if a dissyllable, or, if a trisyllable, in the pe-
nultimate (the situations where they usually occur), becomes short, and
the short vowel (expressed or understood) in the second or last syllable
becomes long» Thus j^ kuda a horse, when the contracted pronouns ^
nia^ cJku^ or a mu are annexed in order to form the possessive, changes
the J for its corresponding short vowel dammahi the fat'^hah for its cor.
respondii^ long vowel t» and becomes ^loi kuda^nia his horse, cJ\^
kuda^ku
Digitized by
Google
120 A GRAMMAR OF THE
kuda-ku my horse, or J\^ kiida-mu your horse ; in like manner d\:f^jadt
to be, when ^ kan or a) lah arc annexed, becomes ^st^jadi-kan to
xause to be or happen, or dL^jadt-lah be thou! ob niata evident,
with ^ kan^ becomes jfb niata^kan to manifest ; ^ bini wife, with ^
nitf, becomes ^«^^ bint-nia his wife ; and thus also in trisyllables, ^^^
vieniusu to suck, upon annexing ^^ 7, changes the ^ of the original pe^
nultimate for dammah^ the dammah of the last syllable for ^, and be-
comes i^y-^ meniusu-t to suckle, and JLJ kambali back again, upon
annexing the particle ^ kan becomes ^jS^ kambaR-kan to restore. In
those complex derivatives which are formed by the successive application
of annexed particles, these particles themselves are affected by the same
rule as the primitive and undergo a similar prosodial change. Thus
when to the verb d^ buka to open, with the indefinite prefix j de^ are
annexed the transitive particle ^ kan^ the pronoun ^ niaj and the in-
tensitive particle 4 lah^ the combination becomes a)U^ J de buka-kari'
nia-lah he opened it; where ^ or (as a medial) j, being followed by
another particle, changes its short vowel for the t quiescent, in the same
manner as the primitive word ; and so also, in a less complicated instance,.
J:^^ kanal recollect, becomes 4)U:i o de kanal-nia-lah he recollected.
When it happens that the first syllable of the primitive, if a dissyl*
lable, or the penultimate, if a trisyllable, does not contain a long vowel,
that syllable remains unchanged ; but if the last syllable also be short,
the augment of quantity nevertheless takes place in it, as from jj pada
to, is formed ^a,U2? ka-pada^nia unto him ; from ^/a^ sempoma perfect,
is formed ^*\jJUmS ka-semporna^n perfection ; from is^ tantu certain^
^yJf tantU'kan to ascertain.
When the last syllable instead of being pure^ or conskting of a con*
•onant
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. iti
fonaiit and a vowel (as in the foregoing examples), is impure or dolxAd,
-coHsisting of a short vowel between two consonants of which the latter is
mute; (or, as we should express it, more simply, when the word enlk
with a consonant), that vowel, whether the preceding syllable be loi^ of
short, does not become long in consequence of the annexing any partiole
excepting ^ ari and ^u as in the instances of J-j habal ignorant^ which
forms ^^ babal-nia his ignorance; yj benar true, ^^ benar-tda its
truth ; cjU sarOng a scabbard, ^L sdrong-mu thy scabbard ; ^Ss tarigak
half, \aj^ sa^iangah-nid one half of it; and c^y tiirut follow, which
forms ^JJJy turut'kan to follow ; yet under these circumstances, although
the latter syllable cannot become long, the former, if long, may be short*
ened, as i^\ ulih by, per, becomes J\ ulih-mu by thee, per te ; ^y tiihan
the Lord, becomes ^ tuhan-mu thy Lord ; cJ^ J dakap embrace, be-
comes ^^^yj de dakap'P-nia he embraced. In this, however, the native
writers are not uniform, and they appear to write indifferently <djb;^
suruh'lah and j^^j^ siiruh-lah give orders, \^\ 4s$L sakit4ah iya aud
4^^ ^d^Jl» saktt'lah. iya he was sick ; although the latter should not be
considered as correct.
By annexing the particles ^ an and ^^ J, the last syllable of the word,
whether mixed or pure, that is, whether ending with a mute consonant
or with a vowel sound, becomes long ; it being understood, in the former
case, that the final consonant detaches itself fhmi the mixed syllable,
leaving it therefore pure, and connects itself with the particle; thus ^JbU^
adap before, when ^ an is annexed, becomes J\^ adap^n the presence,
although if ^ kan were annexed, no change of quantity would take
place, and the word would be ^jU ddap-kati to appear before ; ^^U
panas hot, becomes ^U^ ka-panas-an heat; J\ ator to arrange, becomes
li uj/J
Digitized by
Google
«u A GRilMMAll OF TH9
\)ji^} jKrm/Sr-tf7t artadgem^iit; ad \A^y0^ stanbut recdve,- witk ^ $
lammedy becomei «^^"^ sambut-i to t^cdyre^ as J^^ kaml to recollect,
fcecoiMt ^^jM J de komU-nia h^ recollected him, which with Ji kau
would be ^A^;iH j tfk AoM^ihm^M. It mart be obierved, that when the
«jrBdde preceding ekh^ of theee two particles ends with the quiescent
lettos t, j9 or c^i the character (') hammhf eqoivrient to a shorts, should
he placed after such letter» especially the ) ; or a (*) tah£i may be pbced
over the J or ^ which denotes their bebg repeated in the prontasdation;
as from 9£M kita toqpeak, ^'U kata^^nh speech; finem wM? tantu certaio,
:^*^ tardus or ^fa imOuwi to ascertain; from w^^pHfi praise, J^
fufi^n worship, 9Kk1 ^j^ p^ii^ ^ ^^ P^Vk/^ ^ worship ; which hot
jnode however is very yftusvial» and serves only to exemplify these dabo-
>nte niceties*
When both syllables contain bog voweU^ the Ibimer is shorteneci^
and the latter remains unchanged, as from ^U malA ashamed, is formed
^^ ka^maUMtn shame ; from ^j^ dirt self^ ^ dirumu thyself ;
£fom gpjU mart hither, 4jr^ nutri^lak come ! from ^ j^kei to wear,
Jjil pakei-an apparel
Whe» the word contains a short vowel in the (brmer syllable, and a
Um% vowel in the latter, both syllables remain unchai^d, being akeady
m the state adapted to receiving the particle, as ^,(^(4^ sampei^an to
caMe to arrive, from ^Ju^ s^m^pei to arrive ; ^jfi^ SMhS-an power^ froip
^^jiu^ mkti powerful (by supernatural means) ; ^a^j^^ de serburkmMiiM
he rushed on, fcom jji^ urbu torush; ^Jjjf^ mencherrti-kan to separate
j(tains.) from 4^j^ cherrei to separate (intrans.).
Sin^fde mcmosyllables eonsistiqg of two consonants with one inter-
mediate short vowel, sboold follow the rule given wit]^ respect to fin4
syllable^
Digitrzed by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAOE,. MS
^y)I^))Ies^o coxstituted, ^d become kmg cooily wh^n ^^ or |^ 9r« ^M^esfed;
find wb«n the iiUennediate vowel is already long, it should flo c?q|ipu9i
)iut words of tbif description are rare in the language» suoil denv!at;^i|ff
from them scarcely, if ever, occur. It is necessary kow^er to i^vntf^
4kat there ^e qoany words which in our orthograi^y hvf% th^e apfmavaAff
q( mmosyllablesi and seem to our orj^ms to be so prononnfie^ but wh^
lure considered hf the natives as being of two syliablw. Ampqg^ thsm
the most obvious are words compiencii^ with a qiute and R liquid» ?4 «^
^ give, ^^J pri maner, c>^ bT§t hf avy, ^ br€fs rfi:e, ^ ^^nf dry,
^ ^io^ the deconal adjum:t, 4^ bkk spUtj wfaiqh m^Ul witih^u^ i9piQr
ipriety be written ihu bfrMt kering^ bildJh and they aocQMKni^y fpllMT
Ihe rules of other dissyllables. So ^dfio the wwds j^ iM^ I» wtU (f9ins-
times wntten jiU TnoA^, ^ ton to kncur (written ^ («hnl^ 4$ fm^
thigh (written i(^li pamh)^ are not a)nsidefe4 af beiqg of one syll^hlf
only. It should at the same time bp remarked th?it it? vA 4#, wh^
upon annexing the possessive pconoun they und^fgo tbf prospdi^ pbfpge,
become ^ (sometunes ^^) his knowledge, and ^ his thigh ; Mnply-
jo)^ that the latter syllable of the primitives should bp ifritten witl^
fai^bah and not damma/h ^ might otherwise be presume
When a particle is annexed to a word ending w^th the aqiirate 1 hf it
is sometimee omitted, as ^«^r^ mcm-Jnda^km to discriminate, forxped
from ily; ^iiiaA to differ ; but it is oftener retained, as ii^ j^\^ m4ih^m
completioi^ from i^wi mdah done ; ^^ ptih-an choice, froi|c^ 4«$ piUh
to chuse. In the word ij^p\ amgrah4 he bestowed, the aspirate is
made to take its place beiwe» as in the other examples it follows the
Assumed long vowels. Although inaudible in (uronunciation, it aj^ars
to be conudered as anefecUve letter vi the application of these rules.
It
Digitized by
Google
«4 A GRAMMAR OF THE
It remains now to notice those changes in the length of the rowel
which take place upon the duplication of a word (a practice common in
this language), and which may be either accompanied by the accession
of a particle or not. In those instances where a particle is annexed, the
rules above explained apply tq them as to single words, and accordingly
ftxwn ^jj bunyi sound, is formed ^^^.^ ^j) bunyi-bunyt-afi musical instru-^
ments; from mL» se4ama as long as, ^uLl» se-lama^lama^nia since the
earliest time ; from ^ lain different, ^J^ Jiji ber-lain-ddin-^n various.
To account for the repetition of the letter ^^ in the second part of the
word, it must be observed that the former belongs to it in its primitive
state, and the latter is the long vowel which the last syllable requires
iipcm annexing the particle ^ an, the \ in the first being at the same time
suppressed or changed for fat-hah ; as lilcewise in the word ^^^ tiie^
nawdng'i to shelter, from c^ nawong shade, the latter j is the long
-vowel required in consequence of annexing the particle ^ u
But an explanation of the change of vowels where a simple duplica-
tion takes place, without any particle being annexed, is by no means so
obvious. In the instances of ^LX^ ber^bagei-bagei diffuse, from ^l»
bagei distinction ; vi/Xfl laki-laki male, from cfi laki husband ; jJttU;/
kanak-kanak young children, from ^\ anak child, it will be observed
that the first syllable of the primitive, when long, is shortened in the
former part ^of the duplication, whilst in the latter the word remains in
its ori^nal form, whether the last syllable be long or short ; and this
will be found to have some analogy to the first general rule respecting the
change of quantity m single words ; for as in this case the first syllable
is shortened upon annexing a particle, so in the other it is shortened
upon annexing a repetition of the word itself* It may be presumed that
there
Digitized by
Google
MAI.AYAN LANGUAGE t%$
there is somethiiig gFaitifyiog to the nr of t native in tUs metdad ditpo*
lition of the long and short «ounds, although our oim may not b^ sensiUe
tQ its advantages* In common writing, however, it is more usual to
mxA the dupKcatiw of the word bf th^e vK«) arigia or cipher, as f ^l,
fiJJX fj^Vt b^ the distinction is notwithstanding observed in pronun-
eittioa*
Such are ^e intncate rules faf wluch the changes of quantftjr in
words, upon the application of additionai syliables, may be said to be
governed; although in fact the rules themselves are no more than in-
ferences fnnn the practice of good writers ; and should they not be at
first inl^Hi^le to the stndaat, he should not on that account be dis-
couraged, as he may possess a very ^i^petent jkno^lfidge cf t;hc langus^
without having maateijod tbems their accurate em^oyment being oUiga*
tory upon th^e winter rather than upon the reader and trandator. I had
myself read mai^ book# before I thoi^ht of combining them into a
aystemt and [NrobaUy might hasw remained content to take them as I
fiiand thesi) had I not concrared the idea of rendering the experience I
had acquired, of use in the instruction of others.
It must be acknowledged that many <£ the ^ords are much disfigured
with ffespect to thieir on^al appearance, by the dislocation of the long
rowels, and for this reason perhaps as much as from ignorance, many
scribesi not particulaily tenacious ,Qf .covreet orthography, adbpt a degree
of licence, and do not scruji^le to introduce the Icmg vowels in placee
where the supplementary only should be expressed or understood ; writ-
ing jyxj tider for JLs tJdor sleep, c^ suka for dC suka glad, ij^yU
patiii for i^;^ patut ought, ^^ Km for v^ btni wife ; and in many
mstsmces it is difficult to say on which side die authorities preponderate,
K k as
Digitized by
Google
126 A GRAMMAR OF THE
as Jj bal^m or m^ balum not yet, j^^ diri or j^^j dirt self, cJU sagu or
^sagili sago. But this want of strict consistency will appear the less
remarkable when it is considered that the Arabic alphabet was adapted, at
no very remote period, to the language of these people, with which it
had no original connexion, that the art of printing has not lent any effec-
tive aid to fix a standard of orthography, and that so far as my limited
fesearches enable me to. make the assertion, the Malays have never
attempted to form a grammar of their mother tongue.
Of Versification.
' With respect to the second part of Prosody, which treats of metrical
composition, termed jJL J^ Mmu sidr^ although the Malays are pas-
sionately fond of poetry, and their language abounds with poetic works,
yet. so imperfectly has it been reduced to system, that it admits of little
being said of it as an art. By the natives themselves I am not aware that
any thing didactic on the subject has been written, and were such to be
discovered, it would prove to be nothing niore than a transcript from an
Arabian treatise; the source of all their modem knowledge. This,
mdeed, is evident from a passage in the celebrated Malayan work named
in Arabic, ^^Ul Js iaj asselattn or r^j; jLi u:*^ makuta segala
raja-raja the Crown of all Sovereigns (quoted by.WERNDLY), wherein
the author says, j^^ ^ ^^b IJa ^ J^3^ tZjjL^jtLL aU JL» 4/^f*« 4^^ 4i Joih
cs^t andak'lah iya meng^^tau^t segala Mmu sidr s^perii ^rul dan kqfiyat
dan lain deri-pada itu ^^ it behoveth him (the scholar) to be acquainted
with the whole art of poetry, such as metre, rhyme, and other matters of
that kind." The terms he here employs belong to the Arabian system
of prosody, which it would be superfluous to detail in this place. Those
who
Digitized by
Google
MAXAYAl^ LANGUAGE. tvf
/nho wish. td render themselves masters of it are referred to the Jractatus
de Erosodia Arabica of the learned CLARK£,.to the Grammatica Turcica
of the celeb^'ated MsNiNSKi, and to the.Disseitati<His on the Rhetoric^
Prosody and Rhyme rf the Persians, by Gladwin, whose most useful
labours have contributed eminently to facilitate the study of oriental lite*
jratote* The following observations are intended to be confined. as much
a^ possible to what is properly Malayan verse ; which, interwoven as it is
with the mannars of the people, must have been cultivated by them long
befcnre the introduction of Arabian literature.
The inore common terms for verse including rhyme, are ^^ s^a and
^}Li sayak. Rhyme, it must be understood, is an essential pait of every
Jkind of metrical composition, blank verse being unknown to the Malays*
Their poetry may be divided into two species; the jJU si^r or shiar
(often pronounced sayer)^ which they also name ^ madah eulogium,
and 2cv nadlam or nazam arrangement, and the jui pantun, which is
also i^uned kl^ seloka stanza, from the Sanskrit. The former compo-
sitions have a fair claiito to the denomination of poems, being usually
of considerable length, and serious in point of style. The subjects ; are
sometimes historical (as, for instance, a poem in my possession . on the
war between the king of Mdngkasar and the Dutch, under the famous
CoRNELis Spb£LMAn), but are oftener romances, in which supernatural
agency is a distinguished feature. Some of them contain panegyrics,
and others an unconnected succession of moral reflexions, the burthen of
which is the poet's complaint of the caprice and untowardness of fortune,
the evils attendant on poverty, the * unkind neglect of relations and
friends, and above all,, the dif&culty of finding liberal patrons amongst
the great. They are written in rhyming couplets, the lines of each
couplet
Digitized by
Google
ut A GRAMMAR OF THE
coopliit nmmog leii^wise, with a point, small corcle, or other mark to
denote the Interval, instead of hetng placed upMler each other, as in onr
poems ; the page by this means exhibitmg a douUe colutai.
The fumtun, seloka or stanza, consistmg of foiur shoit lines altemstely
rfaykning, b sentmtious and epjgranmnAic; but its essendai quality and
that from wiiCBce it a^uires its name, is a quaint ultusmh fay which it
a&ects to express more than meets the ear« The irrt two lines of the
quatrain are figimttive, contumng stmetimes one, but ofteaer two unco»*
neCted images, whilst the latter two are moral, sentimental, ^r amorouSi
and we are ted to eicpecA that they should exemplify and cons^ute the
af^ication of the figurative part» They do to in some few mslance^
but in gaeieral the thought is wrapt in such obscurity^ that not the
iaintest analogy between them can be traced, and we are even disposed
to dotibt Whether any is intended or occmis otherwise than by chance»
Yet (as Da« LsYBfiK has observed) ^ the Mahys aSege that the appli^
catioti of the image, maxim or stmilitude, is always accurate;** andilus
is in. some measme rnnced by the eaget* aitendota (surely not to be
excited by mere nonsense) paid to the poetical contests which give birth
to thete, often extemporaneous, pnxluctions, and the applause b estowed
upon such as, to the taste of the by-standen, contain the most witty and
pointed allusions ; for ^< these pantuns (adds the same writer) the Malays
c&en recite in alternate contest for several hours ; the preceding pantun
always furnishing the catchwcmi to that which follows, imtil one of the
parties be «flenced or vanquished.**
With regard to the metre of their poetry, it appears to be regulated
by the ear of the composer, rather than by rules previously established
for his guidance, and is consequently subject to much licence in the
disposition
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 129
disposition of the long and short, or, more properly, the accented and
unaccented syllables. But notwithstanding this, a general similarity of
cadence prevails throughout all poems of the same class, and the princi-
ples therefore on which the verse is constructed should not be considered
as an hopeless subject of investigation.
Whether there may not be a variety in the measure of the^^ siar or
regular poems, I am not prepared to say, but as all those in my own collect
tion are uniform in this respect, and as they also correspond with tlie
specimens given by W£RNDLY and LetbeK, it may be concluded that
any other measure is by no means common. The lines of which the
couplets are formed consist at the least of eight syllables, the most perfect
lines being those of nine and ten. Lines of eleven, twelve, and even of
more syllables occur, but they are unpleasing to the ear, and seem to be
the produce of necessity rather than of choice. These syllables resolve
themselves into four metrical feet, with a pause after the second. Of
the length and quality of the feet it is not so easy to judge as of their
number, and the result of my analysis, I am aware, may not prove
satisfactory to others. In order to place the subject in a point of view
the most convenient for examination, a few lines shall be taken indiscri-
minately from a poem, and to these shall be subjoined a dissection of
each in the usual metrical notation, here to be understood as representing
accented and unaccented syllables.
wj V y '^j^^ "^
«Ji
^,,1^ ^J ^^J ^i
u) W «A»^ «^»
$
J^j4 J^ji '^ t?-i^
(1C> «cj^ u>jA(^ Ji
$
(ZJ^Ji^jJu i^ji
s?^ J'j^. J"^ d"^
$
Pc^J^ii^\i
Lalu ber-kdta
raja
bangsataan
Ka-pada istri
tang
L i
dermawan
Isuk
Digitized by
3y Google
130 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Isuk kakanda ber^mam kthutan
Pergi m^n-charl per-burii^an
Putn borigsu menangar kata
Lalu meniahut sala suka
Baik-lah kakanda pergi segra
Amk palandok bawa'kan zaya
^^ Then said the illustrious king to his gracious consort, to-morrow we
intend to take our sport in the forest, in pursuit of game. Upon hearing
this, the eldest princess (he had married the seven daughters of his pre*
decessor) joyfully replied, " go without delay, my brother, and bring me
a young fawn.*'
The syllables of which these lines are composed may be thus noted^
agreeably to the usual pronunciation of the words, and to their order aa
they are expressed in the European character».
1. —-0« — o. — yo-r-o • 2. o — o— .Q.— 00— -o ♦
3. _Q o — y • o_y y_a . 4. _oo — O . — U — O .
S. *— w — 0. o— y— .0 • 6. — yy — y. — y— y .
7, _yy — y. *— o — o . 8. — «o — o.— yy — y
From this analysis it appears that the metre may consist of the following
feet : the dactyl (containing one long and two short syllables), the trochacus
(one long and one short), and the amphibrachys (one long between two
short), or, as the foot is not familiar in Latin verse, we may consider it
as a trochseus preceded occasionally by a short sylls^le. TUB disposition
of these feet in the line seems to be at the will of the composer, with
this restriction only, that the syllable preceding the pause should not be
accented. Let us now e}(anune the foregoing lines by the test of the
inferences here drawn.
The
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, 131
The first contains a dactyl, a trochaeus, the pause, a dactyl, and a
trochaeus ; the second, an amphibrachys (or a trochseus preceded by a
short syllable), a trochleas, the pause, a dactyl, and a trochaeus ; the
third, a dactyl, a trochaeus, the pause, an arophibrachys, and a second
amphibrachys ; the fourth» a dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, and two
trochaei; the fifth, two trochaei, the pause, an amphibrachys, and tro*
chaeus ; the sixth, a dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, and two trochaei ; the
seventh, a dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, and two trochaei ; the eighth, a
dactyl, trochaeus, the pause, a dactyl, and a trochaeus» It is proper to
observe, that Wbrndlt summarily resolves the whole metre into feet
consisting of a loi^ and a short, and a short and a long syllable, or, into
trochaei and iambi ; but he does not demonstrate their aptitude by any
scansion of the measure, and I have in vain endeavoured to reconcile
them to the rhythmus or cadence of the lines, which is, however, in itself
quite determinate, and not devoid of harmony. Its chief failure seems to
be owing to the too frequent coincidence of the words with the metrical
feet, both being commonly trochaei ; for, in our poetry, the distinction
between a rhythmical and a prosaic line, depends much upon the dividing
the syllables of our words, which are also for the most part trochaei, by
the contrary measure of the iambic feet of which our heroic verse is
composed.
In the pantunSy although the four lines of which they consist are
thrown into the form of a stanza by the alternate rhyming, the measure
is most commonly the same with that of the sidr (but with a more
frequent recurrence of double rhymes), as in the following examples :
jj ^ c^\^ ^jj J4-J * i>r^ J{V f^ *^^^
Kilda
Digitized by
, Google
138 A GRAMMAR OF THE
Kuda pulih etam kuku-nia
Akan kuda sultan iskander
Adenda etam baniak chumbu-nia
Tldak bulih kdta tang benat
^^ A white horse whose hoofs are black, is a horse for sultan Iskander.
My love is dark, various are her blandishments, but she is incapable of
speaking the truth.**
tr^ Up */- J^^j^ * Jy^ Jh uy j?^
Kalau tuan jdlan daulu
Char>kan saya ddun kambdja
Kalau tuan mdti daulu
Naniukan soya de pintu surga
»' If you precede me in walking, seek for me a leaf of the kamboja"
flower (plumeria obtusa, planted about graves) ; if you should die before
me, await my coming at the gate of heaven.**
^:>^ ^^ ^j^ ch ^ 4\J t?y ^^ Icjy.
C^jjU) t.::^ ^Uj cl^ ^ c;^U ^:;;^ CL?U ^
Burong putik terbang ka-jati
Ldgi tutur-nia de makan sumut
Bpi mdta jantong dti
Surga de-mdna kita menurut
" A white bird flies to the teak-tree, chattering whilst It feeds on insects.
Pupil of my eye, substance of my heart, to what heaven shall I follow
thee?**
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 133
^l y «XI jJl5;i jxJ * c^U utJj ^^-» ^y
Bras makan-^n perapaii
Btlik kechit ampayan kain
Tuan s'orang palita ati
Ttdak ber-paling pada tang lain
Btlik kechil ampayan kain
Be^kayuh ka-pUlau lorang
Ttdak'lah ber-paUng pada tang lain
Ujad pada tOan s'orang
<^ Rice 18 the food of pigeons. A small chamber (serves) for a ward-
robe. You alone are the lamp of my heart, to no other shall I direct
my view. A small chamber (serves) for a wardrobe. Row the boat to
pulo Lorang. To no other shall I direct my view, existence being with
thee alone/*
The fancy and talents of a poet might perhaps embody these rhapso-
dies with connected sense, but in a prosaical garb they can only expect
to be noticed for their singularity. Their measure, which is our present
object, will be found to embrace the same number and description of feet
as those lines which have been already analysed. Some variety in the
number, length, and arrangement of the lines in a stanza may be occa*
sionally met with, bkit they should rather be considered as the irregular
productions of poetical license, than as constituting different species of
the pantun. Such, for instance, is one of eight lines, in which the first
Mm rhymes
Digitized by
Google
134 A GRAMMAR OF THE
rhymes with the fifth, the second with the «ixth| the third with the
seventh) and the fourth with the eighth.
To those who cannot read the Malayan words with snflBcient fluency
to judge of the measure, will acquire no inadequate idea of it, as well a)B
of the cadence, from the following doggerel stanza, altered from the
well-known original, for the purpose oi exemplifying the weak syllable at
the end of every line.
Mild Ar I cadians | ever | blooming.
Nightly I slumbering | o^er your | cattle,
See I my ig | i^Ue | days con | suming
Far I dfstant | from the | fields of | batUe.
Of RJ^ffne.
It remiains now to make a few observations on the subject of rhyme,
esteemed a necessary part of the constructure of Malayan verse. What-
ever advatitages may attend its use in other languages (and though diflB*
cult to account for, its pleasing efiect can scarcely be denied), they are
here much weakened by the circumstance of the lines terminating with
unaccented syllables, . and its being held sufficient that in these alone
(especially m serious poems) the resemblance of sound should take place,
without any reg^ to the preceding accented syllables of the same words;
The rules of thid art, as of many others, are theoretically borrowed from
the Arabian poetry, but as the words of that copious and energetic
^guage, as well as of the Persian, frequently end with a strong syllable^
those rules have no practical application to Malayaii verse.
The rhymes most frequendy occurring are those of the shcHt or sup-
plementary vowels, with which so large a proportion of the words con»
elude
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 135
dade (and to which may in no small degree be attributed the softness
of the tongue), without any regard to the preceding consonant We
accordingly find the word ii>^ kata (or more properly its final letter)
rhyming with \^ diya^ vlC suka with cbU viata^ J^ btla with ^b
taniaj or any other words terminating in the vowel fat^hah or even in \j
which, although long in that position, would not be therefore accented
So also the word J\C sakaU rhymes with c^U 5/i, ^y; bumi with jW
jadU as wen as with ^^ji putrid ^j:Ji istrh ^^ talii and any syllable
ending with HjjS kesrah or with ^^. And in like manner the word Jyb
ulu rhymes with J^m daiilUi Ji Idlu, ^ temu^ y^ adu, and all syllables
endiiig with dammah or with y
When the rhyme is between syllables ending with a consonant (ren«
dered mute hyjezni) there must be an accordance not only of the final
consonants but of the jpreceding short vowels, as in c:^1j ddrat and
uiJljS pmgkaty ^y tuan and j)^ titany ^sJ tttah and ^^ susah^ ^1
abang and ^ kanang ; nor is the rhyme thought to be vitiated when
fay the accordance of the first consonant as well as of the vowel and the
final consonant, an identity instead of a likeness is produced between the
terminating syllables, as in the case of ji>.jdlan and J^ biilan^ J>^^
ka-sukat^^an and ^JL» salatariy ^j^ kurus and ^^U harus, ^^ kambang
and ^^ tambang. This last, according to our own rules, would be
considered as a perfect double rhyme, and such occur very frequently in
the pantunsj ^ving fluency and vivacity to their lines, but the coinci-
dence, of the penultimate syllables is not deemed requisite even in those,
and in the more extended compositions is rarely to be found.
It must be allowed that when we examine the rhymes of the most
correct Malayan poetry, many irregularities or deviations from what
may be regarded as the general laws, are discoverable ; such as words
being
Digitized by
Google
136 A GRAMMAR, ^c.
being made to rhyme with the same word both ia sense and soond;
others, to rhyme to the eye instead of the ear, as ^^j^ art with ^\J
pakei^ %j^ orang with \jif kurong ; short syllables, with long ones both
in quantity and accent, as yy tolmg with *^j3^ gadong^ ^^ titan with
^\k^ $etan\ words ending with^ r or with m m, to rhyme with those
endii^ in J / or with ^ n— -but in the earlier days of our own poetry
were not offences as great as these committed and overlooked, and how
many ages of progressive refinement did it not reqmre to bring our
metre and our rhyme to their present state of comparative correctness?
In order to enable the learner to apply the foregoing rules and obser-
vation» to the practice of the language more fully than he could have
the means of doing from the occasional short examples ^ven in the
course of the Grammar, and to supply in some degree the want of books
printed in the Mahyan character, as well as the scarcity of manuscripts
in any other hands than those of the natives, I have judged it indis-
pensably necessary to snbjom for his use, a Praxis, consisting of extracts
from several of their works, both in prose and verse, which will serve
to exercise and promote the skill he may have acquired, until oppor-
tunides us^ afforded him of having access to more ample and more
ori^nal sources of information.
PRAXIS.
Digitized by
Google
137
PRAXIS.
Letter from the King of Trangganu to Capt. Francis Light
of Pulo Finang.
j^ ^Ci^ cu^ ^jm) ^^JUijji:^ Mf^d Jb 4JU ^b cu%9^ ^b cui^t^t ^^
^j,b ^,j-a-» Jj li^LAfC Ci^ ^-^^ ^^ i;;»^ bV«> J«> c;^' chV^ Aj^ fcl
4«Jj];; c:^ jj;;^ c:^i« 451 ^^ ^J \Ji Jj f^ ^j1 ^b ^1/>^ ^^^ di^^
^^^C:^JU J ^b Uj |Jb eW^^ "^^ u;^^^^^>> ^ u^<> i2)UULi ^'Uu^ (^b ^Li^ ^S^
i)b1 u-A^ (jmU** ^t^ Ajfi« ^li yjM^j ^Uj 21^ ot ciX^ ^^JU J^ oijJ ^
J Jb^t uuJ^ ^jfS jLi^ ^ 4^j^ ^^ jV "^^ u>^ 4]bufi ou.^ ifjj^ (ju%^
JW cplj.^ ^^V «^ «1^ (:^ ^ <-^ umW^ 4iJcji ^xJ ^^ ^JU^ ^\ ^jAmt^
^ Jij ,^JjS^ »jya 4JU^ fcriUiW' 4;:^^ ^1;1(;J ^^,JC OJ vj,^tCJ ^b Ji^ ^1^1
^^ Whereas this friendly epistle, having its source in a pure mind, comes
from his gracious majesty Sultan Manmr Riayat Shah who is seated on
the royal throne of the kmgdom of TrarCgganu^ the abode of peace ;
N A and
•v-\
Digitized by
Go^Ie
138 A GRAMMAR OF THE
ind may the Almighty Lord cause it to reach the hand of our friend
and favourite, the Governor of Pulo Ptnangt who, in the enjoyment of
tranquillity, friendship, and health, resides within the territory of the
English Company, and exercises the functions of a government renowned
throughout the Eastern and the Western countries ; who is valiant,
powerful, discreet, faithful, intelligent, and wise in managing the con-
cerns of his friends and connexions in these parts ; who is endowed with
finnness and constancy, and at the same time manifests a mild and gentle
nature in his transaction^ of reciprocal kindness and accommoclation wich
all the (neighbouring) princes^ and chiefs. May God increase his lan'k
and honours ; may he bestow upon him fame, consequence, and glory ;
may he bless him in this world with length of life, and protect him from
every kind of danger and mischief unto the last period of his existence.
Furthermore, be it known to our friend, that we have directed Seiyid
Abdullah and Nakhoda Bawa to proceed to the country of KUng (coast
of Coromandel) to bring away a ketch*rigged vessel bekmging to us*
When, through the favour of God, it shall arrive at Pulo Ptnang^ we
beg of our friend to furnish assistance to those persons in all .their con*
cems of business, and especially in case of sickness and di£Elculties, and
also to give orders for their sailing immediately upon the change of the
monsoon* Th^re is nothing whatever that we can present to our friend
as a tokenjof remembrance, excepting a piece of 6ne calico* This letter
is written on the 15th day of the month Safar^ being the first of the
week, in the year (of the hejrah) 1200 (an. Ch. tjSsy*
Extract
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE 139
»
Extract of a Letter frpm the Same to the Same.
yh C^ ^ (Mj ^^p\ l,^ 4\j\ C^ cu^ c^U* ^\J ^^ y, ««^
UJ^ uX. «^J fcl^ ^ ^ yy ;^j^ y^j i?,^ ^^^^ yj^^. c^\jiij
t/ ^ «=^3 ^ uyt^ e>*^.<^^ jjAy^ yl^J ^^ ^U c^j ^ jij^ jj^
<14« u,y «fc^ C^ cs--^ Air ^U^ ^L^j «^j J5r ti^Lr j^-j^j JliJL cy,^a
e,lt^ vis:. gr> uJI;-* ol ^^ ^U ju-U «/1 «y- iliU ^^ ^U j-U *,j^
d.J>^'^ fc! urri» jj^^V «^ «^>j- 4^ e»i^ yitv ^^j» ^ ^\ Jj^^ ^^^
V wy «^ ud»»^ «-^ cr-^ u^ ^»^ «-^^ en;*' «^ eiWy J t:Xo ^ j»Jt u^t
*>>- «u«r e>AI ^\^ y, \jj^ a^ ^y^ ^bj ^ ^ u;^j J^^ ^\^^
jjb^ fc» j-a» cyjo^ <Jl- ^\ iiyir «Uil vl^ JjK jj!^ ^^,0*^ «U^^jl CS^ jV
*^j- L/'J^U'*^ i,^ v^. J\^ CJ^ ar^\ J^t^ jjoft «u^ ilsi c:^ t^^
t,> erJ' «^<>— «yjo» «^W" w^ «1^ ^>yj *--*» «IJ^ Jltv ^l^ 4) ti^,^ jU,
«-.lap ^ ,^, y;.^ 4,31 J^j^l r JIC jil^^ ^> ^lio ^^0 ^U Jlti, ^1;
" Moreover we desire it to be known to our friend that an English
Captain named C, commanding a small ship with two masts, arrived
here from Bengal, bringing a letter from the raja (Governor) of Bengal
addressed to Us, which we received with all the ceremony and respect
due to letters from great princes, as well as with mucii pkasure and satis-
faction. This letter expressed a desire that we should, render assistance
to the daptain, which was accordingly complied ¥rkh io every particular.
Somt
Digitized by
Google
140 A GRAMMAR OF THE
»
Some days after his arrival he requested permission from us to bring his
vessel into the river of Trangganuj in order to repair some damage her
copper had sustained by striking on a rock in the Bay of Bengal. Such
was his statement to US| and we, believing it a just one, allowed him to
enter the river ; but he had not been long there when he began, clan-
destinely, to sell opium to inhabitants of the place, other than our autho-
rised trader. The quantity sold was six chests, for which he received
payment in pepper and gold. This transaction coming to our know-
ledge whilst the vessel was still in the river, we caused the people who
liad purchased the opium to be turought before us, and these pointed to
Captain G. (as the vender). Being herein guilty of a serious offence
within our reafan, it was our design to inflict a punishment upon him ;
but from the consideraticm of his being under the English colours, to-
gether with his having brought a letter from the raja of Bengal, we
refr^imed from doing any thing whatever to him. As it respects the
raja of Bei:^ we feel much delicacy, and now request that our friend
will dispatch a letter to him on the subject, in order that he may never
allow that Captain to come again to Trangganu. Such is the business
we have to make known to our friend.*' (It may be presumed that the
letter in the Governor's name was an imposition.)
Letter from SUdagar Nasr-eddm to Captain Lioht.
yh o& jj ii)U* j^ Jib Sjoi^^ ^t^,AjU« ^b ib^Afj ^Uj 5\^ 4)1 cJXi ^Uj^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 141
C^^tf^ fJ/jS"-^ CJ^^ir* y^ *~^ bM <-Hj '-''•^^ *** ^^y* ^y 2:^ «l^V {tS J«^
^ ojj^ CSJj ^ cyjJ j^y *y ^^ ja««« ^^ tl^ clh Jj 4lfl«--» yb 4_,v«jb
^U) d« jjyl^ u>j1 y(!^ t* \^^y^ S-*** <^^ WJ* 'r-?-' t/ »^ "^^ tir^^
cy*^ tL^V ti "^' \/^<^y^ S-** ''iil^ V^ d»/*r ^^ ttjd^ W *W tt;?>5» tt;i^
jiiXe^ ^JU-. «uif- fc£-o^ j*^ JU- dt*^ (ix« |»ji*« jJ uyy^ y^ \j^ ^*^
y^ ^^"-^ J*^^ *-^ <«U ^^ ^'^^ ^} ^J- ^y^ *-sj!^^ y^'^ ^.fAi» ^Jlw 4UlUjt
^ u;*»' v/» chI '^'-*'* L»^ *^iJ V^ ^J* (^ **-^' b'V ud'^ e;*'^'* vj^r»
^j; ^, ^t J yU ji%^ u^J Ji^ i/w J-J^ CJ:* v/i- Jij (^ -JjS u4" ch];
44t yU li^ ubji)!;^ jl») Jy». 4jj; oU ^ JU jj,b J-*!j;U «.-Afcyl^j*) Jj^
uj*4^ u/**^** J**" 4^ «^^ '•^' tJ^** cAr* '-r*<* ^y y^ «-r**» «J^ t?» ^<i
o5 d^ iJ-J c:A;'> wA< .dM JU ^ ii^ *i^ ^ 4il; 4L^ j^ jV»>
^iiib t^ JUjJ j^b j2J tl/Jfc Aj>j^ ^j^ ^^ C^ d»J;0 \zi\ *J>f yU» c;-,*» jjyJU
\^ji^ J^by^^^j y^ «-" c>i^ j^. 'iV *^ t^yj»j^>^'"«i JIj?-
4mu. fci^l <i(;» jAJb ti «^1 H?jtj jL. <i,'lLi;» j-i jL. yb yb «»-v«A ^j^o
ji-«i_,V jJb v-^ 4^ cn^^ *^:A* *i^* u>^ K}^J\d^ ^ Jj!^ y^ *--*»
J^CJ^^>^/J^,^j>Jy.>^J^Sc^y^/^x^y4j!*^^^^%!
^b 'e^^ J\^ c^- y oU jCl^ jV «^r» ^j? *^" J^ «J^ t^> J^" ti J'^'^
^^j y\j ^oAfc ci^ yb d^JJ jw jU »A-. jl^ yb ^jU« jJ jj,^l ^b J j^-j^ yL
« Whereas this letter comes from me Datu Siidagar Nasr-eddin, of
TrarQ^ganil, and may the Lord who created the world caose it to reach
O o the
Digitized by
Google
142 A GRAMMAR OF THE
the presence of his honour the Goveraour who holdfl the chief com-
mand within the territory oT Puh Pmangj heitowuig upoa hkn dignity
and happiness to the latest period ^ his life. Moreover, be it known,
I pray, to his honour, that if it he agreeable to hui, it is my request
that he should make the purchase of a ship. She should be a new one,
about two or three years trid, oT good qualities, and ciqiable jo£ loading
sdxMit three thousand five hnadred pikuU It is proposed that his honour
«hould take one third share, Mn F. one third, and myself one third.
It is further desirabfe that Mr. F. should provide m good crew for her,
and stores such as are proper fer a «hip <sf war. My reascm for making
% point <X this is, that at the present thne «he seas «o the eastward are
«iftremdy foui («nch infested with pirates), whieh renders good anmu-
otion essential; for the practioes of the Malays are well known to his
honour. Now with respedt to the ship if, with the Uessiag of God,
she arrires in safdy at Trar^anu^ it ts my intention to embark ep her
myself, and proceed with her to the other nde ^eaatwaxd) 4)f the kmd of
BX>iii7EO. Mr. F. should hide on her an In r estm ertt of doths to the
amount of idbout four or five thousand mpihs, and abotrt four hundred
chests cf P^tna opium. On these goods i am wTliing to pay a premium
of thirty per cent., valuing the opium at three hundred and ihirty-ffivs
dollars the chest Upon the ship's arrival here I shall take out cf her
such articles as will sell in the Trariggdnu market, and such as are net
suited to it, I shall take with me on the voyage. Beside these I shall
lade on the vessel the goods i may have on hand. Now as to the profit
that may be obtained on the goods carried to the eastward for sale, it
may be shared amongst the three. This plan, in my opinion will be
more advantageous than that of proceeding to China, as pepper and
tin
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 143
tiu fetch a better price at TrarQ^dnu than at Pule Ptnang. (The
ibrce of this ai^ument is not obvious.) If these proposals should meet
with his honour's approbation, I beg he will write to Mr. F. requesting
hiin to put Gaptaia CAEiKEOI£ into the eoflunand of the «hip, he being
a person with whom I can oonyerse, aad to whom I have already com*
nHinicated every infooBatigo respectiDg the trade at ail those plac^
which wc now propidse to vittt. Wkh r egaid to the opium I may carry
to the eastiward, I thttok k will fatch iomx hondr^ dollars the cheM.
When the tcading voyage to the ^astwavd has beeo completed, and the
«lop isetnrM to Trmgghm^ t}xm aiticles of produce, «uch as pepper
and tin, lliat may remaiii on hand after the sailiog of all the vessels (<>f
the season) fen* China, *can be shipped for Bengal; and thus two or three
foofits may ht Made in the covlx^c of the one ytear ; as his honour well un«
derstands. tie should, if he approves of it, dispatch a letter to Mr.
F. in order that he may immediately take the necessary steps against the
arrival of Captain Carnegie. Finis. Written on the twenty*sixth
day of the month Muharram in the year 1206 (1791)/*
EiUract of a Letter from the King of Trai^ganu to the Same.
j,^ jfcUpj cu^ ^^^ dr^ ^^^^ ^^ c^^jiSje^'^ ^j^Jhji
«X»
Digitized by
Google
144 A GRAMMAR OF THE
<< We have now to communicate to our son the ev^t of Suddgar
Nasr^ddin*s return to the Divinity, leaving a transitory world for one
4hat is eternal. Upon the occasion of his death we had already for-
warded an express by land (across tho penmsula) describing, for the
information of our son, the trouble and affliction into which we have been
thrown by this visitation of Divine Providence. With respect to the
concerns of our son, let not his loss make an alteration in any one trans-
action, but (on the contrary) let us proceed in the same path of reciprocal
accommodation on every needful occasion, with frequent and uninter-
rupted exchanges of communication ; for Traiigganu and Pub Pinang
should be considered as one/'
Extract of a Letter from Sudagar Priya a relation of Siidagar
Nasr-eddin.
C/^ CJJ^ C^J j;^ jJjJ 'iij^jiji ^i^\ tS^ *HP <-^ '^ ^J^ e)W ("^ \Ji
^*ta>.y v.:UcU Jijd J^jI j^^} '^J ks^jfi^jL* Jjj\ iCJja CS^ 4H iAm^} JU«^
^jj\ ^^Mji*ii3 Uu* ^iJ^J ^^ ^^ ^«^ *^^ ^y, (-^1 <1^ ^'^«A^ Jl<3
CS^ IJ^ iS^ ^jj c;^^^ J^*^ (iH*^^ *^ ^^ *^ ^(J^^ J^ {J^^ "^^^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 145
^y JcX^ rji\ ^J^ ^\^ ^\^ JU*U jV Jjj* <^s-^< •> cH^ uJ* 6^ ^^^ J^
jbt ^jfjl c:j|^4> ^^\ jJjI JU 4iX« ^jjS^ <^4f^ ^^ <P^j^ fi^J^ \jj^ t:^'*>
^< Be it known to my respected elder brother that I sailed from Puh
Pmang and proceeded to Pmik^ and upon my arrival there travelled
into the interior country, afud from thence descended into the country
inland of P^Ain^ (on the eaJstem side of the peninsula). My journey
for about two months lay through the woods, but, by the assistance of
God, I at length reached Pahang. When I arrived there I heard for
the first time the intelligence that ^my elder brother, Sudagar Nasr^
eddirii had been received back to the mercy of God. From excess of
affliction my soul seemed to take its flight. But what help was there for
it? Such was to be his fate, and the decree of the Divinity was exe«
cnted^uipon his servant I then sailed from Pahang for Trarigganii^
and upcKD my arrival there >ny grief was augmented on beholding all the
children of my departed brother left as orphans, his house standing
empty, and all his goods and effects carried ofi*~ and lodged in the pa«
lace. Even the wearing apparel of his children had been in like man-
ner convey^ to the palace, as were all his keys. Upon my. appearance
(although the legal representative of the deceased) not one article was
Pp restored;
Digitized by
Google
146 A GRAMMAR OF THE
restored ; but only his Majesty gave orders that I should take the trade
into my hands and buy and sell (as usual) ; but every piece of goods I
might wish to draw from the warehouse must be made known at the
palace; when the keys are to be brought, and the doors opened by a
person sent for that purpose. This conduct towards me is that of half
confidence and half distrust* Such is my present state; but by the
blessing of God ^^Imighty I intend in the course of this season to re-
quest his Majesty's leave to retire, and to return to the presence of my
mother and all my brothers. Written on the twenty-ninth day of the
month Muharranij in the year 1207 (1792)." (The king, whose agent
he was, having undertaken to make good all his mercantile engagements,
judged it necessary to secure the property. What relates to the family,
if oorrect, derogates from his charac^^r for justice; but the circumstances
may be exaggerated.)
Extract of a Letter from the King of Pcrak to Captain Light.
Jy «J^ oiM' ^ ^^ li^ijyt*^ JV '^ <i«^ *-^ (i>s^ Ji» "^^ <M u«* ^^
«-•< J^" ^ ^ •-»*b- »iX- JiJ «wj ^1 tlX^ws-ol yyUjJ J\ jM^j \^j\
jyijj^ ^lijofc C^ 4ail ,j^ yj* jjs* i^p «IC is^} u,/^ ^^ji JtSI u»J
«tf-oi jo-^ cX. ^ *j ^V c^j!P«* ^ ^ J^ r^" ^4^ jV JJA* «-i^
'<*>
-^ :>
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 147
i5b JiJ^ /U ^ Jy JaU \^y jjj ^Jj jjb J uiU ^j^^. c:u-^ lU? C^
or?^ ^j^ J'j^ Jjf s^-A ^-^ "^ byi? ^yr J^ uAt^ j^^ c^' ^ <-=i-^
" With respect to the Govemour^s overtures for a friendly intercourse
with us, we are much gratified by them, and sincerely desire his friend-
ship ; but the circumstances of this countiy of Perai may be compared to
those of a beautiful woman, who, beautiful as she is, has a husband, and
that husband happens to be extremely jealous. There is a person, how^
ever, who notwithstanding this pays addresses to her. She is enamoured,
but the husband is violently severe. AVhat the situation of the woman is,
such is that of the country of Perak. The Governour wishes to be on
terms of intimacy, but the person whose severity is to be apprehended
is well known to him. Furthermore, with respect to the gendeman
lately arrived from Bengal, who desires to be furnished with young seed-
lings of the Sago tree, in order to his taking them back with him and
planting them in Bengal ; such not being procurable at Pulo Pinang ;
our attention has been durected to the Govemour's wish, but these plants
are very scarce in the country of Perak ^ and the soil where they grow
very dear. Written on the seventh day of the month SawaU being
Monday, in the year 1201 (1787)."
Letter from the King of Silarigur (Salangore) to the Governour
General of Bengal.
ik^ ^\j^ j^ 4/J-. cJc^ jj^ ijdf^^jj c^;ij jJU] iijj^ tPy bj^J^jit
Digitized by
Google
148 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^jDy^j\i^jjcLi i^Jj j*X;j Mj)}^ |Jb J fJ^J v; )V ., |Vff ,ii cu^ tr^V*> j^d'^^ t^ U^^-A^
i;j^ ^ c^^-i*% ui-s^ ti ^y ^-^ cJ^ cr^ ^^J^ J*^ 4/^ j*^ |Jbj ^^j^
ji\^ ^^ j»U^-i ^W jJb u/^ ti t?''*^ <J^ c^jl^ u'*^ iji^ ji^ J^ «^
<^i-^ ^j^) er^ tr»l; *«>J ^j;^ e)^ jV (Ttr^ ^ er^'*> j^^j <-^^ £j^ <«Jy-e ^i
^!U u^ ^y 4l$U (j:^! jjjJ jrjuuj J^op J^Lfi^ 4]t C;.v«Jb jL» ^^yj
4,y ^ CJ|^ J^4> u^ (;j-* CJ>;«-i JU ^j^t^ ViS^ (^Ut^a^ oi^ jjJy jiC
4^Jj «XA^ ^L <u\^ 4>t ^ij^ ks^ (j:^y^ \i)];i^ y^^ \j\ {J*H^ «.s^b u:^ 4^<xJ
^J v;>jJ cs.-^ iXi^ Jkfi^^^ dHt:^ c^jy J*> i:^ v:)^^ *^^ U^*^ ^ ^-^^
^b ^ ^ j<j ^j;)\ (jsP^j» ?/>- cpjjj» <^-i^ ^^ ^jSA^ <-r^ ^ f ^>-
Jl^ g?jU w^JU^ JbS^ j^aL (rf;-^^ u-Jbj ij^-y ^ji^ j^rV tH^i*^ ^-^ •■^ ^W 4!^
I r ♦ ♦ i^ ^Jj lJ^ Jiy ^U «^^ ^] ^^jU a5?^
<^ Whereas this sincere and friendly epistle comes from the presence
of Mnlana Paduka Sri Sultan Ibrahim the khaU/ of the Faithful,*
T^ho holds his court seated on the royal throne of the kingdom and
trading city of SHarCgury the abode of propriety ; and may the Lord of
all worlds cause it to reach in safety the hands of our friend the General
who governs the port and country of Bengal, together with all its bays
and coasts ; who is faithful and wise, liberal to the poor and needy, and
who affords protection to all merehants arriving and departing ; who re-
sembles a lofty tree in the midst of a plain, the branches of which are
shady, the scent of its blossoms flagrant, and its. fruit pleasant to the
taste ; beneath which the servants of God find shelter, satisfy their hun-
gier, and astoagc their thirst» Furthermore we transmit this leaf of
paper
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 149
paper to our friend to make known to him that of our former letter we
have not hitherto received any acknowledgement whatever, and also to
state our desire, that if he has any favourable regard for thts country of
SUarigiir^ he will, as soon as possible, snpply us with the Company's
colours, and the necessary instructions, as a token of our mutual friend-
ship ; and with respect to the export produce of this country, such as
tin, pepper, wax^ and canes, all of these we ofier to our friend with perfect
good will. For that purpose it is we write the present, as an engage-
ment (on our part), and to give it the more validity affix our seal to the
paper. Written on the hill of Sildjigur^ the fourth day of the month
SqfoTf hchkg Wednesday, at three o'clock, in the year 1200 (i/Sg).**
Extract of a Letter froin the King of Silar^r to Captain Light*
j5p ^j^ • • • • • •jy^ ^y. u^k^ (^ t< ^yJ*^ ti vj^ !r^ '^J^ ^k
j\af. Jn-U cs^ jli^ ^bj ^Af^j ti ^^ ^«^^"^ *^ br" ^J^ J^ c^ ^
^^ That is to say, from his Majesty who reigneth and holds his court
on the hill of Silflngur. Furthermore, with regard to what is
mentioned in the letter fitm oor friend ; should we interfere in the conr
Q, q cerns
Digitized by
Google
150 A GRAMMAR OF THE
cerns of the King of Achitij we must give umbrage to the people of that
place, and occasion them to harbour resentment against us. With what
.propriety can we say to them " do so" or " do so," seeing that they
have a right to act as they please in the affairs of their own country ?
How can people, situated as we are to the eastward, understand what
relates to that country, its subjects^ and its {government ? Were we now
to do any ojpen injury to the Achinese or to act with treachery towards
them, they would owe us a grudge; and at this time there is no matter
of discussion between us and the people of Acfdn- Written on the
sixth day of the month Muharram^ being Monday, at ten o'clock in the
forenoon, in the year 1202 (i787),"
Extract of a Letter from the Sam£ to the Same.
JJ^ \j3^ ^k^ uj^ J^ ^ J^ cA^. t!y ^^ ^-^^^ ^JJ J^^ ^\^
^ji 4^U- u^\ lJ^j y^*^ J^y ^^ ^^:^^ ^f^r^ ^j^^CJi^ CS/
J^^ u;^*^ ^J ^*^ J^ ''^V «^ «^s^ J^ ^^) J\j^ jzi^ (^ ^
*' We have directed a person whose name is Guru Khattb^ with two
persons in his company, to present themselves to our friend, in order
that
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 151
that if it' can be conveniently done, our friend may afford his assistance
in providing them with a passage on board of a ship; it being their
intention to proceed on the pilgrimage (to Mecca) ; and if possible, in
expediting the departure of these three Priests, so that they may save the
monsoon. Should, there be an English vessel bound to Juddah or to
Mokha^ we request our friend to accommodate them with a passs^e on
her ; or if not bound to those places, on a vessel going even so far as
Cocfnru We likewise request that he will cause good care to be taken
of them ; and moreover that he will furnish them with a document under
his hand, to serve them t^ a token in case of meeting with any En^ish^
men, who may assist .them in consequence of seeing our friend^s signa-*
ture, and prevent them from experiendng a long detention at every port,
for which their supplies would be inadequate^ 1206 (1791).** (Appli-
cations of this nature occur very frequently, and may be considered as a
proof how little of religious bigotry subsists amongst these Mahometans,
who give the preference to an European vessel for the conveyance of
their pilgrims.)
Letter from the King of Johar and Pahang to the Same.
jbfi- ^^ u^ ^-^2^" s^v**^ fe ^ ^^; *y^ u^^ so^ ^^ *4^ ^^^\
l:^ i^>^ iXA^ v::^\j jl^U j)jl»- ^b • ^^^aIiu ^b J^ ^^co wS ^\j
^U^^J^ ^ uX^ jdiU ^j cuXU* ^yMJb,Jj ^^ '^j^\ J^M^ ii^Hjp^
CJ^u^^^ CV. Jj^ ^-^ 4,^Jiaj Jl ^y ^j; IjJ^ C^ e^Lub ^\ ^W
jJbJ jdJU^jt jLi \^ 4l3U? CJUi^jtj fibjJjSj] ^JlH^ U^Lr^Jl tj^
Digitized by
Google
tsn A GRAMMAH OF TWL
^J y]j j^ijS ^^y5bl ^j\ iAJ^ Jsj] ^bj <^ ^jb ^jfoj) T^j jL. ^^ (juJJ
JU fjj\ 1^ Jij!^ J];Jc^ ^jJ ^\Jy t^ cu-^ ^/LjU uu/ ^\^^^
Juj^ ^Ji^^pS ^^ J^ Ci'i ^^ J]/i ^^^^ ^ uj^ rih
^jiy ^^ J J^ b\ ^J^ sA- J^ lh^ ^^Pj^jM^y^P^^j
Jib ^ 4LJU- ^ ^,jS ^ i^p c^ J^J^ ^]/ y ijji jt- ^ji^
vlibb uu-^yb jJ^-^ c^ ^jfr) jl^, ^/v- u)A:^ ^^ y^^^ u'^ ^
4;^ tt^J^ d^^^y^J^M ^y^ oJ,^^^ ixJf (li^sV ^^;5^t ^^^ jj^
«« That is to say, from Paduka Sri Sultan Mahmud R\ayat Shah,
who possesses the royal thrones of Johar and Pahang and all the dis-
tricts subordinate thereto. ««..••. If it should appear to omr friend to be
a proper measure, we request him to communicate to the (Govemour)
General of Bengal the subject of this letter, making known to him that
the Duteh Company employed a force s^ainst 12^ (Rhio), in order to
subdue the Bugis inhabitants and to set up a* Malayan king. It pleased
the Divine Will that \ht Bugis people should be c<mquered iii an attack
made by (the troops under) Jacob Peter Van Broom the commandant,
on which occasion they all ran ^way and abandoned BiyUj leaving us
Mlahys in the place. Upon this a treaty (or capitulation) was agreed to
between
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 153
between the commandant and ourself, together with tdU the chiefs on the
spot, and interchanged in writing between the two parties. When the
business of the treaty was solemnly completed, he returned to Batavia.
Some time after this there came another Dutchman, named 'Peter Redy^
to reside at Riyu^ by whom all the articles of the treaty with us and the,
chiefs were infringed During these transacUons tht Hlanpn (a piratical
people from ^ini/im/io) invaded RiyUy and by God's pmnisaioii entirety
ruined the country. The Dutch. made their escape and returned ta
Malacca. With these corcumstances we make our 'friend acquainted^
requesting that he may communicate them to the General of Bei^L*
If we are in the wrcmg with respect to the Dutch Company, let him Bx the
giult upon us, and if^ on the contrary,- we have acted correctly, we beg
that the Genefal will lend his. aidlo^see us righted; there being no quar-
ter towards which^we can now look with hope, excepting .the English
Company, who, in the present days,' are renowned from the west^nto
these eastern regions; and who have the power of relieving the op*
pressed Allow me further to mention, that being arrived in ihe domi«
nions of the chief of my family, the sultan ^ Traitgganu, I have
committed my interests to his care; both in 'relation to the English and
to the Dutch Company, whether for good or iot eviL I have oidy to
add that there is nothing I caa offer to my friend, in token of my re-
gard, but my prayers offered up every night and day. Written on the
egth day of the vaae^ Muharram in the year laoa (1787)^
Rr ExtracU
^
{^
Digitized by
Google
ts4 A GRAMMAR OF THE
•> •.-■■. . . • ■ ^
E^^tcacto of Letters from the King of TrarCggani to Captain
Light.
^y^ csJu^Jm ^J»^ UHt^ i^\^j iiU C^y^J ^j J«i-4^ ^j tif\ii \^Ai ^j
f9-» ^J 4>^ LA'W ltM ^ tt>y s^ */^ «-^ ^p^^Ji-'CU u:J^ ^ jXj]^
jiiiL» ^^^. t^ P'^.'^J «JolU JU| kJt;^ <iiji> »t>Uui\ t)U o^ cj\( «e^V
t/*»^ t<y^ '^^V J>>* ^-b J J* ,yiA«^ tli:. ^V- jjJ Jj tr-l *^y ^>A.
fs-* €^ WlA* ^y^t^P ^fji cjjM *i^ w-4^ (^^!; tt^ u^j^ ^^ wi**^
dJI^ ^^\ (//^ uu^ Jjp ^^V« b^^ diM *^ «^ u^ <J^«> ^ s^ ^j)
• /*•'•'• 'I •
^ ^j «JoUf' JU. A* A:f|^ C^U ^^J«• ic««» ^Xm ^KjUT uhiI JU a*;j iljC«
^U ^)^ jjc* ^ C^-^i^ iUjU OJjy 0^ CJf- (»#« <^^ dh (;,b UHlt
tl^ - . . i^j->«jifiuj^ (£>• hs-XJ Jjf Jt* ^b Jryy ^ rc^ ir^j^
^^««t ^ cp/u 4tjk ,*j9^ 4)Uj ^Jirf j.^ ^^\^ 41^ i£jUj-xi>' i:j]y^ 4l)u;
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. t^s
^i;^aA ^ iz^j^ j^ ^jj ^b 4^ |jj u/;J 4/j? *«^- b>A^ ^^^ er^ c>^«>
V^^V ^ (*-- UJ^ <^^ t!^ ^Ji ^i^i^Vuw^ Jif i)J ^ii^ y^&l^ J^JLi
^^ybJ\ |Jb c---^ ^ jUU^ «uo\ ^^^ ^^y' o^ j;)^ '^ ^^^^ JU 'aJjj. cL/X
<< In addition to this we acquaint our ion that whilst the Icing of
Siam remained at Sanggora he gave orders fi>r summoning the'^king of
Kedahj the king of Patant, and the king of Trdf^ganu (to do homage)»
The reply from the kii^ otPatant hAig in terms not drntHHsioty^ hit
country was invaded by the Siamese, subduedi and- laid waate^ 'With
regard to ^e letter addressed to us, we stated, in answer to it, that it
never had been customaiy from the earliest tiodes to. appeal^ pervoqsdly
before the king of Siam^ but only to convey to him a flower of gold
(filagree), and another of silver. Some time after thi^ there sorived an
envoy from him, who demanded that an hundred pieces of cannon, aisd
likewise all Siamese subjects who were settled in Trat^ganih should
be delivered to him. He further required a variety of rich articles of
furniture. His demands upon us were highly exorbitant and oppressive.
Our alarm on the occasion was very great, and we roused the country
in order to be in a utuatioh to resist the king of Siam \ but through the
aid of God and of his Prophet, he returned to his own territory; car^
^ring
Digitized by
Google
a5« A GRAMMAR OF THE
ryiDg off with him a number of the Patanese whom he had aeized, (the
PaidnS country being intermediate between the dominions of Siam and
Trangganti). We shall now proceed to make our son acquainted with
the genealogy of the kings of Johor down to our own time, for his con-
sideration." (On this descent he grounds his resistance to the kii^ of
5iam'^ claim of personal homage.)* <^ Written on the fifteenth day of
the month Shdban^ in the year 1201 (1787)/'
^ The king of iS'iiam still persists in requiring that either your royal
and gracious father or the heir apparent should appear in his presence ;
but from the beginning of time, through all generations, the kings of
Johor nerer did personal homage to the kings of Siam^ but only sent
complimentary messages. With regard to this journey to the presence
of the kii^ your royal father has not yet made up his mifid ; but on
the other hand the kio^ has dedafed, that if his will is not obeyed, he
intends to enter our country id the fifth month from this time. Now if
our son feeb smy concern for our situation, he will g^ve orders for a
couple of guarda castas to proceed to thi& place in the coarse of four
months, brining with them a set of English colours There is
nothii^ we cansend in token of oar affection but two pieces of cloth ;
they are not a suitable gift, and must be considered merely as if we pre*
sented him with a flower. This letter is written on the sixth day of the
mcmth S^OTi being Friday at nine o'clock, in the year 1202 (i787}."
*^ The reason fw making, this request is that we still eontinne at var
riance with the king of Siamj and are unable to ascertain his good or his
bad intejQtfiona; We have transmitted to him the flower of gold and
the
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 157
the flower of silveri together with the usual present (in money), but no
answer from him has been yet received. In (the beginning of) this year
he c^me to Patdrit and smote it, utterly ruining and laying it waste, and
putting to death the principal people. On this account it is we are ap-
prehensive that in the ensuing season he may perhaps come and invade
Trangganu. If a ship could by any means be spared, it would assist
in enabling us to resist the power of Siam Furthermore, with
respect to the articles forwarded to us by our son, they are arrived, but
we have taken only such as we fancied, namely a time-piece, two pair of
mirrours, a piece of green and one of purple velvet, two pieces of gold
tissue, and one parcel of lace; the value of which amounts to one
thousand five hundred and ninety-two Spanish dollars. Written on the
third day of the month Safar^ on the night of Thursday, in the year
1207 (1792)."
Passages extracted from a Romance containing the Adventures
of Indra Laksdna, Indra Mahadewa, and Dewa Indra.
^b jb ^y 4)i!\>ju JJ jt 2(jt ^l:;^ ij:^1 ^^^j^ O^j^i^^ ^^ S^lr* K^J U^ ~^* ^-^
^b t^ c:JjJu» ^ jJ^ ^L 4U\^ dbXjc^ ^^y CS^ ^ cA« jJ^ jlC»- jj^ ^
^ dJ^ WU^ ^UliJc^ ^y Jj cu^l ^y ^Jjo J td cji'^ u;^ «^ ^y^ u/
^ dJ^ K^.^^ -di^U ^^b ^\ C^ ^-ii-^ t?"^*^ ti iJ^^ ^^J^ ti uy ^^^J^
^^\j^ ^U ^\ ^U ^^ ^^jiul ,^j:j ^y C^ V£^< ^y j2U- |Jb ^ \ji
ti ^js^ t}'^ ^J^ ^ <^ ^-T* uy {J"^ uy*^^ U^ J^^ J^ (^
^ ^j^ uy
S s « The
Digitized by
Google
15^ A Grammar of the
" The prince then smiBng (at the defiance sent ,by the enemy) went
to sooth the a£BQction of his wife, and addressed her thus : << O my love,
thou who art to me the soul of my body, Eirewell ! If perchance it should
be thy husband's doom to fall (In the approaching battle], wilt thou
cherish the memory of him with some degree of fond concern ? Wilt
thou wrap him in the scarf that binds thy waist? Wilt thou bathe his
corse with thy tears pure as the dew that hangs at the extremity of the
grass ? Wilt thou bestrew it with the flowers which now adorn the folds
of thy hair?" The princess upon this wept the more abundantly, and
embraced the neck of Indra Laksana^ her arm enfolding it as the musk-
scented epidendrum entwines the angsuka tree (pavetta indica). Such
was the picture she exhibited, whilst Indra wiped away the tears from
her eyes."
^J^cpJ\ ^J\^^^/J\ tJ^uyM ^^^< '^h uy ^^^ k o^ft^j
(J^*^*> tjL jjii ^Ar* ^J^ e)^ A^ ^-^ J^ u^^ ^J^ uy ^-^ ^ jd^
(^J uy jd*^ j^^ ^^ ^ (^ (Ji«^*> ^ uy^J uj^ ^yr ^^ J^. ^
^dJ ^ 4^]^ ^j bjP ^4^4-3. J J^ ji3 J ji c^ ^\fyi ^^ cJ^Jc^
" Upon the arrival of Indra Mahadewa at the palace, he seated
himself by the side of the princess (his bride] and said to her smiling^
" My
Digitized by
Google
MALAVAN LANGUAGE- 159
•* My love, my soul, in what manner is it your intention to dispose of
yourself, as I am obliged to proceed in the search of my brother? If it
be your design to accompany me, you should lose no time in giving orders
for the necessary preparations, as my departure must be immediate:'*
When the princess Seganda Ratna heard these words, she held down
her head, and with glances sweet as the blue lotos flower in the sea of
honey, replied, " What plans, my love, am I, a young female, to pursue
but those of my lord alone ? For is not a wife under the guidance of her
husband?" Indra Mahadewa shewed his satisfaction at hearing these
expressions from the princess, embraced and kissed her, saying, <^ Thy
good sense adds grace to thy lovely features, thou shaU be the soother of
my cares, my comforter, my companion."
jj r^ y jj/ 4^jiu- jj tj^ y l,^j ^^> j-u ^.j^oji ^ ^a^ ^^j
^\>j> U^l Vi^ {J^*^ U^^ ^^ fe^^iiJ^ <d*«J-r« ^fjB^ CS^ ^^ iJ^J^ (ji}i
uM ^r^J c^y ^ ^-^ ^^J t'"^ ^J^ ti ^^ ^^"^^^ ^^ ^J^yS\ ^^j
^,b jIju cl^J^ u^'^j^ y itir^ "^JJ J*^ ^^J d^^ ti J*^ 0"^ ^r^ ^J^
" Having spoken thus, Indra Mahadewa bent his course wherever his
uncertain steps might lead. With an anxious heart and suffering from
hunger and thirst, he penetrated into forests of great extent, ascended
high
Digitized by
Google
i6o A GRAMMAR OF THE
high mountains, and crossed wide plains^ The sun was now set, and the
moon rose in all her splendour as if to serve him for a torch. The prince
although fatigued proceeded towards the hills of Indra Ktla^ and as he
passed, the tender branches of the climbing plants waved with the wind,
and seemed inclined to follow the beautiful youth. As the dawn gra*
dually arose, the clouds in the border of the sky assumed a variety of
shapes, some having the form of trees, and some resembling animals ;
but the trees of the forest were still obscured from s^ht by the dense
vapour rising from the dew. The light of the sun now began to appear,
glancing from the interstices of the mountains like the countenance of a
lovely virgin, whilst its beams shooting upwards exhibited the appesuance
of flagg and banners waving in front of an army marching to battle.**
Jy cr^W ^^ j^^ ii^ iiyPj^ J*^ ii)jfi <^:-^ i^r^ji ^^^ Jip k>!^ *^ ^^
isJtji ^,jj jJj uXt ^ d^ U^t ^^ JjJ ,Ajui^fA^Jj LS*J\Lt Mj^ ^ JJ
^yL j^\i ^j ^f jiyL» ^ ^ ^ ^m >4< ts^b uJL-» ^b {J'H^ J>^ ^j!
^ y ^ J^j^^ it^*^ ^^ (jt^ ^ e)!^ jt;3l JJ^&il^^ ul^ ^/
^ r^l; ifi\ 4^4) ^ jiJ J\ ^\ ^ Jj f^J ^yoj] JS4 jdJi ^j 4liU
jjcU c^^ C^y ^^ *jVj^ ^ J^ it)^ iJir" *f^^ uf^^ j^'^y^ ^^ ^jT^
\jj sj\^ ^ J^ ^^ tj^^ JP^^ ^k^ *^ diAl' y -^ J^jir>^ CJ^
2^ ^l^ L Jill ^^ ^U i»^ysj\ u:..v«^ ^l^ C^ u^f ul^aC» ^^ uX« W£^v4i«
^j^ CJ^ us^^. y ^ v;;^*^,^^^ Ar^ j*^^ ii'> ^j^ e;^j>-*> «!/•« cuo^ ^jf^ Jb^«-
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. tGx
^f^' ijV ^^ d;^r< i:f^ ^y*^ uyH^ y ^i J*^ ^ ^^ ^ C4*^
^AjXAc^ JUrf 4-ilE fjfsA ^A^j^h JL» jjj cfc-..<urf ^j CS^ ^j/ dHiXJ i^y cL^
ir«x.# ^ i^\j^ jJ^ %*^ Jjy J* ut^l jjj; ^^b (^'l^ ^JJ ^i^joyt jO^^ Ji4> uA
<* T&a king was highly plesucd with tbe manm^s and disposition of
DSmt Tndpa^ as wdl as with his grajcefal person and superior under**
standing'. He said to him, <' Partake of betel, my son».*' Detoa htdiHi
luunog Mcordiiigly paartaken, petumed the bctdl-stand to the kii^, who
thus addressedhim : '^ I have sent) for you, my son^ in order tx>:make.' known
1li> you » resolution taken by vea some time rince ; that to the po-son who
having coontedi out ten large measures of seiame seed and' as niany
measoies of sand^thovooghly blended^ together, should be able to separate
the graiu of the one from the grain» of the other, and' to complete the
perfisioiBnce of the task in the course' of a day ; to such person alone should
I ^w the hand of my danighter in marriage." Diwa hvita smiled on
hesnJng^ the kingls words, knowing them. tO' proceed from the aitfiil
wggestbn; of the prances (hit rivals), and bowing replied^ <* whatever may
be your nuijeBky's injunctions^ your servant is ready to execute them,*'
The sand and. the sesame seed being then provide and mixed together in
the: court befi3ie die palace^ Diwa Tfidra^mwie his obeisance, descended
to the spot) and as he stood beside the heap^ silbndy wished for aid fiom
the king, of the antS'; when iastandy the monarch made his appearance^
followed by hk whole army, consisting of tiw population^of nine hillocks^
T t Upon
Digitized by
Google
i62 A GRAMMAR OF THE
UpoD receiving the directions of DM^a Ifidra for separating the graina,
each individual ant took one seed in his mouth, and in this manner the
separation was presently effected, and the grains laid in distinct heaps, not
one being wanting. This done, the king of the ants and all his train
disappeared, and returned to the place from whence they came. DcUia
Indra reascended the steps of the palace, and having taken his seat and
made obeisance, said, " Your majesty's commands for the separation of the
sand and the sesame seed have been obeyed by your mean and humble
slave.'^ The king expressed his amkzement, and all the ministers of
state, the warriors and the people in general were astonished at witnessing
this proof of the supernatural power of Dewa Indra ; but with respect
to the princes, some of them shook their heads, some bent them down, and
others turned them aside, being unable to support his looks.*'
(The striking resemblance of this incident to one in the allegory of
Cupid and Psyche by Apuleius^ will appear from the following passage,
and, I hope, excuse its introduction). ^^ Venus being incensed against
the beautiful but unfortunate Psyche, after much personal ill treatment
imposed on her many severe tasks. In the first place having collected in
a great, promiscuous heap, an immense quantity of seeds, consisting of
wheat, barley, millet, poppy, vetches, lentils, and beans, << separate,
said she, this mass of seeds, let each of the several species of grain be
]placed distinct from the rest, and see that the work be accomplished before
night." Psyche overwhelmed by the contemplation of a task saprod^ous
and so impracticable within the allotted tin^, remained stupified and
motionless ; when an ant who observed her situation and commiserated
her difficulties and her a£Biction, immediately sumnumed the populous
tribes of six-footed people bom the neighbouring field. These, obeying
the
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 163
the call, hastened to her assistance, and having separated, grain by grain,
the confused heap^ and deposited each sort apart, presently disappeared
from her view."
Passages extracted from the Malayan version or paraphrase of the
Ramayana, a celebrated Hindu Poem.
^j^ ifjyMj u/^ ^ji^J Jfji^ itT!^ ^"^ ^ifi^ ^Ht^"^ *-^W-» \Ji y^ ^y^ u^
rW* by^"^ *-^ (ji^lr-*-» ii)'*^ (^^?F^^ 4J^ t>^*> ^ <*r^ ^l;f« ej^A-» JiUJ ^,jtj
V^^ u^ 4^' '^'^^ •■^^ e)^^ y^ ^*^^ ''J^*^ v^ *-^*^ ^ir^y?^' *^ «-2:-isJ J ^^j
A^lUt jt- 4^b jiJ^ C,^ -g-l;^ «-^ ^5=^ V^^ ^ y^^^^ ^;CV ''tfeV c;!^^
\:)h cW* ^^ eP^ cPj^ ^^ ers^ ^^^ drfJ^ **^ ^^ dr*yr ^^^^-fei^ i^y
J^ u^> (^ H-s? '^j^ ^^ ^^^ u^ J^ J^P^ u^ ^uy ^-^*^ d)^;^ uy
^^ ^^u ^^- ^b ^u c^>- ^ uiii; ^i^ jj j cL>i^ ^^ jj ^u
j^l^ ^^b «j:^" j*1^ ^U v;;j1; ^|;f ^^ «l^ Jj^ ^^ ^^;JC- cl^-U 4^1^ jU
u^ ^}^ ^U4- dJ:* ^ Cilxi^ ^^ ^\^ J\ f^i cH-i^ ^U c^> C^ ^
^^ ^ «^W^ ij^ W*> (J^*^ ^k*^ tt;^.*^*^ ti c;y t^.^- J^ tt;d^ ^^ (J^ J^ ^l^
^^yXJb J CJV ti d)^ *-*^ Ui^ U^'^ ^ "^^J uy ^h '^j^ i^^j^ u-^
^j^ ^ t^jiyy^ v//i ^y *^^ ^-^ ^^^ S^^ J^ H^^ yV *^ ^(^MbJ ^iU
i^f>^y^ JMb i^s^ pa^ ^^\ T Jjl^ ^^\ UjV^ ^A^^ (^^ *^ ^^'^ t^*^ ^h
^j^ uy v/ tfjir-^ ^ ^h ^ ^^ *-^ hf^y^ u^ <^ cM^ b j^» c?iV
Digitized by
Google
i64 A GRAMMAR OF THE
CS^ J^ u^ ^S o^J ^W *^^ *^ crri^^ ^^ cA* ^A^ ^ fti vli<
ti s^*^ (jf^ tP^ s^j^ ^f by^'^ c^-Al' (^ y \^ ujb ^W^ *^ dr^f '-^r^*^
CU^l *Jwi ,A^tf ^^ CL^ ^^— »J Jt LS^t JJjJ ^J^ {^y J-^t«^ d^ ^|-»U*l^
^j^ ^^^ uH^ t? «-^^^'jd^jd*^" cA^ tt^ v:^
<^ It wM not long before the young Queen MmtiUi Denv becam
pregnftRt, sund wheR Ibe awal pedod bftd ettpsed, she wa» delifitved oTa
female ckfld wboie feature» were exquisildy heautiM, and Ime coaipfexioB
Uce, that of the pnrtA gold. Whoever befaeid the mftml wae^ filled with
astomshfloent. Ckden were then- gtren hf Mahar^ Rswana Wsudmkmi
hia brother Maftarajtt Bibi$dnam (ViviBhaQa), together with aU the
astrologers and diviners^ that they might examine the heroaeope^. and
ascertain whether the fiitare destinies of the child were- to be happy ei
miserable» ^ See yon, my hnds (said he)^ that this business be eavefeUy
perfotmed, and that nodnng is concealedfrom me»*' Upon thvB^- Makard^
Bibuanam (who was himself deeply skilled in the oceult seiencas)^ as
wdf as the other astrologers, consnfted their books, and daring so deine^
they aft shook their heads. ** Wherefore^ inquired the^monarch,. do my
Xmds all shake theis heads f" ^ O king <£ the worid! (replied the
wise men), your servants- were proceecRng to nrake their report^ tfiongb
nndibr feelings of strong apprehension lest they should offend, your
majesty ; and they beg your mq*esly to be persuaded that what they tkoA
declare is^ not the work of their own faneiiis, but discovwed Aran the
horoscope^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. t6s
horoscope, and which your servants, dared not to hide/* Maharaja
Rawana then said, <* Be not afraid, neither conceal any thing, but make
known to me the resuk of your uispectioa'* *< AUow us then, O king of
the world ! (answered the astrologers) to throw ourselves at the feet of your
majesty, and humbly to solicit pardon when we pronounce that the
fortunes of this royal infant will be eminently happy, and that the
persons^e who shall obtain her in marriage will soon become the sovereign
of all the kingdoms of the earth, aud no one in this world whom the gods
have created shall exceed him in valour and might" ** If such be the
case (said Maharaja Rawana)^ to what purpose should a little wretch
like this be sufiered to live ? It will be best to dash it against the stones»,
and thus deprive it of life in the speediest manner/* Upon hearing this
the queen exclaimed, ^^ O Mahar^a Rawana^ can the king of the world
have the heart to see the brains of the infant scattered on the floor? . If
it must be put to death, there are many other (less cruel) modes of eflecting
it/' << In what manner then (said Rawana to his queen) should you
advise that it be destroyed ?** " Let us, my lord (answered the queen),
cause a co&n to be made for it, and let this coffin be cast into the sea.**
The king expressed his ccmsent, and immediately gave orders to skilful
artists, for the constructbn of an iron coffin. When it was completed and
presented to Ma}iar(^a Rawana^ the queen directed that it should be
lined with folds of gold muslin. She then took the child to her breast
and suckled it ; and having so done, with many tears, delivered it to the
nurses and female attendants, in order to its being placed in the iron c^n ;
which the king commanded his brother to commit to the deep. This was
accordingly put into execution ; but by the interposition of the deities, the
coffin floated on the sea.
U n 4^^
Digitized by
Google
%€e A GRAMMAR OF THE
• • ^
jj^ ^\ii ^IOmI I^J^^ ^^4.^ ^jA»1 uX« ^A^SUi»^ CSAj** iZJp JU^ ^yy 4^1 4^^W
U^ji J^ ^AW« 4^j^ <^j^ «a^ ^f«> Cil^ C^ iJkijf t^\ 4^jU J1^ cu<j1 ^Jb
^^ 4/r-1 d^ j*>ji> J» t?b ^j) 4/J>-^y ^^ ^inrti^ ^;^)^ ^ ^r^ tf *jf-
cs^ cs-^1 ^,w j2i& j5 *^ 4^^ jt tjj^j ^j^£^y^c4» ^Jt' ^jr^ <^^
^^\ c>;L# ^4;|)ji ^jj ^;l> ^4,\J; jijfl J5I^ u^^;* ^cP^ tJ^^ ^^^^ f^'*^*^ er4^*^
^Uf J^ ^Ji jLl ^^ iiUjJ j,ly Jl^ 41^ ^ 4^ tM: yJf ^ «Jbi
C^ jii^ jf^ ^U C^ ij:J\ C^ ^ ^jy ^^ Ji ^J^ ^^ i^ ^^
imJ\s^ ^^V ^^J S^^ ^'^ J^ (^^ ^^ J^ <^-^ j9^ ^;^ ^y (£^t (A;4JU J
<< It happttiod that at this period a certain iZo/a» named Maharisht
Kala was in the daily habit of performii^ penance, which consisted in
goii^ down at an eariy hour to the sea««ide, and iounerging himself to the
waist, while he adored the (rising) sun. As soon as it attained its
meridian height, he regained the shore, and returned to his palace..
During the whole of his reign he had been in the uninterrupted practise
of this penance. One morning when he was thus performing his devotioni^
in the water it chanced that the iron coffin came, with the rolling motion
of the waves, towards his feet» As soon as the day's penance was
completed,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. »67
completed^ he gave dlrecttond to his people to draw it to the shore, and
this being done^ he perceived it to be an iron coffbi of most curious work*
manship. He then had it conveyed to the pahice« .and calling his wife,
said to h^, ^' My queen, behold this chest of iron which J have found:
what^ I wonder» nuiy be its contents.'* The queei) drew near, and they
both sat down beside it. Upon its being^ opened by the command of the
king, a vivid light issued from it, that shone through all the p^ce*
They then perceived within the chest a lovely female infant, whose
complexion was like burnished gold, and her countenance resplendent atf
the full moon. Nothing in those days could equal the beautiful symioetry
of her features."
t^^J UU«Mi ^^JJ ut-^l ffjj^ t,^*** J^ t)t«*l^ (j^ yjS J^ </^W« <i^ "Hl^ *^
«.cw ^U 4,j#i^ C^ ^ ^Ji JjV ttj^ 4h u«»*/Jii'* «W- C^ ii>^ ^-^U
J\,ji oU ^\ij jli^ JS> ^^jlf «>» t»-* ^*^ c^ di^ Uj flU jL. Afif ^jiJ
*!; jU Jo^ i,fji^ ^ c;»l«^;e ^<*W >^ «/^ *t^*^ ♦-'W- \Ji ^ J^j -^
jjo* \j^ ji\i CS^ ^ ^JJiii<i ^ ^\ <«Ulb CS^ ^J^ ^ \Ai^ oU j*f.
jjuA jj» *5^ 4/jL^ ^-b r^ ^ r^j ji\ gjXi jt!» J^ "*»^ H^** «^ u^
j»ib cj^kfc j^ j6il ,j^ AiU. wJb ._»L- ^jV i/*>V «y^ *ii^ «/Jd** t/- tr***
jil jL. Ala- .^ CSii\ Ji/ CU,i^JL, (^jJ ^ J^Jf^ it^ *!>» «^-**^
AiU* jAUb aLjUjJ y>i\ r^l; tyi jL, CX. y^a c^l y^J^ *^ >* f^l^
oU *{-i C§»- ^}^ cy^j Jit ^Ifc ,5^0 jU *ti ij,jS aS j^V» «^ 4^ »/jf^
«—V*» tt,y Hf*> J^ H-** (idV j-J 5I; d^^ s?^ \tij^ t^jV i^'^ »-^ t'1'*'
Digitized by
Google
'^
168 A GRAMMAR OF THE
<< Raja Mahariihi upon thi^ immediately descended frcnn the palace,
and taking forty seeds of the lontar palm tree {borassusJlabeUifera)
planted them in a row. *' To that person (said he), who shall be aUe
to shoot an arrow through the forty stems of these palm trees (when they
have atUined their full growth), will I bestow the hand of this my
daughter in marriage.'* This done he returned to the palace and gave to
the infant the name di Puiri Sita Dewi. In proportion as she advanced
in years the charms of her person increased. Her name became cele*
farated in all regions, and fame widely reported that the beauty of the
daughter of Rf^a Maharisht surpassed that of every other princess of
the age. All who beheld her were lavish in her praise, and no eyes
covXd be satiated with the contemplation of her charms* By the time she
had reached her twelfth year she had many suitors amongrt the sons of the-
most powerful sovereigns of the surrounding countries, who were anxious
to obtain the hand of the princess Stta Dhui. To these Maharisht
repeated his declaration that she should becmne thje prize of him who
could shoot an arrow through, the forty palm trees which he had planted
in a row. Upon hearii^ this condition the [urinces all assembled with the
intention of exercising their respective skill in archery ; but Maharisht
thought it necessary in the first place to ascertain from them, what princes
were present, and who (that might be expected) were absent. ** Those
who are present, answered they, we know, but of others we know
nothing.'* " I am not a?rare, said the king, of any prince who has
failed to appear, excepting only the son of Dasarata Maliaraja^ and
being the son of so great a monarch it is incumbent on me to invite him*
Have the patience, my lords, to await my return." Maharasfn imme-
diately proceeded on his journey to Mandu-pUrH-nagara^ and after some
time reached the capital of that country. CJ^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 169
f^y ^j^ iz:>^,i CS^ \j^j\ ff>l>j jJj.» ^\isJ jjljjf jU* ,j)b?«> J* i^jW cA*
tojy iP c;*»^ WJ* v/^^ *^^ "-^' '^ 1»^^ *1^*^V:;^ tir^jy^'i fct w'^;:;^ «-^^
Lj^ysji j^ yh iL*^ Ji ^_^j\f y^ JUji Jjjsa- tj,b j^bj* J-J^ JV-j»
^^-«. o\ fcfi-o^ ^?;\fc ^;JiJ <»-y JW ti ii>y »>' */;^ ^j* '^"-^ <^V-» w^ *A»^ ^y
f,j> J^) jj ua-^ *j-«» is^\j>^ e^ tt^ ^'^^ -H J!;' «S)^* ujs^ t«*y u^^J
J^d ^lU yb u-rf; Jl^ ^\jti c^fi- 1^«> wy wjb -^A* J^j ^ ^"^
4ii7 ti c^V **^ tt>y**^ ^* *^ '^/^ «iJ^/ «f ^ ***^ v/^' «tlH t'J^ *^^ (>>V
c^^ ,*;i*3 j^ t^j-j-J JV ^ u^ Jj- J>'/r- •*' «-^^ s^> -^y u^«5
j^U ^,y ui^ J** Ji'^ c;^ «J^ "-^ «ir* »/-?*** s^^ Jsr»^ «=— ** chI» «^s*
J* J.>r^ u^ u^y- '^ «^ ^=^' *^ t?i^ fcl w^ JV «^ > «liSil ^^
yUfi ^1;- jU ^,j» cy^- ty'^ WL> 4?» «-^^ JV «!4i' «-^ JiV i^^ M
^J idi:iV e;^^^ oU ^ jU ^^t d^'\>-Ji J\ ^^yo\ .^^ J/J ^y ^J^ CS.
cb ^ *
Digitized by
Google
tjQ A GRAMMAR OF THE
Jijj^ Ji^ J^ji'M^ AM u>yi\ C^ ^ it:^!^ ^ JW Jj^ ^^ ^j
i^^C^ JV^ s--^ uy ^^ «-*^ ^j^ ^j-**^ ^^ <^^ ^r^^t^J^ iP ^^
4^1^ oV j)iV S^-^ J^ c:^ uJU ^j^ oV v^ jW^. •^J 4:^^ •i*^ i:)jS*>^ ^J^
^b 4^j- u/- ^^^ ^> grr» r^ ^jy^ ^M. J^ ^.r^ i^ ^ ^J^
\J\^ u,y (•!; W?^ ^ ^^^ ^^-^^ cA> v^ J^ t^ <^^ l;>-^ i:>ji
^U *U Jj i:^ ^ il^ fSj ^r'^t^C^ ^^ ^y ^j^ J^} J^^
VUV *ti J j ^jU. ^iJb C/^ ^ c^yCU ^ wJb- ^/^ d^-U il^ i^b
ttj^j^j» 4^j- •x^iO A^il \^ jj 4)yr* ^^jJ (•!; 4^^ C^ uHil rcJ^ 4^ *iu <L*
^^^"^ ''^j^ i^j'^ ^^ *^ ''(*^; <^ J*^^ {x>y J^^ ^^ «^ ^ Mr^ u>^
Cit* li;!^ ^^j^ ^y^ ^J i>^^ 4r^^ ^y J-^-JJ d^ 4rfV^/ ^l; 4i^> ^Ih^
(^l^ uX* ^j;-^;;^ (^^. r^j f\j^ ^^ J\ ^y 4^1^ cjj 4^y ^^u ^\ is^
s?^ c^jJ ii^y cP^*^ *^^ e)W ^^j-* ^^ ^^ ^jei cr*^ s^^ *4;*^ <^^' V e^'*^
(♦b y>- ^h^ ^j^ ^J ii>y J"^ *-^ i/^ ttM^ *A^ f^ -gl^ •^
^^ It was announced to Dasarata by hU officers, that Mahirishi Kola
was arrived from the country of Dcrit-perxva in order to obtain an
audience of his majesty, the king of the world. As soon as Dasarata,
received this information he instantly went forth to welcome the stranger^
and met him at the gate of the castle. Having embraced and kissed each
other, Maharishi was conducted into the palace, where they sat dowa
together. Dasarata then inquired what object had induced Maharishi
tp undertake so long a journey, and when the latter had msde him fully
acquainted with every circumstance, he gave directions for calling to
lus presence two of bis sons, who were named Baradan (Bharata), ^id
Cliatradan
Digitized by
Google \
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. tyi
Otatraian (Satrughoa). Upon their mikiog their appeiffance he said to
them, ^' Go, ny «»b, in tte company of MalmrulU^ and perfima
wliatever he thaU require of 700/* Maha?ishij after paying the tisnal
complirasntSy descended, from the palace and took his departure, aloi^
with the two brother». When they had got without the gate, Mahafkhi
addressed thesn in these woids : ^* The journey to my dominions, O my
sons, may be performed by four different routes. One road will require
only seventeen days travellic^^ another twenty, the thiixl^ twenty-five,
and the fourth, forty days. On the road requiring seventeen days there
dwells a female rakshasa^ named Chakin^ of a size so enormous, that ibr
her pillow she makes use of a hill. During the reign of BrahmaiTffa
be repeatedly sent armies of hundreds of thousands, with orders to put
her to death, but they coold not accomplish it. In these days also
Maharaja Rawana has sent his warriors to summon her. to his presence,
and upon her refusal has employed means to destroy her ; but the result
was her seizing and devourii^ many thousands of his trooops. In the
road requiring twenty days there is a rhinQceros named Agni Ganda^
whose bulk is like a mountain, and his hide is rough as the coat of the
nangka (artocarpus integrifolia). The road requiring twenty*five days is
infested by a monstrous snake named SUla Nakm^ the length of which is
one thousand three hundred cubits, and when he exhales his breath all
the trees and herbs are scorched as if consumed by fire. With regard to
the remaining road, which requires forty days to travel it, the journey is
not attended with any danger whatever. Now, my young men, which
of these routes do you think it best for us to pursue ? " To this the bro-
ther» replied, ** We think it most advisable to pursue the route of forty
days, a9 it is free from every kind of danger." Upon hearing this answer,
Maharishi
Digitized by
Google
»7* A GRAMMAR OF THE
Maharishi said to himddf, *^ These youths are evidently not suited to my
(Nirpoie, and the beat thing I can do is take them back to their father.'*
He accordingly returned and presented them to DasaratOj who inquired
the occasion of seeing him (so soon) again. ^ I have had reason ( ms w c ied
Maharishi) to form an opinion that these two princes would prove unequal
to the performance of what I should require of than. If it be your
majesty's inclinaticm to do me kindnessi you will gratify me in allowing
your son Sri Rama to accompany me. Any other ci your sons it will
be in vain for me to take, as they are not calculated to support the high,
reputation of your majesty. Your son Sri Rama^ on the contrary, will
fulfil my expectations, and add celd^ty to his father's name." Sri Rama
was accordingly sent for, and upon makii^ his appearance, Dasarata
said to him, << Proceed my son, alcmg with MaharishU smd what he shall
require of thee, do thou execute." << If it be your majesty's command,
answered Rama^ I am ready to obey ; but (the object of my journey being
fulfilled) I shall immediately return to the presence of your illustrious
majesty." Having said this, he threw himself at the feet of his royal
father, and took his leave of him and his mother. Laksamana, his
brother, expressed a wish to accompany him ; but Dasarata and the queen
would not consent to part with him. Upon this Laksamana wept, and
still urged for permission to go with his (beloved) brother. << Do not,
said the father, persist in leaving us ; but consider that in the absence of
your elder brother, you must supply his place in your mother's sight."
The queen, however, being affected by his tears, consented to his bearing
his brother company ; *< For, said she, were he even to remain, he would
not (on his father's death) succeed to the throne of this kingdom;"
(in preference to one of the sons by another wife, fcnr whom Dasarata
designed
Digitized by
Google
o
MAiAYAN LANGUAGE 173
des%oed it). LaJttemami acccffdu^Iy set out along with his brolbet
Sri Riiiuu
4>^ vi^ te,/y y^l Jjb 4j,yjl ^fjA fJb jLS 4j^ ^t^ ^^^ «sj:* ^jj" jjjU «u^t»
V^ c)j sFr> ttj^*» utf^^ u8^ «4^ ti^-»»^ t-'^^ t£*l^ ji;? »J1 jV ^fS^
iO^ ^ «i^ (yA"** «/j*^ r^ '.^r' 6»*^«» A^ cA Jl w-^> wyoi< *SJW
«^ «i^ /a 4iji) jj jj** p\ &<i^ ^j »^jU *tiij jai ju jAu j^ ^^^1 ^
r 4^ J^> \af ^J^^S^ wM >*' i:^/» ^l^U Jt- aJ \j^ «^ ^ ^
<^ (AA |»W «»» W <V ^jj^ v^ ttt*^ '•'^ '^^ ^^ fh «/r* uJiJtif ttf^r^
/^\ J\CS\ JL,y^ ^ cJi A^ ^ ijif^j ji\ f,]j ^^ C^ fAj ^^
,^^«chj-.j^. ^WP^c^wM r-jtt ^jL» <A^ u,^ |»<J- «y»^ v-f-
ji jjfej y. ^j (i^ iih -ii^ *t^^ ^u ^^jiA* y^ ^-^^ cV*^ ^'^^^ (i^
^8^te»U C^ CSWf ttjd^/i^^ •-« fcr^L* «/UuuSo ^ tjij^^ iirt^j ,0^
** When .S>^ jR£iii« Mrived at the habitation of the raksliasa or
^antess named C^aHn, whose size was like that of a mountain, he found
her sdil asleep. He said to himself^ ** Tlus monster beii^ a female, it
I should kiH her in her sleep, what will the world toy of me T He
then proceeded to awake her. She started, and upon seemg Rama at
the foot of her c^ich, she cried out, " Ho ! young mftB, ti^hither art
tboug<wg; aid what ift the oocasbn of thy coining hither? If it be thy
Y y latentiouL
Digitized by
Google
474 A^ GRAMMAR OF THE
intention to pas» onward, go thy way." RShibitrepMtd, " My object
in coming to this place is to put thee to death. I mik just now about to
kill thee in thy sleep, had I not reflected on what mankind would think
of such an (inglorious) act; considering also that thou art a female.**
Upon hearing these words from Ramay the giantess laughed heartily, and
said, " What is thy name, young man ?" ** I am Sri Rama^ answered
he, the son of Dasarata Maliaraja*' '' I feel great compassion for thee,
said she^ both on account of thy youth and the comeliness of thy person^
as well as on account of thy being the son of a powerful king, illustrious
in his descent, and respected for his virtues. Whithersoever it is thy
wbh to go, proceed forthwith.*' '< From the spot where* I am, answered
Rama^ I shall not move, until with this hand I have put thee to death.**
<^ O son of Dasarata Maharaja^ said she, hast thou not heard ^he fame
of my prowess, not only in the early days of Brahma Raja^ but also in
these of Maharaja Rawana^ who ordered his innumeraUe armies to
attack me, and which I put to flight, devouring by hundreds such of hia
people as came within my grasp. What then cansi thou be to me, and
what ate thy pretensions to superior valour ?'* To this^Vf J?ama jnade
no other reply than desiring her to stand up and defend herself.** (The
circumstances of the combat, in which the female rakshasa^ of course, is
slain, resemble those which we have read in the Arabian Tales.)
cu^ftL JS/? tJJi ^i^\ iS^ uu-jI ^^ J ^f^} ^j^ <^^ J^ ^^j ^ji* (•*)
U^l^ ^ Ju^ J\ ^^y j1 ^)j^ ^ ^j[f ^\j^ izj\^ i£^ Jb^ J\ iz>j^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUA^^ '
»75
tuu y^ ufjy cLij^ ^\j^ \jj\ yi fjujj j2us ^j^A ti/^' c^^\jia
^\^/l\ aLS/ Jj J^ ^aa^ olsx* jCcI ^j^ A«^ J^ ^J^ ^^ jl^ y^l •
cyl^^. ti-jj (_^Li; 4a«. ,*;^jj j^1dJ»*> i^jlfco r«u«l;J ^l«;j ^ y^ ^j 14 r* *^^J
u>J* wj!; ^}a* "^ w'***^ (•!; s^j- '"^JJ ^>^ *i*iVv? wj» e»!>^ «^ w^!/ ^l;f«
•-r^ (^h ^j^ '^ i^ ^ J4yi '^ CJi^. J^ ^W J-^ f^y \. ci; s^y-
<^ ttT!^' ii)**A;j'^ uy^ J* (*;<'^ Jf^ (♦!; t//- *^ ciit^;* ^•'^ tS**** *^^ s^^
ts,,:^ 4iri;J s^' P uf^ ciJl J ,i«y.^f*-trf wjb -^/t* C^ ,*;fyj "4;^ (•!; *//* ^j^
aJ^ C^ t^jjj ut - yj oi^ 4r^y ul^^y^ *^^ \j^J^ (^) s^r* jt!)*' cj^ '■^^A' ^y
,j,U«Jl «jyl^ ilJi» li-il jJy ^^--i^ 00^ ji^ ^^ id;*j A»!^ j<* 4i>U-i) yi^ i^^p uuiiMt
is-ui^lj- ti^ JjS <ljj-j;j «1^ ts-ol yj-Co J ti e>j^ u/* uy^ v*^ «-^y ttr*V «^j^k
lACo» jJ^ j\^ ^^ JULi A)1s> ^UJO jJ j1 ^J|> i^^J >A.-yj c^ dCi ^]y i.::.n:m ^^
^^j- JcS:^ ^Ji cujI Jj- ^jJ jj^ jjyleJ^J uJ^y 4lL*U. yU-Sl-Cyl^ (IJU «:^1 ^y
by cr^J b^^ s^ J^" tt^i^'^'* f^^ "^k** u;^-^-* t^J^ ''b^ J^ "^^' C)j
^j> t^y^ii itf-,--» cjI^ (1X« 2>^jifS. yy li-o^ (^J t/j- <^i fe?^ j^^ y uj^ .uj^
«-*v * cM^.j^ t^*» ^y J^ '''-''' '^ u*->* ^j^^ *^"^ '^'*
is^ c:^'^fc;^yy uw^ \jj> jlj- oy Jy uy^^ ^:^^^ c^ ^ uX-is
^y.*> V-
Digitized by
Google
ij6 ^GRAMMAR OF THE
u:,Jb j\J A t^T/' AiC^ yn ^^^*mJ^ uji uC« ^^-^f c^V Jci^ u^^J^ ^ C^
iK- oW w/1 wi-dt JJS jj^ JJCJ jjjit Vi»» ^^ y y^. J^ J'' iJi^ ^^<>
(•!; i/j- J«*' *r'^ uy «i^-** «^ «r-*** ^j** «i^il'> "'-s- «^ «^ i/^ tt^Wy*
Jji xJ' iA^ ^^ t^J^^ «^ JA» *^"^ «-^ 4r5 fcl^"« «»2 ^^ JV *^/
^a^y JmJsj ^]j ^j- aj^ u^u ^^k W-- 41,^ jjjeV ^^ju ijiu e^ tiiiy ^^
iH v/ **^ */]r» «4/^ it^ *J^" u-//^ «> **x> i/^ wy w^*-^ «-^ *^^
»K« fcs-i\ wu. ^ «^ tti*^ <^^/ <^«^ «-A»- ^V (^«ri^ ^y.«> «^r* ^j^
«^ cy^. ^jio ^jj^ 4A!V> tj(^ ^J^J ^ iL^ ^j\ C^ ,i^. «t^ ^U
>*^ ^^\a}]J ^A* "^ *^ ^J6> «^8- ^v «;***•* ^/^»?;? .^t JJ «1?^ yU^
tl^Mot o\eJ ^,y u^ JU»,; ^ i^^j iA-^ iZJ^ cA i»ft^t ^ ^ -^jto c^<>-
fctf* V>1«> w-t- fci^ ^ c^t> MW' u>^;J *Ai% Ji^^S ^ fcM^ |*fc^l ti^
4^ h-MJb U;Jb ^i^ i/js^.d&^*' gik JUft,; CJ^ uX« ,^U»,i A* ^^ ,ffif»i^
^ u-*» ,j,jJ 4^j» jj^ iUJuf^ w^ 4j,y ^ Jb m ii\ u^ ^1 u,V*-i8 uv^
\ji 'V^**^ •» C^ jM dk*i)j^ ^jy ttjy */*i'* '''Hj-» ti^ wW* H-*** «tf*^
^ 4^> fcU5j7 jtfV ^t j^^j^ dtOU 4lC-tt iMb ol,j t4;i^ t«;/ j^ 4liJV^
" Vf9AJiiab4irifa MafMOuTt hewug; Uie complaint of his sister (that;
Iwir
- Digitized -by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGHt^ ' 177
her face had been mutilated) his wrath was kindled like a fl^ of fire»
and he exclaimed, " O, my sister, is it thus that Laksamana displays his
manhood and his valour against a woman ? If he really wishes to give
proofs of his courage, let him exert it against men who will oppose him
with equal strength and resolution. Then, indeed, (and not till then) he
may boast of manly qualities. He has no sister, but Sri Rama has a
wife, and upon her will I avenge myself for the injury your person has
sustained from his iMrother." (He had cut off her nose by accident.)
'^ Rawana instantly gave orders for calling two of his attendant mk^-
shasas^ who had both the form of dogs, and directed them to bring his
chariot. Having mounted it, he crossed over from Lar^ka^pim^ and in
a short time reached the main land. One of the rakshasas he instructed
to assume the appearance of a golden, and the other, of a silver, roe.
<< Proceed both of you, said he, to the ground before the dwelling of
Sn Rama% and there play and skip about.*' In obedience to the com?-
mand of their master, they went towards the house, whilst Rawana
himself followed the two roes in his .chariot When they reached tho
space in front of the house, they be^m to bound and skip imtil they
attracted the attention of Stta Dem^ who said to Rama^ *^ I beg of thee,
my lord, to catch me those two (beautiful) roes." ^ As to catching
them alive, answered Rdma^ it is out of my power, but if you wish it, I
will shoot them with my bow." ^' By no means, replied Sita ; it is not
my object to possess them dead, as it is for my amusement I want thenu^
Ramay taking with him his bow, descended frcmi the bouse, and calling
to Laksamana said to him, ^^ Remsdn at home, my brother, for ^e pro-
tection of your sister Stta Dmh whilst I go in chace of those two roes."
Laksamana promised he would, and Rama went in pursuit of thenu
- Z z« As
Digitize by Google
178 \ JL^ GRAMMAR OF THE
As he followed, they lan from hiin, and when he was drawn to a con«*
siderable distance from the dwelling, Mafiaraja Rawana concealed him-
self behind some trees, and counterfeiting the voice of Ramay cried oot
for assistance. Sita hearing the noise said to Laksamana^ ^^ Hearken,
my brother, to the sound of your elder brother's voice calling for assist-
ance." " O ! my lady, said Laksamana^ do not pay attention to noises
of this kind." Upon- a repetition of the cry for help, Sita again said^
" It^is beyond all doubt the voice of your brother who stands in need of
your aid." ** Pray do not listen to these noises, repeated Laksamana.
My brother Sri Rama is of all men whom the gods have created in this
world, the least likely to call out in that, manner. Even when engaged
in combat with mighty warriors, whose size equalled that of mountains,
he never was known to call to any person living for assistance ; and can
it be supposed that he should now require it on account of a couple of '
deer?" " Notwithstanding this, replied iS?/a, I earnestly recommend
your going immediately to the relief of your elder brother, who is in some
kind of diflBculty." ". O ! princess, answered Laksamana^ my brother
left me here expressly for the purpose of giving protection to your high-
ness, and can your servant possibly stir from hehCe ? Should any accident
befall your highness during my absence, your servant would appear highly
criminal in the eyes of his beloved brother." The cry for help was once
more heard. *^ Is it my brother^ s wish, exclaimed Sttaf that his brother
Rama should perish ? It is my opinion that you should instantly go and
find him out." *^ My brother Sri Rama^ he replied, is not only exempt
from any injury that man can do to him, but the very beasts of the earth
bow down before him. To what species of danger then can he be ex-
posed, that should require the aid of your servant; who would at the
same
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 179
s^ime time feel the strongest apprehension and anxiety, were he to leave
your highness unprotected?" " Now, cried the princess, I perceird
what are your views. You wait the death of Sri Ramaf that you nijiy
then possess yourself of his wife.'* ^Laksamana upon hearing these words
from Stta Dewli .answered with tears; " Now, indeed, It is impossiUe
that I should do otherwise than go, in order to disprove a charge against
me so entirely unfounded, and by which my feelings are so deeply
wounded. That I weep, however, is not the effect of this reproach, but
of my being obliged to neglect the trust reposed in me by Sri Rama whm
he committed your highness to my care '* He. then described a -circle
round the house,* marking the ground with his finger, and pronouncing
at the same time these words: ^^ O! earth, receive from me (my sister)
Stta Dem^ as a sacred deposit. Whoever shall overstep this line, do
tliou swallow him up." This precaution taken, Laksaniana set out with'
four attendahts. When he was at such a distance from Sita Dewi as to
$e no longer within hearing, Maharaja Rawana drew near, fn the dis^
guise of a i?7*aAm(in, and standing in the walk before the house, said
aloud, " O ! daughter-in-law of Dasarata Maharaja^ hestOYf upon me
thy alms." To which she replied, " I have nothing, my good Brahnidn^
to offer thee, excepting this flower in my hand, which is at thy service.**
*< O! princess Sita Dewi, said he, whatsoever thou deignest to bestow,
I shall accept." Upon hearing these words from the holy man, she.
reached out the flower towards him, when he said,^ ^^ O! Sita Dewi, it
is not in my power to overstep this (magic) line of Laksamana. If
thou art disposed to treat me with indulgence and faydur, jthou wilt thy-
self reach it to my hand." Sita thereupon descended the steps of the
fabuse, to the ground before it^ and held out the flower to the Brahman^
who
Digitized by
Google
i8o A GRAMMAR OF THE
who again said, ^^ If your highness may so far condescend, oblige thy
servant, O ! princess, by extending it beyond the line of the circle, it
being impossible for thy servant to transgress that boundary, and great
will be the religious merit of freeing me from the restriction it imposes.*'
Sita Dim then, standing within the circle, but extending her arm beyond
^ presented the flower to the (pretended) Brahman^ who suddenly seized
her by the hand, and carried her with him into the air/*
^ d)^ uy (\> «Ar* «-^ y^ {r-» *^ ji^ f^s^ ^V \jy ^:f^ yCji ^^ ^ *1^
cJtJ i^j^J u:^.^^ JJU ^b dJiy 4/y^t ^J\ 6^ oLf i%U4ib J^* tjijl il^y V v::^t
U^l^ ^b^ *^ \^J u^ (j:^-^ u.-^»* AfAA lJ^ ^^ yb Jj j^t f^i^ aL^ J\^
^ di'^ ^y ^^ u^ er-W LT-^t tr-^ liuj ^^j ^ u)/y ^j/1 *^^" (%Uib oU
C^ jib «J--» jif 4^^j;j fAfAJb C^ CS^y Ji> J^f J^y< jJjCfU uliV^i ^V
fl; ^j^ ^^ <^^ c;^^ ^^J^^ i^V^ <^>^ ^FlLr j}b 2f^ cuJUl Ji^ ^JU^ (^^^j^
^ jl^ J.-^ uu^ 4-lb c;-ot |i^ jjc^ CL^ 4Sjy jCftt ^;CiJb^ jlio- jftU Lj'^
Ji^ 4-.viA 4p ^U j^j> J^^x^ ^^l jjj! ^ (^V^ ^j^ cJi CiU ^ J\
ii^ jib •xfif jpj> •^^jl ^-b ilS^ JU^ MJu. i^jy^ ^j j3UJL uu^l jil ^
d^jjjt iLi^jC^jL^^jJL.'^ Jiy^^\ij^^J i^^Ji\J^j^
^yf-^ JJCA ^JZ ^jjljj J J3^ u:^! jib -«JUaib J ^^b ^j^ JjJ «iJ:^^
*< The king (in the course of his travels for the purpose of gainii^*
intelligence
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. i8i
mtelligence oF Stta) met with a stork which was drinking at the side oC
a lake, and inquired of the bird whether it had seen any thing of hia
wife, Slta Dewh who had been carried away from him. To this the
stork replied : " As to your honour's wife, my young lord, your humble
servant knows nothing of her, nor is he acquainted with the name of
Stta Dewt\ but when your servant was taking a drink of water from this
lake, happening to cast his eye towards the heavens^, he beheld Maha^
rqja Raxcana conveyii^ a beautiful young woman through the air, m his
flying chariot. This is what your servant saw, but who the young person
was, he is quite ignorant She wore a dress of a crimson colour, worked
with gold, and two or three pieces torn from it, she let fall into the lake
(as she passed over it)/' ^^ O stork, cried RdmUy from you it is I first
hear tidings of m^ wife« Teli me now what reward you claim from me,
that I may invoke the deities to grant the boon/' ^^ Your slave, replied
(he stork, makes bold to request of your highness, that when he has
taken his stand in one lake^ his neck may be extended to a length suf-
ficient to reach foiir others, that he may be enabled the more easily tQ
provide himself with food." '* My good stork, said Rafna^ if I inter-
cede to have your wish granted^ you may, I fear, have cause before long
to repent of the consequences." *^ My lord, said Laksamana^ if the
neck of the stork be lengthened in that manner, he will certainly be
taken in a noose." ^' Brother, answered Rdma^ his wish, whatever it
be, I must obtain for him. The ]blamĕ is ndt mine." RdMtf then
uttered a prayer^ and instantly the neck of the stork grew to the lepgtb
desired. As «oon as the two princes had take» their departure, thore^
came a boy to the lake to fisbi who* percdiving the neck of a hitd so
A a a enormously
Digitized by
Google
182 A GRAMMAR OF tH£
enoimously long as to resemble a huge snake, threw a noose over it« an<l
thus catching the stork, led it airay to market, for sale."
Ji yj ^^JB^ <J\J jil tlX* ^^ ^}}<i J^ fij^r*^ dij?** «^V ^J ^ J^
JtJ ^bj ^ ^^0 (•!> ^^j- y;elj ^L^ ^jjw^ fcl^ j^ ^ LL ob jiL:^ tjyy
^^J^ «.-«*» 4;j^ aJ? «-r"^ ks-J j^l j^ •*' <•!; tAr» v/> «j-^/? u)» •^ M^ «-^ «1»*=^
Jt (..««Jb «-CJ ch cy V* JiA-* c^ c/i;i S-^** (i»^ c;«V '■SHI^ «-r^** «/js^^ J^
4>U jj^ jUj t£-i^ ji^r" c^ t»*^^ V*** t»^ 4>^ *-*^'* '*V er^V" tJ'j' y •t-*** t?'*
CJ^ ^J•^ u>£t cT*^ s^ "^ ^^ )i)^ tj^^ «"T*** .^'V' cP^ (i>^ Cy»«J» ^j}7
^\<j. 4,jS^ tl^ ^l^ ^y JUjJ jy 4JLi« j^l fclA ,*;:JLJb tii^ f)j i^r' ,J^
irfj» f\f sfj^ <^^ **-i' *^ ii^/^^j*} Jj^-»* |»b '/.r' w^ d;€y tH^ u>^*-^
*j5 VA^V iiiV j-J J*^ ^J^ ^^ \Ji ^ J^ <^ ^i? yf J^'^ ^}t* cA^
rb *Ar» ^^^ hf^ ^ itr^ kJ^ d^^ u^ ^1; U^ •^ ^r *-^ d)'^*
1^*0 ^J^ J ^1; Ui Ji< ^1; Ui Jit i^^O ^j^OOjJJ ji^j-i ^^Ufi ^^j-i ^*J
<< When 5H /2amii heard these (conciliatory) words from Bdsorraja
lie attempted to take back from his hand the arrow (he had shot at him),
which the latter would not give up to him, but afterwards threw it oa
die jground. The (enchanted and unerring) weapon theiei]qpoa took a
flight
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. iSg^
flight into the air, and in its descent pierced the breast of this king (of
the monkey tribes). He grasped the hand of Rama^ placed it to his
wounded breast, and then raised it to hu eyes. ^^ Rama^ said he, I
hare two dying requests to make to you. The one is that you do iMt
^ve my wife to (my brother) Sugnva^ and the second that you will take
my children under your protection. With regard to Sugrtva you will
hot find his qualities of advantage to you, for his word is not to be
trusted ; but the person frofm whom you may expect useful senrice is the
son of another of my brothers, bamed Hanuman.'* Having spoken
these words he let go the hand of Kama, and immediately died. At
the moment of the departure of his spirit, a vivid light was seen to issue
from the crown of his head, in the form of a palm tree, and to ascend to
ihe skies. Rama gave orders to Sugrtva to sikpport the body, and
LaksamanatD wash it, whilst he himself poured the water for the pur-
pose. This being done, he commanded them to bring wood of aloes, and
sandal wood, and camphor, and saffron, and amber, and spikenard ; and
mih the assistance of Laisamana he burned the corpse of Balia-raja (on
the pile). When this ceremony was performed, he proceeded along
with Laksamana and Sugrtva to the palace of the deceased. Upon this
occasion every individual of the monkey kind, small and great, harmless
and mischievous, old and young, seated themselves in tho presence of Sri
Rama. Among these was cme aged monkey, named Palah Jambun^
the younger brother of Balia^raja's father, whose venerable beard reached
to his waist. Him Sri Rama (now become the regulator of the con*
quered state and sovereign disposer of honours) seated above SugrwOy
placmg Sugfiva above the sons of Balia-rqja^ and these above the oilier
monkies assembled;'* '
Digitized by
Google
i84. A GRAMMAR. Of THE
^j^ AfA^ y\jji ^,/c)4rr L>^^ J'i;* ^-^ cr!^^ J^^ J^ iih^ J^ J^j
^^^ ijp^ uiU Joifl Cijli (.s^^ j^U^ ^b CJ^y ^%> ;^y\yi^ ^^^^JX^ vJali ^Im
^lj^. jj jJol ^j^ dc^\ *Jj\ ^ ij^\ 4^jio ^)i ^js^*^ *^j J^*>i <iiX« (-ili* (♦!;.
^ ^1} ^^^Li ^^ *^jjl ^^ J^ ^ oLj ^^^ Uo ^/ ^^^^ iJ^^ v^ J\V
jLi iJSU o\J ^U ^;b ^;V/ ^^^^ u^^**^ \J^ J^ «-^ c;^V" «^ *^j^ (J'«>
jf;U Jj c^/ c^ji^ .xJ^ ^^S ^U ^b jjU:* ^^IC 4,jL:X< ^^U Jj vj:..^
u^U 4^/j^ J--J\ ^jj^ c^ jj jf;ly ci^U ^ ^;b c^y 4jjj7 J>V ti ^*^- u)^
C^l^O ^j^ v^l Jj ^jyA--i ^ ^^ Jjjl J^^^ ti L'V u>^ t-'^^ ^^*> C)^
V?#iJ^jb^ i^>u«-» JiO ci-jl 4^J^ Ji^ 4^1L» c^y jj jl «dijujb ^^ C;^v4Jb c^l^ ^ jI
*-^ ^i^V c?dV ti (^^ c;^ <^^ <iiV ^^ 1'*^^ \j^ (^ u-W c/^V s^ J,^.
*^ *5r7 Rama conducted his two younger brothers, Bar dan (Bharata)
md^Chetradan (Satrug^oa) into the fort, and then to the palace, where
he tat down with them and Laksamana. Having made their salutatioa
and j>rostrated themselves at the feet of Rama, they tendered to him the
kii^om (bequeathed ^to them by their father], and urged him to return
and a83ume; the government ; ^^ in order, said they, that we and the rest
of your subjects may have the opportunity of doing homage to your
highness,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 185
highnesB) 'and that we may perform together the ceremony of boming
the corpse of our beloved father." To this Rama replied in the follow-
ing words. ^^ Why, my brothers, do you address me in this manner,
since our father has already bestowed upon you the sovereignty' of the
kingdom ? My sentiments are, that his is the inheritance on whomso-
ever the father confers it ; and that if we disobey his will, we assuredly
forfeit all pretensions to virtue and its rewards. This world, we must
recollect, is hot to be eternal, nor to beccHue the property of one indivi-
dual ; and it should be our object to leave a good name by acting justly,
and making a proper distinction between right and wrong. Seat your-
selves, my brothers, in the government of the kingdom, and whilst upon
the throne do not be supine and indifferent to its dudes. Do not fiul to
shew kinditess to the army, and do not suffer any kind of oppression to
the people in general. Neglect not to buUd fortifications and to (M*bvid^
a store of arms. Do not, my brothers, avoid the occasicms of consulting
with your ministers and the commanders of your troops upon every kind
<dr business or operaticm. Wholesome advice you will follow, and evil
counsel you will lay up in your minds ; for when ministers are wicked,
their evil acts are imputed by the public to their sovereign. Whenever
you pronounce judgment let it be done after full investigation of the truth»
Remember (that you are in the presence of) the deities. Take care to
preserve the shrine of our father, and with regard to my mother, I leave
her as a sacred deposit in your hands. Shew her due reverence. That
kingdom which your father deugned for you, is now, my brothers, your
own possession. Attend to the admonitions I give you, in order that it
may be durabki that you may enjoy tranquillity, and that the memory of
B b b our
Digitized by
Google
i86 A GRAMMAR OF THE.
our venerable ancestors may not be clisgraced. Better Is it to dBe yiUk
reputation than to live under reproach/* ,
^ \J*^ J^ ^^y V (^^-^V^ J^^ ^-^ *J*^ f^r^ v£^b 4}Ij ^ ;j:^1^ ci^^u
^ ^^\ iK^U ^y jL. csJV cu^ C^ JLb jfjcA 4^b 4jiU aJj^-- J^^ u^ •*
i:;^*> Ujb ^];f >^^ ^^ J*^ ^"^ v/^ t^"^^ J^J^ ^ J!^ ^ JnHi v/*
ViS^l 4^U c/*!/* s^ c:^ ^^;^ (.iJIjj u.^ ^J^ ^^cj ^y ciJb ^a^^^j^iO tld
^ uuJV*3 ^ ^b c^ •^^ *>V v^rt*^ v^ u-^b ^Ir? ^-^. drf>l*^ d^j^^ ^^
w^jiJ^ jL.1 ajjub ^ wu^ (iS.^j4X:;^ c^^ c/'li^ ^V ^^ U^J^ ^^^ ^--^ i)J^
cr^ 4ll;j< ^Jftlyl^ fcjC^ ^j\ UHll ju^ Afiy ^^1; ^j^ ci>K iliU J--^ ^Ij;.)
^y «^ ^^^^ ^ 4:^ ^y J^ «^ j^ ^^^"^ <-^ <-^W^ '^«^ ^;d^ •''cr^!;^ O^
^j^ ^jl^ il$^ e/d* J» vju^\ ^^^ v.;>i5*x- j2*r J-J! ^U jLj ^2^V W^^
.4i^ U^ uW^ ^L.iU ^j^ycjt ^la-i^ {^S^ ^}<j ^j^ ^\&J ^jf! ^^ ts*^^
i^jf^ ijj^ |J1«> \j^^ *^jj cH^ (^b l^\Jjb -^^jSi^ SrLrf* ^J J^ *^ u.^»! »
u/^ w>i1 ^5J1 *U>li ^Jju* cj|jJi ^\ji ^j ^^y J^^ <-^ ^^ *1^ <fi^«* '^y? ;
tL^U il^y 4ijU 4^jaJ ^^ «l^yV e?^ «^ s^^*> ^^:---» j**^ t^rt^ 4i^ c;S^
42^«^^ cJy»^ f^J ^j^ ^J^ i-r^-*^ ^y ci^ c;^^ Cud ^-^^ ^^^*^ "^V ^^^^^ ^
.r ■
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE: 187
jjc^ ti \J^^ ^ g^jj' f^^*> (•!; 4/^» *^y C^ *-r^^ <^i^ ito^ JW^ it^U^
^ ^W^ cj^ aI; 4Ar- <^^ *j^ <^^if^ cA^ ^s^U^^U^y^ ;^ ^Pj ^ J^ ^
^fi u^*^ il^l> /^ ^J LfJ^ [^ *A^ <-^ ii)^*^ i:^!^ u^vuft' iU4-i ^JJU^
Ly'vUb ^^ C^ <-!^ /k^^P ^>jy l»«d^ f>£^ l^sub UL^ ci>1^ «>\ ^111:1^0 <-r^^^
U;.^viA ^^ ui^AT <>i^<^ il^ Jy^«> >UHl1 ^::^ ^^^Ujh ^ ^j^ ^»,^ jJj ^b a5^
K^jii^ \j^ ^*^ CA\j JUjj ^^y i^\ J» 4^ji J ^^ ^^1^ ji 0j^ ^y ^V^
*)>p^ ^\ Ji y\0 C^ ^ ut^y (^^^ ^ <^i-^ j,s-i> CU)b J^ C(|i 4^^ Jil <^Hl^'
•>W e4/l<^ cA^ e>A^ *^^ *^Hl' ^'^^ ĕr*!??"*^ c5^*^ vt>^ ^^^^ ^^V V*i^ uJ^V^
i£JuUc:^*c:.-V*^ jV^ 4^' J^ ^^^ cH*^ ui^^ ^\ CJi^ ,a^ <i^ J^
i»jL>U^ ^b 4;^3 u/« AJU^ ^^-^ ^^^^ CSiP^ {j^ ^^^ {jif^ J^ ^J^ T^
^^Uyjb ^U4^ Cj^ jJb jC4^ Jl^ l;;^^^ v^(*l^ ^r* ^ vJ^'^.u^'^ c\f «/>•
flf ^r'.J^ *^ *3!>^ iii>^ uW^ ^-^ ^-^ ui' ts-^U- t^b vlPU j^l« «-^y'd
iJjuib cL^I 4/>i*^ iii:-^--» a:^^^ J^A* ^■2-^"* JV c;^*^^ *r^ C^J ^J^ *^ (*r*^l!^^j?**
ii)W ^ J^J^^ y ?r> era^ (i>^^ v/ rl^ ^/^ *^^ ^^^ ii^^ ^
lU^ d^ c^ ^«> jJjS c:^^ 4^J^ ^jy\^ i^jy^ i^j^ ^ 4^ '''cr^J;^ ^ ^^^
ij^.J^.O^^'^^ «:^1 c^jJ uuXl ^J^CSi^J^^di Jjjy\ij^^
^^jy^ JU^ Li^-ftj jU^
^^ Brother, said Maharaja Raxoana irvhat means can we devise to put
to death this, diminutive monkey (who has played such mischievous
tricks).
•Digitized by
Google
i88 A GRAMMAR OF THE
tricks), seebg that of all the various weapons employed not one has had
the efiect of wounding him?" Hanuman (overhearing this question)
replied, ^^ O my lord, if your imperial majesty wishes to slay your servant,
and that his death should be immediate, cause his whole body to be wrap*
ped in cloth ; when so wrapped let oil be thrown upon him, and that
being cfene, let the body of your servant be consumed by applying fire
to. the cloth, from the head of your servant down to his feet.** Having
Keard^his, Maharaja Rawnna gave instant orders for wrapping folds of
cloth round his body, which his people proceeded to put in execution ;
but as soon as Hanuman felt the wrapper, he began to increase his own
siise, and although some hundred pieces of clotli were used, still were
they insufficient for wrapping him, for the more they attempted to wrap^
the more his bulk was enlarged The king then gave command for
opening the warehouses^ and all the cloth stored therein was brought
ibrth and employed to wrap the body of Hanuman^ but still it was not
' sufficient. All the cloth that could be found in the king's palace was
expended to as little purpose. He then ordered a request to be conveyed
to Sita Dewh that she would furnish such cloth as might be in her
possession. As soon as Hanuman heard that Sita Dewi was to be
Called upon to contribute, (thinking it time to desist), he clapped his
tail between his legs, and cried out, ^^ It is enough ; I can no loiter endure
this torment; begin now to throw the oil upon me*** Maharaja Rawana
then gave orders^ for pourhig oil over him, and when his people had
poured out some hundred jars, he directed them to set fire to every part
of his body. The wrapping cloth was all presently in a flame, but the
person of Hanuman did not sustain the smallest injury. When only a
small portion of the cloth, at the extremity of his tail, remained uncon*
sumed,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 189
ramed, he juibped upon the roof of the king's palace and set it in a
blaze; he then jumped upon the houses of the nobility, the ministers^
and principal officers, and finally upon those of all the inhabitants of the
city of Langka-puri^ which were burnt in a general conflagration ; the
house, in which Stia Dewi resided alone remaining untouched by the
flames. This being accomplished, he plunged into the sea, and as soon
as the fire of his tail' was extinguished, he repaired to the presence of his
royal mistress, to whom he said, ** O princess come now along with me^
and suffer thy slave to convey thee ta Sri RaniUj thy beloved lord.'*
« Thou knowest, O Hanumarn replied the princess, that 1 have bound
myself by a solemn vow, never to suffer any male being to put his arms
about my body, exceptii^ my honoured lord alone, (and cannot therefore
be the companion of thy flight). But is not this Sri Rama a valiant
personage, imrivalled in this world, and boasting.a fame as extensive as
the universe? Now when the wife o( such a man has been ravished from
him, is he incapable of effecting her recovery himself, that he should
commission another person to execute for him the office of restorii^ his
wife to his bosom? Must not his high reputation be tai*nished in the
opinion of mankind ? I will tell thee, Hanuman^ what is the desire of
my heart; that he may himself put .Maharaja Rawana to death, and
rescue me with a mighty arm, and a prowess worthy of his exalted name.
Lay these my sentiments, O Hanuman^ at the feet of my lord, and fail
not to communicate to him my resolution." The princess then added ;
^ Pursue the route I shall point out for thy return. Ascend the moun^
tain of Sarandib^ where thou wilt perceive a black rock, the spot wherci*
upon ADAM alighted in his descent from heaven. Make thy obeisance
to this rock, embrace and kiss it ; and having so done it will serve thee
C c c for
Digitized by
Google
x^o A GRAMMAR OF THE
for a positioii from wheece to spring when thou jumpest back to the
presence of thy mast^.'* Havmg heard these words he threir himtdf
at the feet of the princess, and then left her to proceed on hts journey.
Having ascended the moimtain of SarandJb^ and approached the black
lock, that sacred spot where the prophet ADAM first touched the earth,
he prostrated hknself before it, grasped it with hts am» »id kissed iL
He then shook himself, and reduced his size to the height of a span
only ; when making a spring from the rock, he jomped towardsr the cky
of Lakar^katakiani and in an instant arrived there. Upon presentii^
himself to Sri Rama^ he was asked at what time he had retmned f He
replied, ^ this very moment," and then throwing hbnsdlf at Ramans
feet, he mad^ a full report to him of all that he had seen, of all that he
had heard^ and all that he had done, from the commencement of hitf
embassy to its ultimate completion» Every circumstance was.Buthfiilly
narrated; Sri Rama, srf^er expressing his joy at hearing that Sitlat
Dewi was stilt living, addressed Hwmman in these words. ^ O iECflh
numa% every proceeding of thine, every act thou hast performed merka
my approbation as good service, with the exception only of what nelatet
to the burning of the city of LaHgka^puru Thia was not an act of
manly valour. I feel sentiment» of stroi^ compassion for the (unibrtu*
nate inhabitants of the) city. And what useful purpose could its de*
struction answer?*' Hanuman hung down his head and remained
silent. After a short pause Rama said to him ; ^^ Now, Hanuman^
what is your opinion as to the most pracdcaUe means of transporting our
army, which consists of many hundred thousand troops» to Lan^ka^'purii
which (as you know) is an island surrounded by the sea?" " My opi*
nion is, replied Hanuman^ that our only effectual oparati» wiil be that
of
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 191
of damming out the ^ by a otole, to serve as a brk%e for marching the
army into LOT^ka^puri/'
(^!r- «Sj/i^ tt^-K*^ uf u^ ^^ fc)'*HA cie^ C^^* ^J^ ^J^ J"^ ^4f
iir^^^ «> u^3 ^j^ u^*^ fb ^j^ <^ J^ ^^ JPj«> s^ '^*^ ^^ dr:^ |*^
<< Orders were then given by Maharaja Rawana for admitting Ha-
nunian to* the audietice (as amhassadntir from Sri Rama). When he
was inti*oduced to* the presence, he perceived the monarch seated upon a
high thronf6^ surrounded by all the feudd princes, the nobles, ministers,
and warrioui^, and ^resolving that his master's consequence should not
suffer from toy degradation of himself, he extended his tail to the length
of an hundred fathoms, and having coiled it in spiral foldk, he sat upon
it ; by which means he and Maharaja Rawana were seated at an equal
degree of elevsition. Having thusr placed himself, he communicated the
proposals of -Sri Rama^ and delivered his letter to the Maharaja.''
^^ er^ ^^ J^ ^f:"^ J'^^ J^ ^r* uy C^^J y ^j^^ u^J ^J "^
o\3 ^^y^ virfc^** e;^ *^ u;^V ^-s-^*^ 4;^^ u-^ ^i::-^^ j>^\ CS»^ ^yi ^^ ^^
Digitized by
Google
192 A GRAMMAR OF THE
j^ jJU jj\ r*^jJj ^1j5 ^^y l;;^ ^,Ufc> uJ-J ^ jj^ i-^j^ ^y ^Uj ^\
cuAto ^jS <djbiX-> ^<to|^ ^i jci ; ^ jJuJf i.JSu^ u^/^ l3*V *ii^' s^*V diV «iii^^ ?JJ-**
jli? j£3l ,*,^M5i ^ j3U; d&\ ^y ^/»\j ^^ ^ jjb u^»^»^ /j tiilU- |>;^
v/^ tj^^ ijh^^ Ji'^ tj^^ u'^y Ji^^ *^^ ijr^ ^^y ^-^ ^^ ^
^U ^ i^ CS^ d4 <^^ u^y i^^ uj^ ^ u^ *^V e)'*^ ^^^ *-^ ^ o^*^
^^ ^^ cu^j«i> J2I vA;ij4»^ ^'^ j*AiJ^ ^-'Z J*^ 4AP uP *— ^ uP J^*
*' It has already been mentioned that the wife (of India Ajit\ the
princess Komala Indra Dewtf was in a swoon (at the time of his depar-
ture for the field of battle, under the walls of Langka-pw^i); but upon
hearing the war shout of his army, she suddenly started,, and awoke from
her state of insensibility. Perceiving that he was no longer near her, and
intelligence arriving of his being slain, she wept and fainted away. Her
mother came to her, lamenting and weeping, and sprinkled her with rose,
water. Upon recovering she threw her arms about the neck of her
infant daughter^ and then loudly gave vent to her grief in these words:
" Alas my honoured lord 1 O thou who wert the ornament of my life,
thou art lost, and where shall I search for thee ? thou hast vanished,
and where shall I seek thee ? Where is now my iord, that his sister
(spouse) may find him? In the plain, I pray thee, where. is my lord?
in the mountains, where is my lord? in the woods, where is my lord?
In the field of battle have you chanced to see my brother, where his
sister may find him out ? Why did my lord abandon this his unfortunate
and
Digitized by-
Google
MALAYAN LAN&UAGB. 1^3
and wretched mate? At the revy moment 6f hk f^retobg her to his
bosom, be disappeared from her s^ht la whitt phriM ii he concealed
from the view of Ua dkconsolate, forlorn siitet^ ? My Wither was en-
dowed with Superior wisdom. Nolle could eqfukl IStsif itoiie could be
placed in caitiparisDn i^iik him. Ahs, thofie feieicldiis beaktiThave glutted
their appetites (with Im flesh), sava^ as the rhiiffitetoii #hcr derours its
own offspring ! Alis^ <n)r lord, thy duld is kft, i hel^sr aiiid duMStute
orphan ; shje is redboed to the state 6f one ki need of dharitable' protec-
ti<m ; to the stake of a capCire slave, liable ta b6 profiuiecl by dxe tondh
d[ vulgar handtr'* The princess then hid farelri'ey tor fier mddker, with
the inteationE of wcendKrig^ the funeral pile of her' hustiand ; but the
mother, ¥Pitb a flood of tears, embraced and kissed her da^hter, cadea*
vouring vnA sweelfy-aflfectionate wotds to soefli) anc^ divert faftr from the
resolutiixt of bummg berselll <^ Think nbt^ my chHd; said she, of
makii^ thyself a saerifice whilst the age of thy mfant is yet so tender»
When she shall stand lesft* in need of thy aatj do as thoir ikiayest juc^e
right." The priteĕsa then seized a kris, and attempted to staft herself,
but her modier matched the weapon from her hand.'*
EXT1ACT& from the Poem of Radm Maniri and Kani
Tambuhan.
iiu D d d
Digitized by
Google
194 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^ ^ia- «^j^ ti<y- * jAis jAf^ yhj
^y CjU y^ <Jj«» * ^jj^ tr'U jt^i-^ 4^«* ji>
*^"^ c>'J^ «;'!»' w?r* * t:y,j^,ej^ *a- jj/ cl^l*
^fJy-. tiiiU Jjl^j 4j^^ * s&s*** *^y dU^ *^V-
(^. jjj j<xJ ^^1»« <» «ifr'lyf ^y ""^ ^^
JV«^yL 4l^ ^A-J * ^£^ ^ *»s?;e ttj^i;
«/-^ jJrtP U-^ yjl 4^1 ♦ ^f/U^ ^0; jt«4> *-*
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 195
i}\^Ji^ Jsj^ix.
*
*f^ j^ ^*b tzfj^
iZi/^C^^j^
*
*^ji ^j- ffi^j ^^j
yl,^>«^V^"^
*
yui JUtu AfA^ i^\iij{
**-*-^ t/j*»* i:^^ izl^jy^
*
yl «yj^ Jiy »,j- j
*^ lif^ji f^ "j^
*
<^ ttA> *^y ue'J;
il^»^^j-U^4in
*
d^ /b1 JL> 4)J<te*
^^(^y^t,^
*
4JiL.jC£1>bU'l-jK^
co^ t^y J^ ,i)ty
¥t
«-A- Jljjiiipii
i£^\i ^ j>ii ^0»i
*
UUkl^ ^^J JJm ^j^A^^ftL.
y^^^cjU4jj,,
*
ttf^ 4>^ j»» e>^j?«>
^J^j^J^
*
^U ^U <>-U 40,
^jj «r^ ^^ «:HsJ«>
*
•/js^ui'i't^'- J^"
^jH^ b^- ur*^" J ^^
«
^(;3 itLjU u:^! ,«;UC
\^<> J^ Cuaf i}^^'^
«
*jJV V''> u>5 ui«e;
t>j' 4U-- ,«^ ^bo
•»
^^i4^ CV ur^y ^^^- ^
cyl^ yjU ,.^;-y ^J,
♦
U-^ jlU ^jS ^JcJk
♦^J^J^UJ''^^
«
^^jjb Jij blJL^t ihi\
^(p/ ^,b u-^" ^ C/T^
* ■
^rJi *^i «^ s^
^jijo- jjj^- ^bj» jAi*
*
^^U ^jJb 4i^ ^j^ c-^
grjU? jjjjj JU (_*b
*
^^jii yjo tjiAc i^^
^JT^ (>i^ ^ ^J^
*
ya? (•W-' ^ ^J \j
WJf^vJ k>V" *^ \s«a»
*
,j^ jj^ JA^J ^W.
ttfl^ w^r** tr^^ d)!;j- .
*
^ ^ Ju^ *jjbj*
j^r^y^y-^}
¥1
,sfy(<JiL^^^
f'/jV- url/? ttjsi^
*
^jy. C^ iij\ JiU^
^j*\^J^j»4
*
j^j^\j C^y V? ^J^
^ 4i^- J/j*(^
*
\pj JiAm> iA^^f^^-ij
i/iSo
Digitized by
Google
19$ A GRAMMAR OF THE
Jk^yzj^j^.'^jif
*
J^^'>^dr•Jfe^d2lJJ
t^M- «^ !>•> y**
*
t^joUj cf^L c^iy
•A*»» J--»^\A^ wj» t^
«
«A»*- oi»»; *!>< re^^
H^> iPj ^J «^
4t
i,r>»;* jLt j$L« jj
^jj^ 4?^ ^lCr»
«
'«/>»- tt»!'*; cjJ^K/ V^
Up<Hi cittaingin ^ht of the mxiamented pleasure garden,
The heart oC the prince felt new rapture.
The hiossoms wore the sulsject of his admiration,
And the birds drew near as if to welcom his steps.
Radin hmnediately took his arrow^tobe»
To shoot the birds that were within his Tiew.
They al^hted upon every rambuUtn tree,
And flew and hopped around ;
Some on lh0 flowec-heanng nmgukehnr^
FluUtnng sdbQut in every direction ;
All secBsing to isvike the approach of Raim Ufrntri,
Who stUl ad yancM i g n^rer to them,
Blew an arrow thwMig^ his tube
And strvfih a sartndU binL
It descendednear to a tree bearing ehumpaka flowers,
Within the enclosed ptecincts of the gsuMko,
And fsdUngjpsaduaULy,
Alighted «pon the bom at which Kani TMiMun worked
One of her cpmpai^on» bMtenii^ towards hei^ saidi
<< Wi^noiyoiirhighness^gently try tocatcktt;
*^ As if y^ had been cOTomissioned hither,
<' The bird comes to deliver itself up/* Kmi
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 197
Kani Tambuhan instantly arose,
And asdeavoured to seize the bird as it ran from her.
Radin (in the mean time) thus addressed Wtra Dandani;
" Which way, my brother, flew the bird we saw just now?
" I wish you to catch and bring it to me.'*
Wtra Dandani made his obeisance, and then went his way.
^ If, said he, it has fallen within these lofty walls,
By what contrivance shall I be able to get at it ? '*
He proceeded onward, alone,
Until he reached the gate of the enclosure.
There, espying through a crevice,
He perceived the bird fiutterii^ about.
Badin presently followed him to the spot.
And looking through an interstice of the wall,
Said, " Who may that be, ;my brother,
" Whose appearance bespeaks her the daughter of a prince?"
Gontinumg to gaze, his heart began to throb.
And he could no longer restrain his impatiehoe.
His astonishment deprived him of utterance,
His senses being overpowered by what his eyes 'beheld.
Wtra Dandani smiled, though with feelings of anxiety, '
Knowing the state of his companion's hetart;
And as he perceived him lost in admiration, '
Thus spoke, as he stood behind him.
*« I think it is advisable that we should retura,
^^ And leave off" gazing at the daughters of other men.
E e e "Your
Digitized by
Google
19» A GRAMMAR OF THB
*^ Your servant has heard it reported
<« That the person you aeOf k no other than a captiTe prineets.
«< Do not, I pray your bishneM, remain so near,
<^ As she is guarded by the order of yonr royal mother.
^< So soon as you are marriled (suitably to yonr rank),
«^ Can yonr father hate any objection to giving her to yon 9**
Radin replied, "with an animated countenance,
** I do not chuse to return.
<* Order the keeper of the gate to OMue hither,
*^ That I may question him myself/^ ^
Wtra Dandani bowed and left him.
He said to the porter, *^ Follow me inunediatety ;
<* By Radin Mantri is your attendance required."'
Affrighted at the sun»bons he came running.
And when he drew near, made hie obeisance,
Bending his head to the earth.
Radin, smiling, said to him,
*^ Open this g^te my old friend.*'
The porter, still approaching, said reepectfully,
*< Your slave is afraid to do what hie mistress has fbrbiddea*
^^ Her orders to me are to guard these stone walls,
" And not to suffer any one to enter.'*
Radin said to him angrily.
His face glowing with passion,
^' You must open it instandy ;
^^ And no person beside myself shall ester.
"If
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. «99
** If you refuse, be assured
«^ I shall immediately <^ut your kead to atomt/* .
The gate-keeper became exceedingly terrified;
His body quaked and his bones rattled.
Without being able to say one word in nptyf
He drove back the bolt of the do<nr«
The entrance being thus opened by the old man^
The ind^nation of the prince was soothed»
He stepped forward and passed into the garden^
Leaving his coihpanions withoutside the gate.
Upon Radin MantrTs entering,
He was observed by all the young attctidantf,
Every one of whom ran away.
Leaving Kani Tambukan entirely to faenel£
Radin drawing near whilst her back was towardii Iiim,i
Suddenly snatched her shuttle and seized ber baud.
Kani Tambuhanhtxn^ alarmed looked about,
paying to herself, ^^ Who can this be?*'
She tried to run behind the gavdeo-seat,
When Radhiy smiMng sweetly, said to hot,
" O ! my lovely celestial nymph,
" Whither do you wish ta flee 3f
« Your eyes glisten, your countemttiee glows ;
" Do not, my soul ! be terrified of angry*
*« Your brother's motive for oomii^, hkher,
" Is only to make inquiry of youvseii^
" What
Digitized by
Google
«00 A GRAMMAR OF THE
" What country gave you birth,
" And what events have brought you to this place ?
" What, let me ask is yoiur name,
" And how do you name the cloth you are weaving ? *'
Kani Tambuhan wept and hung her head,
Her mind being extremely agitated*
Gendy making her obeisance.
She said with a sweet, affecting voice,
" The name of your servant is Kani Tambuhan,
" And that of my work is karingsang xvayang.
<( Our gracious mistress has given directions,
" That we should all be daily employed in weaving,
" For the lady whom your highness is to take to wife,
" The princess whom you are going to woo at Banjar KulatL^
To this Radin replied with a laugh,
" To Banjar Kulan I am not goii^."
He embraced her neck, and caressed her, saying,
^' O ! my life, how beautiful thy countenance ; •
^^ Thou art to be compared to the celestial nymphs,
^* And if thou vanishest from me^ where can I search for tbee^**
Radin Mantri then proceeded to kiss her.
When she cried out, and wrested herself from. him.
All the damsels now thought of interfering,
And felt indignant at his conduct.
" This proceeding of the prince (said they)
" Will presently draw upon us much anger from the queen/'
J»
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
201
4:;»^ u/j^ «-fel-
**5j t .» ^ ■ ■**» ■ fc .It
^^/^ uu^ (1^1 ^Jj^jy*
*1^^y u^ Cr*'"'* c/**
d»5^ cA^ ^/^ 4*^
yd^ cd-i; ^*^ u;*^
c;fer^ dV i^ <ir<
v^J JV *»^5^ d«^
iJ^jJ
* wM ^J^ cr^' dri-»;
* -s/b V/ u^ jj^"
■X- ^i3j^ iX*-^ ^^
* ^ Cil ^\j; -JlouJ
F f f
Digitized by
Google
202
A GRAMMAR OF THE
JU; c/51 jfjuj ^Lj
^ e«^ <^0^ vir5^
^^^Lij} c:^L» (iligfU i^^j/
t^U^ u>^ uJIk« «^j ^li
^ujk^ d^^y ^L^itO
•A^ «;e'*j c;^ JPy wj^
^U (K;l* uJU AijjbJ
* eM «-^ jH>e ujy^'lr-
* S^ji'>;J J;^ ^^y. J>9< J
VJ
,u^-
uy«
Jj «jU *-*- ,j/-*4- * »^J^ <J^ i:f<> yf/, *^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN
JLAl
NGUAGE.
'^p^ii^C^jii^
^fr
\^jiJiji il^y ti;V^ *«''-•
cjfcj^Vttr-^»^
*
^U- ^>^^ 4a-
\j\j <^\.'^ ^ u-^U
*
^^^iA<iJfi*
,J^ J J^ '^\
*
ujsf^j. ^yf <^^J^
J^^^p^\^oJi^
*
j^ c^-« J^J^
jLXd ^^'^r< aU»<<>mi
*
[r^ ^J.<i JV ws^-V
^m.A^J OU 4l»JtJk
*
j.2Ljj di^jtt ^
tl^ U-b ^jj^
*
^i^j^^^J^
CSjy Jl»- fi^y «^W"
«
cW ^^=^ *!*? */^ «r*^
^jy^} *V" u^>
«
•/r* cji*»; Jj» *s5y
^^U Vi-^l JS;? ^^
*
ujd^cr^*^-^
^Uj J!I ^> tH/*
*
t,L,jJ ^ Aiy ^ jU
^^ ^^^-jj ob ,*;X;j
*
Cf^ ^L, ^^U- ^>
^^J ^^ ^w»
*
c;^ c/ f^" sf W*
.2P3
<* The. queen then gaVe command
For calling the bostangi to her presence.
The bostangi attended, and drawing near,
The royal personage said to him ;
'* Take with you 57 Tambuhan^
" And convey her to the woods."
To which she added, in a low vdce,
^^ Extinguish her so that she shall be no more seen.
" Dare not to vary from my orders."
The bostangi retired, making his obeisance.
The hearts of all who were present throbbed,
Their countenances became pale, and their bodies trembled
They
Digitized by
Google
t04 A GRAMMAR OF THE
They tbcHiglit within their hearts,
This queen's disposition is most wicked ;
Her nind is diabolicaUy vile ;
And ever her passion she has no command.
All the princesses felt emotions of pity,
On perceiving the situation of Kani Taxribuhan^
The queen again said,
*< Let SS Tambuhan be immediately taken away ;
** And should you meet the prince (in the forest),
** Desire my son to come to me with q>eed."
Kani Tambuhan then arose,
And with slow steps decended (from the palace),
Followed by her consoling friend Kani Tedahan;
The bostangi walking in front of them.
To those who beheld her departing.
She appeared like the moon amongst passing* clouds ;
Like the moon in the fulness of her orb,
Which seem^ the brighter the :more it is cootempbt^d.
Every beholder was filled with compassion.
Kani Tambuhan did not give a look behind her.
Having reached the outer gate,
She sat down awhile to rest her feet ;
I
Impressed with the idea
That her existence drew near to a close.
She reflected on the tenderness of her husbaqd,
And then upon her present condition. ,
^* There
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 205
*• There appears no probability of meeting'
" (said she) my lord, Radin Inu.'*
The tears gushed from her eyes ;
And her two attendants sympathised with her.
The bostangi said to Kani Tamhuhan^
'* Let us proceed, my lady, with more expedition,
^^ Towards the forest where game abounds,
" That we may the sooner find the prince."
Having reached the bank of a river, ' •
The strand of which was beautifully smooth.
She felt extreme lassitude,
And grasped the hands of her two female friends.
Her respiration became violent
As the sound of rushing wind.
She reposed for a moment bbneath a treei
Doubtful of being able to proceed.
The bostangi again said to the women,
" I pray you keep moving slowly onwacd; .
" We shall presently have passed the w6od|
" And shall arrive at the hunting-ground^**
Kani Tambufian set forward once more,
Making an eflFort to draw her feet after her.
The notes of the velvet-coated birds,
Added only to her melancholy.
Serving to remind her of Radin' s conversation,
When he amused her in the hours of repose.
G g g Thejr
Digitized by
Google
±q6 a grammar of the
They now came to a level rock,
Formed by nature like a seat
Their conductor turning towards them, said,
" Here, my lady, is our resting place/'
Kani Tambuhan got up and sat upon it.
Her feet hanging down from excess of fatigue.
Kani Tedahan^ her faithful attendant, said ;
** The apprehensions of yoiiir servant are strongly excited^
t* Led as we are into this wilderness,
** Where there is no mark of human footstep/'
These words increased the anxiety of her mistress*
And pearly drops ran down her face.
She uttered not a word.
But only wiped the tears from her eyes*
Her two attendants also wept,
And continued in a state of stupefaction.
Kani Tambuhan rising from hor seat, said,
" Wherefore, my old man, are we brought hither ?
<^ The day being now far advanced,
*« Is the prince Radin Mantri still at a distance?"
The bostangi replied in a serious tone,
" This, my lady, is the limit of our JQuraey.
" Your slave received command from the queen,
^^ To conduct your highness into this wood,
" And here to put you to death,
<^ On account of your cohabitatioa with Radin Mantri^
« Who
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. 207
" Who was matched with a princess at Banjar Kulan^
" And may now refuse to take her to wife."
Hearing these words from Kani Tambuhan
He was affected with strong emotions of pity.
Approaching, he mildly said to her,
*^ Pardon, O lady ! whatever offence I may be obliged to commit*
" How can your slave avoid it,
*' Under the terror of being put to the test of an oath ?
" This day, my orders are to extinguish your life,
** And I cannot possibly evade them/'
*^ If you should meet with my lord the prince,
^* Convey to him my humble salutation,
<* With my wishes for perfect happiness in his marriage,
*^ And a long and prosperous reign/'
Kani Tedahan having attentively listened
To all the commands of her mistress,
Was overwhelmed with grief;
And as she bent her head upon her lap,
The tears gushing from her eyes,
Moistened the garments of Kani Tambuhan.
" From your childhood, said she, I have taken care of you,
" Whilst we still dwelt at Tar^ong^uta.
" No difference ever arose between us ;
" And we have been compamons in misfortune.
" Your
Digitized by
Google
2o8 A GRAMMAR OF THE
^^ Your servant's wish has long been,
f^ That in death also we should be companions.
<^ Reflection only augments my grief,
" And my heart melts within me.
" Slay me first, O my father!
^' That I may not witness the fate of my mistress.**
The princess then said with dignity,
^^ Proceed to execute the commands of your queen!'*
Her words thus pronounced
Excited pity in the heart of the bostangU
Whose own feelings would have restrained him from the deed.
He drew his kris^ and again he sheathed it ;
But thrust, at last, the long and welUtempered blade
Into her breast, till the weapon appeared at her back.
Kani Tambuhan on receiving the fatal wound.
Fell without a struggle to the earth.''
^k
Specimens of the Pantun or proverbial Sonnet»
\J^ ,^^^ Jybj jd ¥: ^*c *;L* Jbi^ cyU
^Jci^ ^Jw» Jj^ j;>U ¥r fj^ ^J^ tW J*^
i^ icu ch ^y^ ¥: ^j^i^ t?y J>-^ tj^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE.
tog
oUj^ Jit 4JjJy 4t
" Butterflies sport on the wing around,
They fly to the sea by the reef of rocks.
My heart has felt uneasy in my breast,
From former days to the present hour.
They fly to the sea by the reef of rocks.
The vulture wings its flight to Bandan.
From former days to the present hour,
Many youths have I admired.
The vulture wii^ its flight to Bandan,
Dropping its feathers at Patanu
^ Many youths have I admired.
But none to compare with my present choice.
His feathers he let fall at Patanu
A score of young pigeons.
No youth can compare with my present choice.
Skilled as lie is to touch the heart.**
CJ) ^ Jrt- AjA
« A maiden draws water from the well ;
The bucket falls off, leaving only the cord.
H h h
Consent
Digitized by
Google
»10 A GRAMMAR OF THE
G(Misent, my life, to the departure of your friend.
And do not grieve at the separation."
" The heron flies into the air,
And dashes down the fish it had caught.
Forbear to grasp burning embers.
Or, feeling the heat, you will quickly let them go."
^ Large ants in the bambu-cane.
A flasket filled with rose-water.
When the passion of love seizes my frame.
From yoa alone I can expect my cure."
ExTKACTS fi-onva moral and satirical Pobm.
•^ir
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANG0AGR tit
^' If yon, my son, are about to take a Wife,
You should look for these (bdr qualifications ;
In order that your family may be prosperous,
And your friends may have pleasure in frequenting your houSe.
In the first place, chuse a person of good Urth ;
In the second, let her be the owner of some thousands ;
Thirdly, elegant in person and sweet in countenance ;
Fourthly, of good understanding and accomplished manners*
Should she be deficient in any one of these^
Take not such a woman to wife.
If you do, your friends will avoid your company^
And you will sit moping like a spectre.'*
• • « «
*
tJ^tJi^O^U^
^\fce,^jJw. JJuJ
*
y^ J u:Jlo u^ J ^su
tt^ t,jX^ Jlj^ ^^\J
*
•*^ u»b* ui/ cA*'
«
i!^^ ^ y^ ijj
jJU Jj J^ *}^ JiV
*
Jjw u»!;^ s^ ir^Ji
*l- ersl^ j^ \Ji
*
iSi/*'^. ttrf^ y^
yLj o1 jjjjj f^y Jp!
*
UJJ^ Ji^ JjV U^
iuj iZfjfj c^t ^\xJ
*
iUji xj^jt ^ dr^j^
i^j! fL, ^juj J J cm
«
'J tJ^ f j)1 ^\^
x/i! sP V^^ J^
*
un?- J-^ J^J C^
^^>J-]}jM
«
*^tfi JUJ d^t ^jiLt
•* Jt is true that those of the present race are wise ;
They have much science, but j^in good sense is wanting.
They
Digitized by
Google
«12 A GRAMMAR OF THE
They arc able to count the stars in the sky,
But cannot tell when ^eir own faces are smutted.
Their employment is mutual obloquy and recrimination,
And every place is filled with inquisitive tattlers.
In these days the behaviour of young women is immodest,
Flirting and toying with the young men.
It was not the case t^ith maidens of former times.
Who possessed much delicacy and sense of shame.
Circumstances are now very different,
And all sort of conversation is familiar to them.
Where there are a number of youthful gallants,
There you will find the young women assembled.
Whose manners assume a variety of hues.
The consequence of all this is but too obvious.
Even the children now o*days (imitate their elders),
And both boys and girls are equally forward*
They play about promiscuously together.
With all the familiarity of man and wife.
Are not such things evident signs,
That the end of the world is drawii^ near? "
Extract from the Annals of the Kingdom oi Achitu
Digitized by
Google
MAXAYAN LANGUAGE. «ii
«4 *l^ aU JU- v>* C^- i*^^ t:>V> t^ ) *S^ c^^ «>» ^Jhi Jj! ^>
<A>^ >* J}> *aJ^\ jAi yJ<**. •ta»*^/ «iS*^ (*J)«> w-il J^. 4J.U ^i,» \j^\ ^^
«JU\ y;fcby jjjVj^ «u*^ fib u-^ (JL^ tj,J,4jy Jb .. J til ^,j»>31 j-4^
^l- J^ oiJS ^JM JUj # ^j^: JLm^ ^b toj^wit .jJ;» C^ .^Jk yJl^ ^. J^
se^ |Jb u:^! Jot; '4!M'(j^b.JUo> J^ «/^b ^^ <f>^ i,fi.«*^ (^jW ^ii,^J^\
^\J oijj ^fl ^,j\ ^jy 4» ut-il xti dX* ^f> 4y j»* J31 ilA-" "ir*^" j4> u>Vj^
jjwt jv w^ s^r» ci^ A fe (JWi;Ai «:^y jii c» iiju m 6 ^u
" The king our sbrereign died on Sunday tbe d^hth diiy of the month
zuTkddah, in the year 1088 (1677), and Padukd Sri sultan Ghayat
S/tah began his reign -on the : sanj^, day* He sat-oji the' throne during
the period of eleven, years and. eight, days, ■ and died on Sunday the
seventh day of the month m*fAt2»{A,..i^^d-year 1099 (1687), upon'which
day also Paduka Sri sultfm,Kanmlat Shah btecam» ]cing« and his ireign
lasted! el^en year^ ibnr nu»th0, and two. days, > nhen he was deposed^
After this there was a succession of fqwrqueeps^ on the thix)neof^c6»t>
the seat of peace, and these fienu^e i^igns conttnued during a period of
sixty yiearsj nine, months, and seventeen days.. Sultan Bedcr ahalam
IStierif Hasham JMmled-^ ascended, the throne on Wednesday the
twentieth day of the month rabVal akhir^ in the year iiii (1699), and
when he had reigned two years, four months, and twelve days, it pleased
I i i God
Digitized by
Google
U4 A GRAMMAR OF THE
God m Ims mercy to visit him vrith contnicdons in his feet and his
hands, so that he was no loiter able to perform the offices of prayer ;
upon which he voluntarily abdicated the government, and retired to >
place called Tanjongj where he died in the year 1113 (i70i). On
Saturday the seventeenth day of the month ramadan^ Perkasa Alam ifm
Ibrahtm obtained the crown and had reigned only two years, three
months and twenty days, when he was deposed from his government on
Wednesday the seventh day of the month muharram. After ^ca inter-
regnum of about three months duration, in the year 1115 (1703), the
8pn of Beder allium succeeded to the throne, by the title of Paduka
Sri saltan Jamal al^lam.*'
The Memoirs of Kei Damang and his Family, written by Incht
La'Udin, his youngest Son, thus conclude,
r^u ^jij\ ^yj^ jWj cnw *j-i jcjui jL. csx^ ^p j^^ (-^ jjj.>
^Uo i^j} ^^ c^ ji ^^ ji yj\ ^} jjy ^b J jJx- ^^ot ijji ^p r^j j5
jj/ fjji J^ ^j VA^" aJL-o Jcifc ^^^ ssjj ^b J pU j-i v^Jj J^j t,U
fjbj v^'u^; ^j1 ,^1 br^^^h y. ^uf J^ *^^ ^^^L. c^u jJii j2:aJ ^
^^1 Uj |jb jfiV J^^ jjj? (dV^ s^y»^ fct ^-J^ ^^^> ^^-* ^t
<< From the period of the loss of their noble father, it is not to be
conceived
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. tts
conceived T?hat cares and troubles have been experienced by every mdi«
vidual of the family of Kei Damang ; the consequence of having left
their native land of Samaiigka. The sons were separated and scattered
over various countries, as their fortunes happened to lead them. Some
remained in the island of Sumatra^ some proceeded to the island of
Balij whilst others sought those parts of Java which lie beyond the
jurisdiction of the Dutch Company. Such were their resting places.
Like birds they directed their flight to wherever the trees of the forest
presented them with edible fruit, and there they alighted. They were
in the state of chickens who had lost their careful mother. When they
found persons who were disposed to favour and compassionate them, td
those they devoted their services. Such has been the condition of Kei
Damang*$ sons since the death of their noble psurent. For the informa-
tion of all respectable persons desirous of knowing their story, this ^ nar-
rative has been committed to writing, and so faithfully, that those who
read may consider themselves as eye-witnesses of the adventures it re*
lates. But the Almighty alone knows what is good and what is evil for
(or, of) his servants in this world."
ExTtACTs from Legal and Theological Works*
i-JtJ 40 j^ i^\ jUj?- ^j*^ «4^ e^W" uj^ ^J^ ij^^ ^^ifi^ .u)f^ *^V ^^
e>W t/ ^^*^ t/^ *^ *-^^ *i^' ^^ ^J^ *^ *^W *^V iuf^ ^3 Jy. u^^
^jy^ CS^ i^Je^J^y u^*> c]j^\ ^a ^«i« ii^^ ^^ Jji Ai^j J-fJ'^ *A>^
" The
Digitized by
Google
^i6 A GRAMMAR OF THE
. «rTlie subject of this chapter is the prayers to be used on the occasion
of .eclipses pf both ^cinds, namely, those of the sun and those pf the
tnoon^ In t^e first place .(It shpuld be mentioned that) the learned have
pot ascertabfd the tfue nature of the eclipse of the sun, for shbii]^^
lie does with his own light, it should not.be liable, to variation. B^
yit^h respect to the eclipse of the moon, as^ she has po light in hers^
and only derives it from the brightness of the sun, it follows that when
^t light is hid from her by the earth's being in the line between h^ m4
the sun, she should become obscured or eclipsed"
^\«3 Jijji ttH< Jy.y. > Jj ^Uiiz^i ^,^)jH sfV ^ s^ ^^jj
^/ir *A>. *M-J "^^ Jjl f b**^" «HaJ ^.^y\ uJiri ^j^ ^. ^^y^
« Thus U 18 (speaking pf the visibility wd invisibiiity of the Deity)
with the light of the sun which is transmitted to the moon ; for the jight
of the latter is not its own proper light, but only that of the sun com-
municated to it, and consequently the moon possesses only a reflected
light from that of the sun. On this account it is that we sometimes see
the moon shining with a full, and sometimes with a duninished light, and
that at other times she is entirely deprived of l^ht"
*t^ '^fi/. ^lA >> a-i Jo ^r^ d^fei ^U ^ U-4.J ^ J^^ ^.^.J^
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. iij-
tt;5<J^<J^ cr^^ frA cP^ H^ tf^ uM/ ^< J*^ Ji^ s^J^ uM ^
<^ The ^e^/^; (or direction of the face in prayer) varies according tot
^le different situadon of countries (with respect to the temple oi Mecca)^'
For the keblat of Egypt the North star must be brought to bear in a
direction from the binder part of the left ear ; for that of Irak» in a
direction from the hinder part of the right ear ; for that of most part of
Ybmen, from the fore part of the left side ; for that of Stria, from the
back ; for that of GujERAT, f^-om tji^ right shoulder ; for the keblat of
inost Malayan countries and of Achin, (he North star must be in a
direction from the fore part of the right fiankj*
^ uuvj^ 4Uy J--J1 ^b 4^jjA-»y«^ ^^ J^ ^ i^jy^*^ u>b fj^^y ^ M
oU jlXf (^IjJ c^j{ is-^ ^du^V*-^ *-^ ^J^ ^y ^^ J*^^ ti LT^ UT^
^^\^ CJ^ t^p ^^ "^ J}i ^'^^^^ ^^ UJ^*^ u/^^ J^ *^^ u^*^. Jb? ^-^2-^
C^ {J*^ drJy <^^^ ^*^ji (^^ fi)ijf^ ^^^J ^^>^ ^^y* ti ^P *^ C/*!^
Jl^ u^^l-U jU ^ ^Jj ji fjJii^ V^l) 4 W ^^^ yjW <^i-tK ^-J:*^ **»'>« *^\?
" Upon a person^s saying to the Prophet (on whom be the blessing of
God, and peace), I see the (new) moon, he began his Fast, and he gave
command to all men to fast also. When the fasting shall have been
duly observed for thirty complete days, of which a respectable person is
to bear testimony, it is proper to discontinue it, although the moon should
not then have become visible, nor any vapour arisen to obstruct the view
K k k of
Digitized by
Google
ai& A GRAMMAR OF THE
of it. . When the (ol^w) taoon baa been obgerved (root any tovrd, it ia
incumbent upon the inhabitants of any other town agreeing with the
former in respect to the time of sun-rise (situated in the same meridian),
k> coflunence their Fast also^ in coDBeqnence of tucfa aj^reemeat ; but
vhere a coinciden^ie with respect to the thne of sun^rise doee not ^xisC,
it is not recjuhred tbat the Fast should take place in that town wh^e tho
moon has not yet been seen, because the difference of the dme of her
becoming visible may be occasioned by the diffetence of the time of sun»
rise at the two places (that is, by the difference of their kmgitudeji*^
uwl
*^ It behoveth u&i to know, and to bear in mtnd, and tohdieve, and to
regulate our actions by the meaning of the words M ^\ <x)t^ in the Arabic
language, in Persian/ and in the language of the people of Paic (the
Mabyaa)« This symbol of Unity srgni^es in Arabic, ^ I have no other
existence than that of God/' As rendered in Petsian it has the same
meaning, and in the language of Pdse it has likewise the above-mentioned
signification^ Now the result of aU these meanings and the intention
of all that ha« be» stated is to prove the Unity of the essence of the
Almighty,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE, ai^
Almighty» with^ hit perfectkinfiy and abo make inamfest hit greatness
and hia gjiory comprehended in that Unity/' (Tln> perversion of the
meaning of the well-known Mahometan symbol or profession of faith,
<* there is ao god bot God," appears to be a pi()us fraud of some sect,
to aofiwei the purpoies of their mystical doctrioe. Ptm kw9 spoken of
was formerly a cify of considerable note, on the northern coast of Su*
matra, afterwards subjected to the donmion of Aehin, and reduced to
insignificance. The book from whence these extracts are made, written
in a fine hand and with uncommon accuracy, was probsMy ciemiposed al
that jda^e.)
^^ ^yrr y J^^ ^^^^yyr/if^^ij^u^^ crt/T ^J-» ^/^^ ^ d>^J^
fct \Jt ^-^ t/*^' XV ^ \J^ ^ t'jy' f^^"^ T^^^^ *^ ^^ ^ u-*^' z^
<< Whto God Almighty had created ^ Holy Ghost, that is to say
the pure Spmt, h^ sai<^ onto him, ikavi shsA be fts a mirror, and in tfaea
alone shall be beheld all existing things. Some time after the creation
of the Holy Ghost, God created all spirits or souls, and the Holy Ghost
is to aU spirits what the stem is to the lynches, and they are to him what
the brandies are to the stem ; but branches which cannot be separated
from their stem nov finil 43ff &om it.'*
Digitized by
Google
ft20 A GRAMMAR OF THE
r
V^ Now there is no other existence distinct from the existence of God;
and all these numerous, objects (of sense) serve only to manifest the exists
ence of the One ; so also do all visible qualities and visible attributes serve
only to manifest His sole existence/'
<* Whoever understand» the words above-mentioned will certamly
know (what is meant by) his proceeding from Gpdi and his (ultimate)
return to Him, and will certainly be aware that his own external nature
is not distinct from the essence of the Deity.'*
<* It is with this object that some of the learned commentators have
adduced an example (of identity and diversity) in the instance of ^^ wave'"
and '^ water;" for with respect to appearance and name, the wave is to
be distinguished from the water i but if ypu view and consider them with
respect to. their real, internal nature, wave is not distinct from water, or
only so far as regards exterior form and name."
Genesis,
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. «at
Gbn^sis, Chap. xlv.
\i )iy »oi> t >> Jf^J ^ \j^ ^j^ ^;Jt>W CJ^'i ^^^ v^\f^ Jji alUJ J-i^ uX* (;^J4A
jtjw ^j.4 j1 41UJ c1X« CS^ir^ jijJj^ ^j^ ^^;iC ^jMi ^jj^ i^\ lJI* (ilL^t
^j^ ^^j,^ ^iiXc;b ^;j)5 4^1 uX* • i)^J^^ *^ ^j^ {J^J^ <-^d J?f*^ «dV*
^ idkrf cfs ^^ J^^f^} \j^^ J^ j^ *J^ s?r^ ^^^ uX« CSi^ d;^-s«
^JkXJ^ 4>\ clASf iL^ i^JuA^ iijj\ C/t e^l^^r* <^ ^i^ ^V;^ ^ u^a^ ilJ^ • <^
H^b ^^\fl^ ^y*i?y o1 aIj g^lC ^...^ • j%l^ cij^ cJj c/lj jTy-^ wui ^1 ijr"^
*^ • ttje^ J*^ u**^ -^V c^ ur^^ eM-te cr^^" 1^ JS^" ^ u>^ ui' ^^"
jj ffj) ^bj Js^ c^ 1»^ c/^ H^^ r^ *^^ ^ ^ if^ *^ ^^
<-«^ ^ U5^ tt/* i:^^ u?>V •** *-^V c^ <-^ *-2i^^ 'Jurf ^ C^ ^1 ^AjU 4^jU^
^b j%^ JL Jij ^\ jL. ^^b ^^\ /1\ c/1j^ «^j j1 ^^ JiJ ^^^ ^Uo
u^ J ^^ u^ J P^ J-^ ^^ t^^ ^^ uJ^ ^^ (J ^ u;^
, ^J L 1 1
Digitized by
Google
tM A GRAMMAR OF THE
aStjt^ u^ ui^l (jufJ i^Jui |#\^ ^ c:^lj.«i^ jLi Jidjo^ Jbj (1^\L^ jLi cAa;
cljU jj u^b tji^l ^U U.SU jJb yju- t£^1 tX»^ r^bj-i ^j;i\yU ^^ ^)tJ Jl)
\^\ (UL-U n^l ti;!^ • cji' *^^ cA ttA* ^J? C^ Jby^^U J^ i^ijy tJ r^ •^
.^b ^l^ r j;)!^ ^ ^JUj iJ\jj jo^ ii\i Jb^j |%\^ u^ 4L«1 ViS^ |»l^ 4;^; C^
4^/« • ^ CS^, 4>1 ^ uuol j^a^ i^\S (JbJLi 0J/> /«^y ^ c^^ A^ ^j[^ <-^^ J^
• ^4;* (^ lA^ «i/s» t*^ uh!; «^ iijiy^ (js^ *^ fi>^ ij^ c^j* ^j-^tixi r j^U
^ ii)^? c^ JSp u^^ s^ u)^ /^^ u^ c-^U ^^ i^jI^ j^) ^jLi ^b yiM ^l?
;<lxU JJ^ ^\s^j ^ 4^1 aUUjj lL^ JU^ cJJ e)0^*^J-* er^-H J*^ • J^"
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE- ^3
*jn Aj^ irJui u^jjt ^ (i^"^ J^ ^^ s^^ J^ i^^^ ^-i^-^j^ «^ (4;:^«> ^ ^
U$;J JjM 4^j c::^ jjoii ^b ui)S ' jU C5l vJJuJb j\ ch C^t (*-A^ji ^-^^
The Gospel of St. Matthew, Chap, vi,
dJ 4>t 4>\J ^^,^ ^4^^t uU|Jj ^Jl^ ^ ^^U ^Uw ^^ ^jfA^ j%\^ ^^U rflaii^
iUU <5ju^ ^^^ y:^^ J^t ^ cj.^ . c5^ j\ y ^Uj I^L Jli* *^jV (M
*^^b <Li*^ JIj 4::->;{^ (^Ij erjui jil:^ Fjj^ ^^^-^ ^^Uiu \fji^ ^-^ Ka?^ i^j^
g?>>^'4^Vsi>?y fci cj|y-M. uL^^ ti (^liw uX« s/j-^j> i^j^ ^e^ s?^ • oj^^
cJjo- ^SjL- ^^U di^ ^Jr (J^i^^ v^ ''^ J.^ *^ u)^*^ ^-^ J\i>c?»U ^^1
vl^ c^U ^ cs^J j1 2:^ |»\a) jyS^ U<>;; J) l%j;uJ ^dJL^ ^b ^iAj Jtj^ ^ISU^
^ CJjL» iz.'^(ij< ^^ ^\) %jj^\ d >; L> r^ ^^pj |%r4::i^\^ T^^ a^ «dxeU^ ^^^^:^'*'*^
Digitized by
Google
«04 A GRAMMAR OF THB
J[ ^jt r^J^ ^^ ^jj • ^ ^^\\> ^-C*o c^jfs ^U iiiJU Ajs». ^
• J^ i3* i^f^ est «^jUid aIu ilX« '^*^iAmS jtoi ^«-iU o>« i4y^^ /*^j^
^\C« |j,j^ ^^ J jiU ^jjl cy;A- ^Jij y;eU ^lyy (»\^ JlCfc* ^^ • j»i»l^
aU— ^lyjj i^\ fp>S ^^U A* (j^lfc)^ ^\ j^ e,^ «-*u j/vj- «S-s^y* wj'^
ii,i*i f^ yjr*) row ^jj «lii jyi*-;* |»s^ 4UU • rc^ ^jj «i-it yJL*« j^
J^J''^^ J^J^iA^ «^ c^J? 41^»** cL^^.jJbo rjcj |,jrp C^ JU^ itUj4»
kJit^ Ju (>1 |Jb« j)jC»- ,^i cji* a\ 4s^1 Jjii |y • ^ o1 ui^ ^^o Jjtfti
^y ^ tj^l ^j* J\ ^^ v-ii. tf^U j1 J.1S-. jli-- »Jb- . ^;;» ^ ^
«J3j» «^1 jSl jj^S ^ ArfU^ yb cy|j- 4U ^J*v«-• i/1 «jU eJljJ ui^ wj* y 'j*;^
f!/' «W< sW'* *^)t^/^ J^ c^ *-^- f^ *;y e^ c;»^ ^^) |.i--. j^ |*l^ iJt yb
jyb
Digitized by
Google
MALAYAN LANGUAGE. »5
^ ^ ^^ru:^U« 4ly>A;A «^s-^^^^ty^ f^ «-^ ud^ u/t J*^ • *^yf «^^ CJt^
4Cs^ j>2 Jb^ \j!j ,i/H^ J«> «>^ c^L/V ^^>> icJi^j u^ (<->W^ ^) y^
4J\a jf3< Js^ «!-*?yJ (J^ *^V MHlV«r-«-i • t;^t jj/ fet (»>» (^ jJ^ Jj* 'jl
C^ *^^ ji ^^ J^Ji} ^ CJ^ ^U J^ 411 J\^} ttww^ 4Jdc*
*i^^ ^^ dJir^J- tt^j^ tt^ w-*V jN^t 44,/ */>tt;W tt^ «-^j^ (J^ <^
FINIS.
LONDON:
IV<i>rf ly Cox «Ml Bavu*, TS> <"• Omk* At.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
'■X
3V^"
i-^si
m\
^
?^»^'*
^^c
^"^^v
M^lS«^«^
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11